• SV-iS7 is the official name for the iS7 series inverters.
• This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and electric
devices.
• Keep this manual near the product for future reference whenever setting change, maintenance
or service is required.
• Ensure that the field operators and service engineers can easily access this manual.
• For detailed information about the optional extension boards, including the specifications and
the requirements for installation and operation, refer to the instruction manuals that are
supplied with the products.
Safety Information
ii
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating
conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death.
Safety symbols in this manual
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or
death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or
property damage.
Safety information
• Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate the
inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of the high voltage terminals or the charging area to
the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or touch
the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the power is on or
during operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious property damage.
• Do not open the cover of the equipment, even when the power supply to the inverter has been
turned off, unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the cover may
result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.
• The equipment may hold a charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a
multi-meter to make sure that the remaining voltage is below 30 VDC before working on the
inverter, motor, or motor cable.
iii
Safety Information
• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.
• Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty, disconnect the
power supply and have the inverter professionally repaired.
• The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled to
avoid burns.
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil, to get inside the
inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to malfunction or
result in a fire.
• Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty.
• Do not use cables with damages or cracks on the protective insulation when wiring the inverter.
Damaged insulation may cause misoperation, an electric shock or a fire.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and result
in an electric shock.
Note
The maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined in
IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage.
About This Manual
iv
About This Manual
This operation manual describes the specifications of the SV-iS7 series inverters and provides
detailed information required for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the products.
This operation manual is intended for users with a basic knowledge of electricity and electric
devices. Read this manual carefully to install, operate, and maintain the products safely and
properly.
The following table lists the chapters in this manual, and brief descriptions of the information
provided:
Chapter Chapter name Information provided
1 About the Product Basic information about the product that is required for safe
installation and operation
2 Technical Specifications Product ratings and I/O types
3 Installing the Inverter
Information required for the installation of the product,
including considerations for installation locations and
operation environment
4 Connecting the Cables Information required for connecting power supply and signal
cables
5 Peripheral Devices Information about the peripheral devices that can be
connected to the input and output terminals of the product
6 Using the Keypad Information about the keypad display and the operation keys
on the keypad
7 Basic Functions Information about configuring the inverter to run the basic
functions
8 FLearning Advanced
eatures
Information about configuring the inverter for advanced
system application
9 Using Monitor
Functions
Information about monitoring the inverter for operation
statuses and trip conditions
10 Using Protection
Features
Information about the functions to protect the motor and the
inverter
11 Communication
Function
Specifications for the RS-485 network communication
between inverters and other devices
12 Troubleshooting and
Maintenance
Information about identifying the failures and anomalies
during operation and resolving them
13 Table of Functions Table of all functions with brief descriptions
14 Functional Safety Information about the products compliant with the safety
standards, and the safety functions
15 Classified Product Information about the products approved for marine
application
16 Using a Single Phase
Power Source
Considerations for operating the inverter with a single phase
power source
Table of contents
1
Table of Contents
1 About the Product ........................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Preparing for Installation and Operation ...................................................... 1
1.1.1 Identifying the Product ................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Checking the Product for Defects or Damage .......................................... 3
1.1.3 Preparing the Product for Installation and Operation ........................... 3
1.1.4 Installing the Product .................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 Connecting the Cables ................................................................................... 3
1.2 Part Names .......................................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 Interior and Exterior View (IP 21 Model Types Less than 22 kW [200 V]
/ Less than 75 kW [400 V]) ............................................................................ 4
1.2.2 Interior and Exterior View (IP 54 Model Types Less than 22 kW
[200/400 V]) ..................................................................................................... 5
1.2.3 Interior and Exterior View (Model Types 30 kW and up [200 V] / 90
kW and up [400 V]) ........................................................................................ 6
2 Technical Specifications .............................................................................................. 7
2.1 Input and Output Specifications 200 V Class (0.75–22 kW) ....................... 7
2.2 Input and Output Specifications 200 V Class (30–75 kW) ........................... 8
2.3 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (0.75–22 kW) ....................... 9
2.4 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (30–160 kW) ...................... 10
2.5 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (185–375 kW) .................... 11
2.6 Product Specification Details ......................................................................... 12
2.6.1 Control ........................................................................................................... 12
2.6.2 Operation ...................................................................................................... 12
2.6.3 Protection Function ..................................................................................... 14
2.6.4 Structure and Operating Environment Control .................................... 14
3 Installing the Inverter .............................................................................................. 16
3.1 Installation Considerations ............................................................................ 16
3.2 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation ........................................... 17
3.3 Exterior and Dimensions (UL Enclosed Type 1, IP21 Type)...................... 21
3.4 Exterior and Dimensions (UL Enclosed Type 12, IP54 Type) ................... 35
3.5 Frame Dimensions and Weight (UL Enclosed Type 1, IP 21 Type) ......... 39
3.6 Frame Dimensions and Weight (UL Enclosed Type 12, IP54 Type) ........ 41
3.7 Installation Procedures for UL Enclosed Type12 and IP54 Type Products
............................................................................................................................ 42
Table of contents
2
3.7.1 Disassembling the Keypad Cover and Keypad ................. ..................... 42
3.7.2 Disassembling the IP54 Front Cover ....................................................... 43
3.7.3 Mounting the Inverter ................................................................................ 44
3.7.4 Connecting the Power Cables ................................................................... 45
3.7.5 Reassembling the IP54 Front Cover and the Keypad .......................... 46
4 Connecting the Cables.............................................................................................. 48
4.1 Removing the Front Cover for Cable Connection ...................................... 48
4.1.1 IP 21 Type Products ..................................................................................... 48
4.1.2 IP 54 Type Products ..................................................................................... 50
4.1.3 90–375 kW, 400 V and 30–75 kW, 200 V Products ................................ 51
4.2 Activating and Deactivating the Built-in EMC Filter ................................... 52
4.2.1 Up to 7.5 kW Inverters ................................................................................ 52
4.2.2 11–22 kW Inverters...................................................................................... 54
4.3 Precautions for Wiring the Inverter .............................................................. 56
4.4 Ground Connection ......................................................................................... 57
4.5 Terminal Wiring Diagram ............................................................................... 58
4.5.1 Up to 7.5 kW Inverters ................................................................................ 58
4.5.2 11–22 kW Inverters...................................................................................... 58
4.5.3 30–75 kW Inverters...................................................................................... 58
4.5.4 90–160 kW Inverters ................................................................................... 58
4.5.5 185–220 kW Inverters ................................................................................. 60
4.5.6 280–375 kW Inverters ................................................................................. 60
4.6 Connecting Cables to the Power Terminal Block ...................................... 61
4.6.1 0.75–22 kW (200 V/400 V) ........................................................................... 61
4.6.2 30–75 kW (200 V/400 V) .............................................................................. 62
4.6.3 90–160 kW (400 V)........................................................................................ 63
4.6.4 185–220 kW (400 V) ..................................................................................... 64
4.6.5 280–375 kW (200 V/400 V) .......................................................................... 65
4.7 Specifications of the Power Terminal Block and Exterior Fuse ............... 66
4.7.1 Cable Length between the Inverter and the Motor ............................. 67
4.7.2 Protective Measures for the Inverter and the Motor ........................... 68
4.8 Control Terminal Wiring for iS7 Inverters Rated for Up To 22 kW ......... 69
4.8.1 NPN Mode (Sink) .......................................................................................... 70
4.8.2 PNP Mode (Source) ..................................................................................... 70
4.8.3 0.75–22 kW (Basic I/O) ................................................................................ 71
4.9 Control Terminal Wiring for iS7 Inverters Rated for 30 kW or More ..... 72
4.10 Terminal Inputs for Inverter Operation ....................................................... 73
4.11 Cable Specifications for Control Block Wiring ............................................ 75
Table of contents
3
4.12 Setting the Built-in Surge Filter ...................................................................... 76
4.13 Activating or Deactivating the Surge Filter ................................................. 77
4.13.1 iS7 30–75KW (400 V) Inverters .................................................................. 77
4.13.2 iS7 90–375 kW (400V) Inverters ................................................................ 77
4.14 Post-Installation Checklist ............................................................................... 79
4.15 Test Run .............................................................................................................. 80
4.15.1 Entering Easy Start Mode ........................................................................... 80
4.15.2 Setting the Basic Parameters in Easy Start Mode ................................. 81
4.15.3 Checking the Inverter Operation ............................................................. 83
5 Peripheral Devices ..................................................................................................... 84
5.1 Wiring Switch, Electronic Contactor, and Reactor Specifications ........... 85
5.1.1 Wiring Switch, Short Circuit Switch, and Electronic Contactor ........... 85
5.1.2 Reactors ......................................................................................................... 87
5.1.3 Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU) and Resistor ............................................. 90
5.1.4 DB Unit Dimensions .................................................................................... 95
5.1.5 Indicators on the DB unit ......................................................................... 101
5.1.6 DB Resistors ................................................................................................ 101
5.1.7 DB Resistor Dimensions ........................................................................... 103
5.1.8 Keypad Extension Cable for Remote Control (Optional) ................... 105
6 Using the Keypad ..................................................................................................... 108
6.1 About the Keypad ........................................................................................... 108
6.1.1 Dimensions ................................................................................................. 108
6.1.2 Key Functions ............................................................................................. 109
6.1.3 Display Items .............................................................................................. 110
6.1.4 Display Item List ......................................................................................... 110
6.2 Menu Items ...................................................................................................... 113
6.2.1 Parameter Mode ........................................................................................ 114
6.2.2 User & Macro Mode .................................................................................. 115
6.3 Navigating Modes .......................................................................................... 116
6.3.1 Mode Navigation at the Factory Default ............................................... 116
6.3.2 Mode Navigation with User/Macro Mode and Trip Mode ................ 117
6.4 Navigating Modes and Parameters ........................................................... 119
6.4.1 Group Navigation in Parameter mode ................................................. 119
6.4.2 Group Shift in User & Macro Mode ........................................................ 121
6.5 Navigating through Codes (Function Items) ............................................ 122
6.5.1 Code Navigation in Monitor Mode ........................................................ 122
6.5.2 Code Navigation (function items) in Other Modes and Groups ...... 123
6.5.3 Code Navigation Using Jump Code........................................................ 124
6.6.1 Parameter Settings in Monitor Mode.................................................... 126
6.6.2 Parameter Settings in Other Modes and Groups ............................... 127
6.7 Monitoring Operating Status ....................................................................... 128
6.7.1 Using Monitor Mode ................................................................................. 128
6.7.2 Monitoring Items ....................................................................................... 129
6.7.3 Using the Status Display........................................................................... 130
6.8 Monitoring Faults ........................................................................................... 131
6.8.1 Faults during Inverter Operation ........................................................... 131
6.8.2 Multiple Faults at a Time during Inverter Operation ......................... 132
6.8.3 Saving and Monitoring the Fault Trip History ...................................... 132
6.9 Initializing Parameters .................................................................................. 134
7 Basic Functions ......................................................................................................... 136
7.1 Setting Frequency References ..................................................................... 136
7.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting) ............................................. 137
7.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting) ............................................. 137
7.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source ....................................................................... 137
7.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference Using an I/O Expansion Module
(Terminal V2/I2) ........................................................................................ 148
7.1.5 Setting a Frequency with Pulse Input (with an optional encoder
module) ...................................................................................................... 150
7.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication............. 152
7.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input ................................................................ 153
7.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)................................................. 154
7.4 Setting Multi-Step Frequency ....................................................................... 154
7.5 Command Source Configuration ................................................................ 157
7.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device ............................................ 157
7.5.2 The Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run
commands) ................................................................................................ 158
7.5.3 The Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands) ............................................................................. 160
7.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device ....................... 161
7.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching .................................................................... 161
7.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention .......................................................... 163
7.8 Power-on Run .................................................................................................. 165
7.9 Reset and Restart ........................................................................................... 166
7.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times .......................................... 167
7.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency .................................... 167
Table of contents
5
7.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency .................................... 169
7.10.3 Multi-Step Acc/Dec Time Configuration ................................................ 170
7.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency ...................................... 171
7.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration .................................................................... 173
7.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation................................................................. 176
7.13 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control ................................................................. 177
7.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation .................................................................. 177
7.13.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation ............................................. 178
7.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation ..................................................................... 179
7.14 Torque Boost ................................................................................................... 181
7.14.1 Manual Torque Boost ............................................................................... 181
7.14.2 Auto Torque Boost .................................................................................... 182
7.14.3 Advanced Auto Torque Boost ................................................................. 182
7.15 Output Voltage Setting .................................................................................. 184
7.16 Start Mode Setting ......................................................................................... 185
7.16.1 Acceleration Start....................................................................................... 185
7.16.2 Start After DC Braking .............................................................................. 185
7.17 Stop Mode Setting .......................................................................................... 186
7.17.1 Deceleration Stop ...................................................................................... 186
7.17.2 Stop after DC Braking ............................................................................... 187
7.17.3 Free Run Stop ............................................................................................. 188
7.17.4 Power Braking ............................................................................................ 189
7.18 Frequency Limit .............................................................................................. 190
7.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency 190
7.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values . 190
7.18.3 Frequency Jump ......................................................................................... 193
7.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting ......................................................................... 194
7.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control ....................................................... 196
7.21 Expanded I/O Control with an Optional I/O Expansion Module .......... 197
8 Learning Advanced Features ................................................................................ 198
8.1 Operating with Auxiliary References .......................................................... 198
8.2 Jog Operation .................................................................................................. 203
8.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog via Multi-function Terminal ................ 203
8.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog via Multi-function Terminal 204
8.2.3 Jog Operation via Keypad Input ............................................................. 205
8.3 Up/down Operation ....................................................................................... 206
8.4 3-Wire Operation ............................................................................................ 211
8.5 Safe Operation Mode .................................................................................... 212
8.7 Slip Compensation Operation ..................................................................... 215
8.8 PID Control ....................................................................................................... 218
8.8.1 PID Basic Operation .................................................................................. 218
8.8.2 Pre-PID Operation ..................................................................................... 225
8.8.3 PID Sleep Mode .......................................................................................... 226
8.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) ................................................................ 227
8.9 Auto Tuning ..................................................................................................... 227
8.10 V/F Operation Using Speed Sensor ............................................................ 232
8.11 Sensorless-1 Vector Control ......................................................................... 233
8.12 Sensorless-2 Vector Control ......................................................................... 235
8.13 Vector Control Mode Operation .................................................................. 240
8.14 Torque Control ................................................................................................ 245
8.15 Droop Control ................................................................................................. 247
8.16 Speed / Torque Control Switching .............................................................. 248
8.17 Kinetic Energy Buffering ............................................................................... 249
8.18 Energy Saving Operation .............................................................................. 252
8.18.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation .......................................................... 252
8.18.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation ..................................................... 252
8.19 Speed Search Operation ............................................................................... 254
8.20 Auto Restart Settings ..................................................................................... 257
8.21 Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency Settings) ...................... 259
8.22 2nd Motor Operation .................................................................................... 261
8.23 Supply Power Transition ............................................................................... 264
8.24 Cooling Fan Control ....................................................................................... 265
8.25 Input Power Frequency Settings ................................................................. 266
8.26 Input Power Voltage Settings ...................................................................... 267
8.27 Read, Write, and Save Parameters ............................................................. 267
8.28 Parameter Initialization ................................................................................. 268
8.29 Parameter Viewing and Lock Options ....................................................... 269
8.29.1 Parameter View Lock ................................................................................ 269
8.29.2 Parameter Lock .......................................................................................... 270
8.29.3 Changed Parameter Display ................................................................... 271
8.30 User Group ...................................................................................................... 271
8.31 Macro Selection .............................................................................................. 273
8.32 Easy Start .......................................................................................................... 274
Table of contents
7
8.33 Config (CNF) Mode ......................................................................................... 275
8.34 Timer Settings ................................................................................................. 276
8.35 Auto Sequence Operation ............................................................................ 277
8.36 Traverse Operation ........................................................................................ 281
8.37 Brake Control .................................................................................................. 282
8.38 Multi-function Output On/Off Control ....................................................... 285
8.39 MMC function .................................................................................................. 285
8.39.1 Basic MMC Operation ............................................................................... 288
8.39.2 Auto Change Operation ........................................................................... 290
8.39.3 Interlock Operation ................................................................................... 292
8.39.4 Bypass Operation (Regular Bypass) ....................................................... 294
8.40 Press Regeneration Prevention (To evade control operation in the
status of regeneration during press) ....................................................... 295
8.41 Anti-Hunting Regulator ................................................................................. 296
8.42 Fire Mode ......................................................................................................... 297
8.43 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Operation Reference Voltage ............. 299
8.44 kW/HP Unit Selection ..................................................................................... 300
9 Using Monitor Functions ....................................................................................... 301
9.1 Monitoring the Operating Status via the Keypad .................................... 301
9.1.1 Selecting Monitor Mode Display ............................................................ 301
9.1.2 Displaying Output Power ......................................................................... 303
9.1.3 Selecting Load Speed Display ................................................................. 304
9.1.4 Selecting Hz/Rpm Display ........................................................................ 304
9.1.5 Selecting Status Display ........................................................................... 305
9.1.6 Monitoring Output Frequency ................................................................ 305
9.2 Monitoring Fault Status Using Keypad ...................................................... 306
9.2.1 Monitoring Current Fault Status ............................................................. 306
9.2.2 Monitoring Fault Trip History .................................................................. 307
9.3 Analog output ................................................................................................. 308
9.3.1 Voltage Output (0–10 V) ........................................................................... 308
9.3.2 Current Output (4–20 mA) ....................................................................... 311
9.3.3 Voltage Output (-10–+10V) Using an I/O Expansion Module ........... 314
9.3.4 Current Output (4–20 mA/0–20 mA) Using an I/O Expansion Module
...................................................................................................................... 315
9.4 Relay Output and Multi-function Output Terminal Settings ................. 316
9.5 Fault trip output using multi-function output terminals and relays .... 322
9.6 Output Terminal Delay Time and Terminal Types .................................. 323
Table of contents
8
9.6.1 Output Terminal Delay Time ................................................ ................... 323
9.6.2 Setting the Output Terminal Type.......................................................... 323
9.7 Operation Time Monitor ............................................................................... 324
9.8 Setting the Keypad Language ..................................................................... 325
10 Using Protection Features ..................................................................................... 326
10.1 Motor Protection ............................................................................................ 326
10.1.1 Electrothermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)........................ 326
10.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip ........................................................... 328
10.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking .......................................................... 329
10.1.4 Motor Overheat Sensor Input ................................................................. 333
10.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection .............................................................. 335
10.2.1 Open-phase Protection ............................................................................ 335
10.2.2 External Trip Signal.................................................................................... 336
10.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT) ...................................................... 337
10.2.4 Keypad Command Loss ........................................................................... 338
10.2.5 Speed Command Loss .............................................................................. 339
10.2.6 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration .................................... 341
10.2.7 Underload Warning and Failure ............................................................. 342
10.2.8 Overspeed Fault ......................................................................................... 344
10.2.9 Speed Deviation Fault ............................................................................... 344
10.2.10 Speed Sensor (Encoder) Fault Detection............................................... 344
10.2.11 Fan Fault Detection ................................................................................... 345
10.2.12 Low Voltage Fault Trip .............................................................................. 345
10.2.13 Output Block via the Multi-Function Terminal ..................................... 346
10.2.14 Trip Status Reset ........................................................................................ 347
10.2.15 Operation Mode On Optional Expansion Module Fault Trip ............ 347
10.2.16 No Motor Trip ............................................................................................. 348
10.2.17 Low Voltage Fault Trip 2 During Operation ......................................... 348
10.3 List of Faults and Warnings .......................................................................... 349
11 Communication Function ...................................................................................... 351
11.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 351
11.2 Specifications ................................................................................................... 352
11.3 Communication System Configuration ..................................................... 353
11.4 Basic Settings .................................................................................................. 354
11.5 Setting Operation Command and Frequency .......................................... 355
11.6 Command Loss Protection ........................................................................... 355
11.7 Setting Virtual Multi-Function inputs .......................................................... 357
11.8 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication ..................................... 357
Table of contents
9
11.9 Communication Frame Monitoring ............................................................ 358
11.10 Special communication Area Settings ....................................................... 358
11.11 Parameter Group for Periodical Data Transmission ............................... 359
11.12 Parameter Group for Transmission of Macro Group and User Group at
U&M Mode ..................................................................................................... 361
11.13 Communication Protocol .............................................................................. 361
11.13.1 LS INV 485 Protocol ................................................................................... 361
11.13.2 Modbus-RTU protocol .............................................................................. 367
11.13.3 iS7/iS5/iG5/iG5A Compatible Common Area Parameter .................. 369
11.13.4 Expansion Common Area Parameter ................................................... 373
12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance .................................................................... 386
12.1 Protection Functions ...................................................................................... 386
12.1.1 Protection from Output Current and Input Voltage .......................... 386
12.1.2 Abnormal Circuit Conditions and External Signals ............................. 387
12.1.3 Keypad and Optional Expansion Modules ........................................... 389
12.2 Warning Messages ......................................................................................... 390
12.3 Troubleshooting Fault Trips ......................................................................... 391
12.4 Replacing the Cooling Fan ............................................................................ 394
12.4.1 Products Rated below 7.5 kW ................................................................. 394
12.4.2 Products Rated at 11-15 kW 200 V/400 V and 18.5-22 kW 400 V ..... 394
12.4.3 Products Rated at more than 30 kW (200 V) / 90 kW (400 V), and 18.5–
22 kW (200 V) / 30–75 kW (200/400 V) .................................................. 395
12.5 Daily and Regular Inspection Lists .............................................................. 396
13 Table of Functions ................................................................................................... 399
13.1 Parameter Mode – DRV Group (DRV) ..................................................... 399
13.2 Parameter Mode – Basic Function Group (BAS) .................................. 402
13.3 Parameter Mode – Expansion Function Group (PARADV) ................. 406
13.4 Parameter Mode – Control Function Group (CON) ............................. 410
13.5 Parameter Mode – Input Terminal Block Function Group (IN) ........ 416
13.6 Parameter Mode – Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT) . 420
13.7 Parameter Mode – Communication Function Group (COM) ............ 424
13.8 Parameter Mode – Applied Function Group (APP) .............................. 427
13.9 Parameter Mode – Auto Sequence Operation Group (AUT) ............. 430
13.10 Parameter Mode – Option Module Function Group (APO) ............... 433
13.11 Parameter Mode – Protective Function Group (PRT).......................... 436
13.12 Parameter Mode – 2nd Motor Function Group (M2) .......................... 439
Table of contents
10
13.13 Trip Mode (TRP Current (or Last-x)) .......................................... .................. 440
13.14 Config Mode (CNF) ......................................................................................... 440
13.15 User/Macro Mode – Draw Operation Function GroupMC1 .............. 443
13.16 User/Macro mode – Traverse Operation Function Group (MC2) ..... 444
14 Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off) .................................................................. 445
14.1 Safety Standard Product ............................................................................... 445
14.2 About the Safety Function ............................................................................ 445
14.2.1 Safety Function Wiring Diagram ............................................................ 446
14.2.2 Installing the Safety Board to 0.75–160 kW Product .......................... 447
14.2.3 Installing the Safety Board to 185–375 kW Product ........................... 447
14.2.4 Safety Function Terminal Description ................................................... 448
14.2.5 Cable Specification for Signal Terminal Block Wiring ......................... 448
15 Marine Certification ................................................................................................ 449
15.1 DNV (Det Norske Veritas) Marine Certification Details ........................... 449
15.2 Bureau Veritas (Marine & Offshore Division) Marine Certification Details
.......................................................................................................................... 449
15.3 ABS Marine Certification Details .................................................................. 449
15.4 KR Marine Certification Details .................................................................. 450
15.5 Marine Certification Models for SV-iS7 Products ..................................... 450
16 Using a Single Phase Power Source .................................................................... 452
16.1 Single Phase Rating ........................................................................................ 452
16.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current ........................................ 453
16.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance ................................................... 454
16.4 Wiring and Peripheral Device ...................................................................... 455
16.5 Other Considerations .................................................................................... 458
17 Storage and Disposal .............................................................................................. 459
17.1 Storage ............................................................................................................. 459
17.2 Disposal ............................................................................................................ 459
Product Warranty ............................................................................................................ 463
Index ................................................................................................................................... 466
About the Product
1
1 About the Product
This chapter provides details on product identification and part names. To install the inverter
correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the instructions.
1.1 Preparing for Installation and Operation
1.1.1 Identifying the Product
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from
defects. Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.
The iS7 inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive capacity and
power source specifications. The product name and specifications are detailed on the rating
plate. Check the rating plate before installing the product and make sure that the product
meets your requirements.
2
About the Product
Note1) Optional conduit parts are available for the Enclosed UL Type 1 models (0.75–75 kW
products).
Note2) Optional built-in DCR is available for the Web application models (0.75–375 kW / type
2/4 products).
Note3) To use safety function, please buy 0.75-160kW product including safety option. However
185-375kW product users have to buy safety option and apply to standard products because
safety option is not included.
Note
The iS7 75/90 kW, 400 V inverters satisfy the EMC standard EN61800-3 without the installation of
optional EMC filters.
About the Product
3
1.1.2 Checking the Product for Defects or Damage
If you suspect that the product has been mishandled or damaged in any way, contact the LSIS
Customer Support center with the phone numbers listed on the back cover of this manual.
1.1.3 Preparing the Product for Installation and Operation
Preparation steps for installation and operation may slightly vary by product type and
application. Refer to the manual and prepare the product accordingly.
1.1.4 Installing the Product
Refer to the installation section of this manual and install the product correctly considering the
installation and operating conditions at the installation location, such as installation clearances,
to prevent premature deterioration or performance loss.
1.1.5 Connecting the Cables
Connect the power input/output and signal cables to the terminal block according to the
instructions provided in this manual. Ensure that all the cables are connected correctly before
supplying power to the product. Incorrect cable connections may damage the product.
4
About the Product
1 .2 Part Names
The illustration below displays part names. Details may vary between product groups.
1.2.1 Interior and Exterior View (IP 21 Model Types Less than 22 kW
[200 V] / Less than 75 kW [400 V])
About the Product
5
1.2.2 Interior and Exterior View (IP 54 Model Types Less than 22 kW
[200/400 V])
6
About the Product
1.2.3 Interior and Exterior View (Model Types 30 kW and up [200 V]
/ 90 kW and up [400 V])
Note
Refer to the installation manual provided with the optional module products before installing
communication modules in the inverter.
Technical Specifications
7
2 Technical Specifications
2.1 Input and Output Specifications 200 V Class (0.75–
22 kW)
Model SV xxx iS7–2x 0008 0015 0022 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0185 0220
Normal
load 8 12 16 24 32 46 60 74 88 124
Heavy
load 5 8 12 16 24 32 46 60 74 88
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz (Sensorless-1: 0–300 Hz, Sensorless-2, Vector: 0.1–120
Hz)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 200–230 V
Rated
input
Working Voltage (V) 3-Phase 200–230 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated
Current
(A)
Normal
load 6.8 10.6 14.9 21.3 28.6 41.2 54.7 69.7 82.9 116.1
Heavy
load 4.3 6.9 11.2 14.9 22.1 28.6 44.3 55.9 70.8 85.3
• Only the heavy duty ratings apply to model types without a built-in DC resistor (NON-DCR).
• The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
• The output frequency is limited to 0–300 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “3
(Sensorless-1),” and to 0–120 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-3).”
• The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the input voltage of the power source.
Technical Specifications
8
2.2 Input and Output Specifications 200 V Class (30–
75 kW)
Model SV xxx iS7–2x 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750
Applie
d
Motor
Normal
load 146 180 220 288 345
Heavy
load 116 146 180 220 288
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz (Sensorless-1: 0–300 Hz, Sensorless-2, Vector: 0.1–120
Hz)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 200–230 V
Rated
input
Working Voltage (V) 3-Phase 200–230 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated
Current
(A)
Normal
load 152 190 231 302 362
Heavy
load 121 154 191 233 305
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 200 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
• The output frequency is limited to 0–300 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “3
(Sensorless-1),” and to 0–120 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-3).”
• The maximum output voltag e cannot exceed the input voltage of the power source.
Technical Specifications
9
2.3 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (0.75–
22 kW)
Model SV xxx iS7–2x 0008 001
Normal
load 4 6 8 12 16 24 30 39 45 61
Heavy
load 2.5 4 6 8 12 16 24 30 39 45
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz (Sensorless-1: 0–300Hz, Sensorless-2, Vector: 0.1–120Hz)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 V
Rated
input
Working Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated
Current
(A)
Normal
load 3.7 5.7 7.7 11.1 14.7 21.9 26.4 35.5 41.1 55.7
Heavy
load 2.2 3.6 5.5 7.5 11.0 14.4 22.0 26.6 35.6 41.6
• Only the heavy duty ratings apply to model types without a built-in DC resistor (NON- DCR).
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 400 V inverters is based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
• The output frequency is limited to 0-300 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “3
(Sensorless-1),” and to 0-120 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-3).”
• The maximum output voltag e cannot exceed the input voltage of the power source.
Technical Specifications
10
2.4 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (30–
160 kW)
Model SV xxx iS7–2x 0300 037
Normal
load 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 325 370
Heavy
load 61 75 91 110 152 183 223 264 325
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz (Sensorless-1: 0–300 Hz, Sensorless-2, Vector: 0.1–120
Hz)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 V
Rated
input
Working Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated
Current
(A)
Normal
load 67.5 81.7 101.8 143.6
173.
4 212.9
254.
2 315.3 359.3
Heavy
load 55.5 67.9 82.4 102.6
143.
4 174.7
213.
5 255.6 316.3
• The standard used for 400 V inverters is based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
• The output frequency is limited to 0–300 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “3
(Sensorless-1),” and to 0–120 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-3).”
• The maximum output voltag e cannot exceed the input voltage of the power source.
Technical Specifications
11
2.5 Input and Output Specifications 400 V Class (185–
375 kW)
Model SV xxx iS7–2x 1850 2200 2800 3150 3750
Normal
load 432 547 613 731 877
Heavy
load 370 432 547 613 731
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz (Sensorless-1: 0–300 Hz, Sensorless-2, Vector: 0–120 Hz)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 V
Rated
input
Working Voltage (V) 3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated
Current
(A)
Normal
load 463 590 673 796 948
Heavy
load 404 466 605 674 798
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 400 V inverters is based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.
• The output frequency is limited to 0–300 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “3
(Sensorless-1),” and to 0–120 Hz if DRV-09 (control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-3).”
• The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the input voltage of the power source.
Note
The maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection is defined in
IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage.
Technical Specifications
12
2.6 Product Specification Details
2.6.1 Control
Items Description
Control
Control modes V/F control, V/F PG, slip compensation, sensorless vector-1,
sensorless vector-2, vector control
Frequency
settings resolution
Digital command: 0.01 Hz
Analog command: 0.06 Hz (maximum frequency: 60 Hz)
Frequency
accuracy
Digital command: 0.01% of maximum output frequency
Analog command: 0.1% of maximum output frequency
V/F pattern Linear, square reduction, user V/F
Overload capacity Rated current for heavy duty operation: 150% for 1 min
Rated current for normal duty operation: 110% for 1 min
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost
• Only the heavy load ratings apply to 0.75-22 kW model types without a built-in DC resistor
(NON-DCR).
2.6.2 Operation
Items Description
Operation
Operation types Select from keypad, terminal strip, or network communication
operation.
Frequency
settings
Analog type: -10–10 V, 0–10 V, 0–20 mA
Digital type: keypad
Operation
function
• PID control
• 3-wire operation
• Frequency limit
• Second function
• Reverse rotation prevention
• Inverter bypass
• Flying start
• Power braking
• Up-down operation
• DC braking
• Frequency jump
• Slip compensation
• Automatic restart
• Automatic tuning
• Energy buffering
• Flux braking
Select NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) mode.
• Forward direction operation
• Reset
• Emergency stop
• Multi-step speed frequency-
high/med/low
• DC braking during stop
• Frequency increase
• 3-wire operation
• Acceleration/deceleration/stop
• Operation by keypad input
during an operation by
network communication
• Reverse direction
operation
• External trip
• Jog operation
• Multi-step acc/dec-
high/med/low
• Second motor
selection
• Frequency reduction
• Transition from PID
to general operation
• Analog command
frequency fix
Output
Multi-
function
open
collector
terminal Fault output and inverter operation
status output
Less than DC 26 V, 100
mA
Multi-
function
relay
terminal
N.O.: Less than AC 250 V
1A, DC 30 V, 3A
N.C.: Less than AC 250 V
1A, DC 30 V 1A
Analog
output
DC 0–10 V, 0–20 mA: Select output type from frequency, current,
voltage, or DC voltage.
* Set the Input Group codes IN-65 through IN-72 to configure the multi-function terminal functions.
Technical Specifications
14
2.6.3 Protection Function
Items Description
Protection
function
Trips
• Over voltage
• Low voltage
• Over current
• Earth current detection
• Inverter overheat
• Motor overheat
• Output imaging
• Overload protection
• Network
communication error
• Lost command
• Hardware failure
• Cooling fan failure
• Pre-PID failure
• No motor trip
• External trip
• Other safety functions
• Fan failure
• Keypad command loss
• Speed command loss
Instantaneous
blackout
Less than 15 ms (CT) [Less than 8 ms (VT)]: Continue
operation (must be within the rated input voltage and rated
output range).
Over 15 ms (CT) [Over 8 ms (VT)]: Automatically restart
2.6.4 Structure and Operating Environment Control
Items Description
Structure/
operating
environment
Cooling type
Forced cooling: 0.75–15 kW (200/400 V class),
22 kW (400 V class)
Inhalation cooling: 22–75 kW (200 V class),
30–375 kW (400 V class)
Protection
structure
- 0.75–22 kW (200V), 0.75–75 kW (400 V): Open type IP 21
(default), UL enclosed type 1 (optional)*
- 30–75 kW (200 V), 90–375 kW (400 V): Open type IP 00
- 0.75–22 kW, frame types 2, 4 and others.: Enclosed IP54
type, UL enclosed type 12
Items Description
WNoo rickeinogr ufrnodset rs hnoourmldabl elopardeaset n5t0.℃ (122F), it is
recommended that less than 80% load is applied.
• IP54 product: -10–40℃
No ice or frost should be present.
Storage
temperature. -20C–65C (-4–149F)
Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to prevent condensation
from forming)
Operation altitude
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation.
From 1000 to 4000m, the rated input voltage and rated
output current of the drive must be derated by 1% for every
100m.
Oscillation Less than 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G).
Surrounding
environment
Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil
stains, dust, and other pollutants (Pollution Degree 2
Environment).
* UL Enclosed type 1 when an optional conduit box is installed. The 30–75 kW (200 V class) product is
regarded as UL Open type IP 20 when an optional conduit box is installed.
Installing the Inverter
16
3 Installing the Inverter
3.1 Installation Considerations
Inverters are composed of various precision electronic devices, and therefore the installation
environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product. The table below
details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter.
Items Description
Ambient Temperature*
CT load (heavy duty): -10℃–50℃
VT load (normal duty): -10℃–40℃
IP54 model types: -10℃–40℃
Ambient Humidity 90% relative humidity (no condensation)
Storage Temperature - 4–149F (-20–65℃)
Environmental Factors dAn environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue, or
ust (pollution degree 2)
Altitude/Vibration Lower than 3,280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level/less than 0.6 G (5.9
m/sec2)
Air Pressure 70–106 kPa
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the surface of the
inverter. No ice or frost should be present.
• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The inverter
may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always support the
inverter using the metal frames when moving it.
• Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that is
suitable for the weight. Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may
damage the cable and result in an electric shock.
• Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter must be
installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting surface.
Installing the Inverter
17
Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the inverter.
3.2 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation
When selecting an installation location, consider the following requirements:
• The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
• The location must be free from vibration. Vibrations can adversely affect the operation of
the inverter.
• The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that is
fire resistant or flame retardant with sufficient clearance around the inverter to allow for
air circulation. The illustrations below detail the required installation clearances.
Installing the Inverter
18
Install the inverter on a non-flammable surface, and do not place flammable material near the
inverter. Otherwise, a fire may result.
Note
Model types with capacities of 30 kW or more require a minimum of 8” clearance above and below
the unit.
Installing the Inverter
19
• Ensure that the cable conduits do not obstruct the air flow to and from the cooling fan.
• Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the
inverter is to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider the
position of the inverter’s cooling fan and vents. The cooling fan must be positioned to
efficiently dissipate the heat generated by the operation of the inverter.
Note
In order to meet EMC standards, 200 V, 30–75 kW model types and model types with capacities of 90
kW or more should be installed inside a metal cabinet.
Installing the Inverter
20
• If you are installing multiple inverters of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance to
meet the clearance specifications of the larger inverter. The iS7 inverters rated for up to 30
kW may be installed side by side.
Installing the Inverter
21
3.3 Exterior and Dimensions (UL Enclosed Type 1, IP21
Type)
SV0008-0037iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0008–0037 iS7 - 2/4 150
(5.90)
127
(5.00)
284
(11.18)
257
(10.11)
18
(0.70)
200
(7.87)
5
(0.19)
5
(0.19)
Installing the Inverter
22
SV0055-0075iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0055–0075 iS7 - 2/4 200
(7.87)
176
(6.92)
355
(13.97)
327
(12.87)
19
(0.74)
225
(8.85)
5
(0.19)
5
(0.19)
Installing the Inverter
23
SV0110-0150iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0110–0150 iS7- 2/4 250
(9.84)
214.6
(8.44)
385
(15.15)
355
(13.97)
23.6
(0.92)
284
(11.18)
6.5
(0.25)
6.5
(0.25)
Installing the Inverter
24
SV0185-0220iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0185–0220iS7- 2/4 280
(11.02)
243.5
(9.58)
461.6
(18.17)
445
(17.51)
10.1
(0.39)
298
(11.73)
6.5
(0.25)
6.5
(0.25)
Installing the Inverter
25
SV0300-iS7 (200 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV0300 iS7-2 300
(11.81)
190
(7.48)
190
(7.48)
570
(22.44)
552
(21.73)
10
(0.39)
265.2
(10.44)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39) M8
Installing the Inverter
26
SV0370-0450iS7 (200 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV0370–0450
iS7-2
370
(14.56)
270
(10.63)
270
(10.63)
630
(24.8)
609
(23.97)
11
(0.43)
281.2
(11.07)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39) M10
Installing the Inverter
27
SV0300-0450iS7 (400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 D2 A B C
SV300–450
iS7-4 300.1
(11.81)
242.8
(9.55)
594.1
(23.38)
562
(22.12)
24.1
(0.94)
DCR type
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39) M8
303.2
(11.93)
161
(6.33)
Non-DCR type
271.2
(10.67)
129
(5.78)
Installing the Inverter
28
SV0550-0750iS7 (200 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV0550–0750
iS7-2
465
(18.3)
381
(15.0)
381
(15.0)
750
(29.52)
723.5
(28.48)
15.5
(0.61)
355.6
(14.0)
11
(0.43)
11
(0.43) M16
Installing the Inverter
29
SV0550-0750iS7 (400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter
Capacity
W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 D2 A B C
SV0550–0750
iS7-4 370.1
(14.57)
312.8
(12.31)
663.5
(26.12)
631.4
(24.85)
24.1
(0.94)
DCR type
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39) M8
373.3
(14.69)
211.5
(8.32)
Non-DCR type
312.4
(12.29)
150.6
(5.92)
Installing the Inverter
30
SV0900-1100iS7 (400 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV0900–1100
iS7-4 510
(20.07)
381
(15.0)
350
(13.77)
783.5
(30.84)
759
(29.88)
15.5
(0.61)
422.6
(16.63)
11
(0.43)
11
(0.43) M16
Installing the Inverter
31
SV1320-1600iS7 (400 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV1320–1600
iS7-4 510
(20.07)
381
(15.0)
350
(13.77)
861
(33.89)
836.5
(32.93)
15.5
(0.61)
422.6
(16.63)
11
(0.43)
11
(0.43) M16
Installing the Inverter
32
SV1850-2200iS7 (400 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV1850/
2200iS7-4
690
(27.16)
581
(22.87)
528
(20.79)
1078
(42.44)
1043.5
(41.08)
25.5
(1.00)
450
(17.72)
14
(0.55)
15
(0.59) M20
Installing the Inverter
33
SV2800iS7 (400 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter
Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV2800iS7-4 771
(30.35)
500
(19.69)
500
(19.69)
1138
(44.80)
1110
(43.70)
15
(0.59)
440
(17.32)
13
(0.51)
13
(0.51) M16
For 280 kW model types, I volts are supplied with the product.
Installing the Inverter
34
SV3150-3750iS7 (400 V, IP00 Type)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter
Capacity W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B C
SV3150/
3750iS7-4
922
(36.30)
580
(22.83)
580
(22.83)
1302.5
(51.28)
1271.5
(50.06)
15
(0.59)
495
(19.49)
14
(0.55)
14
(0.55) M16
For 315-375 kW model types, I volts are supplied with the product.
Installing the Inverter
35
3.4 Exterior and Dimensions (UL Enclosed Type 12,
IP54 Type)
SV0008-0037iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0008–0037 iS7-2/4 204.2
(8.03)
127
(5.0)
419
(16.49)
257
(10.11)
95.1
(3.74)
208
(8.18)
5
(0.19)
5
(0.19)
Installing the Inverter
36
SV0055-0075iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0055–0075 iS7-2/4 254
(10.0)
176
(6.92)
460.6
(18.13)
327
(12.87)
88.1
(3.46)
232.3
(9.14)
5
(0.19)
5
(0.19)
Installing the Inverter
37
SV0110-0150iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0110–0150 iS7-2/4 313.1
(12.32)
214.6
(8.44)
590.8
(23.25)
355
(13.97)
101.7
(4.0)
294.4
(11.59)
6.5
(0.25)
6.5
(0.25)
Installing the Inverter
38
SV0185-0220iS7 (200 V/400 V)
Units: mm (inch)
Inverter Capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
SV0185–0220 iS7-2/4 343.2
(13.51)
243.5
(9.58)
750.8
(29.55)
445
(17.51)
91.6
(3.60)
315.5
(12.42)
6.5
(0.25)
6.5
(0.25)
Installing the Inverter
39
3.5 Frame Dimensions and Weight (UL Enclosed Type
1, IP 21 Type)
Inverter
Capacity W[mm] H[mm] D[mm]
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC and DCR
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
DCR
Weight[Kg]
non-DCR
types
SV0008iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0015iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0022iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0037iS7-2/4 150 284 200 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.5
SV0055iS7-2/4 200 355 225 10 8.4 9.3 7.7
SV0075iS7-2/4 200 355 225 10 8.4 9.3 7.7
SV0110iS7-2/4 250 385 284 20 17.2 16.8 14
SV0150iS7-2/4 250 385 284 20 17.2 16.8 14
SV0185iS7-2 280 461.6 298 30 27 25.9 22.9
SV0220iS7-2 280 461.6 298 30 25.8 25.9 22.9
SV0185iS7-4 280 461.6 298 27.4 23.5 23.3 19.7
SV0220iS7-4 280 461.6 298 27.4 23.5 23.5 20.1
SV0300iS7-2 300 570 265.2 - - - 29.5
SV0370iS7-2 370 630 281.2 - - - 44
SV0450iS7-2 370 630 281.2 - - - 44
SV0550iS7-2 465 750 355.6 - - - 72.5
SV0750iS7-2 465 750 355.6 - - - 72.5
Note
• The weight specified in the table indicates the total weight of the product without packaging,
which includes the built-in parts, such as the EMC filter and DCR.
• The built-in EMC filter and DCR are not available for 30–75 kW (200 V) products.
Installing the Inverter
40
Inverter
C apacity
W[mm] H[mm] D[mm]
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC and DCR
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
DCR
Weight[Kg]
non-DCR
types
SV0300iS7-4 300 594 300.4 - - 41 28
SV0370iS7-4 300 594 300.4 - - 41 28
SV0450iS7-4 300 594 300.4 - - 41 28
SV0550iS7-4 370 663.4 371 - - 63 45
SV0750iS7-4 370 663.4 371 - - 63 45
SV0900iS7-4 510 784 423 - - 101 -
SV1100iS7-4 510 784 423 - - 101 -
SV1320iS7-4 510 861 423 - - 114 -
SV1600iS7-4 510 861 423 - - 114 -
SV1850iS7-4 690 1078 450 - - 200 -
SV2200iS7-4 690 1078 450 - - 200 -
SV2800iS7-4 771 1138 440 - - - 252
SV3150iS7-4 922 1302.5 495 - - - 352
SV3750iS7-4 922 1302.5 495 - - - 352
Note
• The weight specified in the table indicates the total weight of the product without packaging,
which includes built-in parts, such as the EMC filter and DCR.
• 300-220 kW (400 V) products have built-in DCR only.
• 280-375 kW (400 V) products are provided without a built-in EMC filter and DCR.
Installing the Inverter
41
3.6 Frame Dimensions and Weight (UL Enclosed Type
12, IP54 Type)
Inverter
Capacity W[mm] H[mm] D[mm]
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC and DCR
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
EMC
Weight[Kg]
w/ built-in
DCR
Weight[Kg]
non-DCR
types
SV0008iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0015iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0022iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0037iS7-2/4 204 419 208 8.2 7.2 7.7 6.7
SV0055iS7-2/4 254 461 232 12.8 10.2 12.1 9.5
SV0075iS7-2/4 254 461 232 12.9 10.3 12.2 9.6
SV0110iS7-2/4 313 591 294 25.6 22.8 22.4 19.6
SV0150iS7-2/4 313 591 294 25.9 23.1 22.7 19.9
SV0185iS7-2 343 751 316 38.3 34.2 34.1 29.9
SV0220iS7-2 34 751 316 38.3 34.2 34.1 29.9
SV0185iS7-4 343 751 316 34.9 31 31 27.1
SV0220iS7-4 343 751 316 34.9 31 31 27.1
Note
• The weight specified in the table indicates the total weight of the product without packaging,
which includes the built-in parts, such as the EMC filter and DCR.
• Only 0.75-22 kW products are available in IP 54 Type specifications.
Installing the Inverter
42
3.7 Installation Procedures for UL Enclosed Type12
and IP54 Type Products
3.7.1 Disassembling the Keypad Cover and Keypad
1 Loosen the screws that secure the keypad cover and remove the keypad cover.
2 Depress the tab at the top of the keypad and gently lift the keypad from the inverter to
remove it. Be careful not to damage the keypad cable.
Installing the Inverter
43
3 Depress the tab on the keypad cable connector and disconnect the cable from the back of
the keypad.
3.7.2 Disassembling the IP54 Front Cover
1 Loosen the screws that secure the front cover to the chassis. There are 9–13 screws on the
cover depending on the model type.
Installing the Inverter
44
2 Remove the cover by lifting it upwards from the bottom.
3.7.3 Mounting the Inverter
1 Remove the 4 rubber feet from the corners.
Installing the Inverter
45
2 Place the inverter on a flat wall or in a cabinet, and use 4 screws or bolts to securely fix the
inverter to the surface.
3.7.4 Connecting the Power Cables
Connect the power cables to the input (R, S, T) and output (U, V, W) terminals. Then, tighten the
terminal screws.
Refer to 4 Connecting the Cables on page 48 for detailed information.
Installing the Inverter
46
3.7.5 Reassembling the IP54 Front Cover and the Keypad
1 Place the front cover on the chassis and align the screw holes on each side.
2 Insert and tighten the screws. There are 9–13 screws on the cover depending on the
model type.
Installing the Inverter
47
3 Connect the signal cable to the keypad, align the lower part of the keypad to the bottom o f
the keypad receptacle, and then push the top part of the keypad into the chassis until the
keypad snaps into place.
4 Place the keypad cover on top of the keypad, and secure it using 2 screws.
Connecting the Cables
48
4 Connecting the Cables
Connect cables to the power and signal terminal blocks of the inverter.
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic components on
the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the components on the PCB with
bare hands while you work on the I/O PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge any
electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a metal
object.
4.1 Removing the Front Cover for Cable Connection
Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections. Before
working on the inverter, test the connections to ensure the DC voltage has been fully discharged.
Personal injury or death by electric shock may result if the DC voltage has not been discharged.
4.1.1 IP 21 Type Products
1 Depress the tab at the top of the keypad and gently lift the keypad from the inverter to
remove it. Be careful not to damage the keypad cable.
Connecting the Cables
49
2 Depress the tab on the keypad cable connector and disconnect the cable from the back of
the keypad.
3 Loosen the screw from the bottom part of the front cover, and then remove the front
cover.
Connecting the Cables
50
4.1.2 IP 54 Type Products
1 Loosen the two screws securing the keypad cover, and then remove the keypad cover.
2 Depress the tab at the top of the keypad and gently lift the keypad from the inverter to
remove it. Be careful not to damage the keypad cable.
3 Depress the tab on the keypad cable connector and disconnect the cable from the back of
the keypad.
Connecting the Cables
51
4 Remove the screws from each side of the front cover, and then remove the front cover.
4.1.3 90–375 kW, 400 V and 30–75 kW, 200 V Products
1 Loosen the two screws on the front cover.
2 Slide the cover downwards and remove it from the inverter.
Connecting the Cables
52
4.2 Activating and Deactivating the Built-in EMC
Filter
Some iS-7 inverter models have built-in EMC filters to reduce conductive and radiational noise
at the inverter input. Refer to 1.1.1 Identifying the Product on page 1 and check your inverter’s
model type and specifications to see if it has a built-in EMC filter.
If your inverter has a built-in EMC filter, refer to the following instructions to activate or
deactivate it.
Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical grounding
structure, for example a grounded delta connection. Personal injury or death by electric shock may
result if the power source is not grounded properly.
4.2.1 Up to 7.5 kW Inverters
1 Locate the plastic knockout cap that covers the EMC filter switch (jumper SW1).
2 Remove the knockout cap and locate the jumper switch. The EMC filter will be deactivated
if the two jumper pins are not connected.
Connecting the Cables
53
3 Connect the two jumper pins using a short circuit connector to activate the EMC filter.
4 To remove the short circuit connector and deactivate the EMC filter, pull the connector
while pressing the latch on the side of the connector. Use pliers or tweezers if you cannot
reach the latch with your fingers.
Connecting the Cables
54
4.2.2 11–22 kW Inverters
1 Locate the EMC filter cable and the ground terminal at the bottom of the inverter.
The EMC filter is deactivated if the EMC filter cable is connected to the insulated stud.
2 Remove the EMC filter cable from the insulated stud and connect it to the ground terminal
(metal) to activate the EMC filter.
An EMC filter prevents electromagnetic interference by reducing radio emissions from the
inverter. Using an EMC filter is not always recommended, as it increases current leakage. If an
inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical grounding connection, the EMC filter must
be turned off.
Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the EMC filter
if the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection.
Connecting the Cables
55
Asymmetrical Grounding Connection
One phase of
a delta
connection is
grounded
Intermediate
grounding
point on one
phase of a
delta
connection
The end of a
single phase
is grounded
A 3-phase
connection
without
grounding
Connecting the Cables
56
4.3 Precautions for Wiring the Inverter
• Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter
is ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Wiring and inspection of wiring must be performed by an authorized engineer.
• Install the inverter before connecting the cables.
• Ensure that no metal debris, such as wire clippings, remain inside the inverter. Metal debris in
the inverter can cause inverter failure.
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables
to other terminals will damage the inverter.
• Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.
• The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with other
communication devices located near the inverter. To reduce interference, the installation of
noise filters or line filters may be required.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-advanced
condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the inverter.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic
contactors on the output side of the inverter.
• Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 495 ft (150 m). For inverters < = 3.7 kW
capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m). Long cable runs can
cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage drop. Long cable runs
also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and may trigger over-current
protection devices or result in the malfunction of equipment connected to the inverter.
• Route the signal cables away from the power cables. Otherwise, signal errors may occur due to
electric interference.
• Tighten terminal screws to their specified torques. Loose terminal block screws may allow the
cables to disconnect and cause a short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to 4.7 Specifications of the
Power Terminal Block and Exterior Fuse on page 6666 for torque specifications.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable and
result in electric shock.
• Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring, to
ensure that voltage drops do not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75℃ for control terminal wiring.
• If you need to rewire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter keypad
display is turned off and the charge lamp under the terminal cover is off before working on
Connecting the Cables
57
wiring connections. The inverter may hold a high-voltage electric charge long after the power
supply has been turned off.
4.4 Ground Connection
Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications to
ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified
grounding connections may result in electric shock.
• Do not use the ground terminal as the signal (control) ground.
• Do not share the ground connection with other machines that consume a large amount of
power, such as a welding machine.
• Connect the ground cable to the nearest earth contact and keep the cable length as short as
possible.
Because the inverter is a high-frequency switching device, leakage current may occur during
operation. To avoid the danger of electrocution due to current leakage, the inverter must be
properly grounded. Ground connection must be made to the specified ground terminal on the
inverter. Do not connect ground cables to chassis screws.
Note
• 200 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 100 Ω.
• 400 V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 10 Ω.
The following table lists the minimum ground cable specifications that must be met to properly
ground the inverters.
Inverter Capacity Grounding wire size ( mm²)
200 V class 400 V class
0.75–3.7kW 4 2.5
5.5–7.5 kW 6 4
11–15 kW 16 10
18.5–22 kW 25 16
30–45 kW 25 16
Connecting the Cables
58
Inverter Capacity Grounding wire size ( mm²)
55–75 kW 35 35
90–110 kW - 60
132–220 kW - 100
280–315 kW - 185
375 kW - 240
4.5 Terminal Wiring Diagram
4.5.1 Up to 7.5 kW Inverters
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3)
3-phase AC input P (+) B N (-) U V W
Dynamic brake
resistor To motor
4.5.2 11–22 kW Inverters
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) P (+) B N (-) U V W
4.5.3 30–75 kW Inverters
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) P1 (+) P2 (+) N (-) U V W
4.5.4 90–160 kW Inverters
Connecting the Cables
59
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) P2 (+) N (-) U V W
Connecting the Cables
60
4.5.5 185–220 kW Inverters
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) P2 (+) N (-) U V W
4.5.6 280–375 kW Inverters
R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) P1 (+) P2 (+) N (-) U V W
Note
• Inverters with a rated capacity of 11 kW or more are equipped with linearly arranged terminal
blocks.
• 0.75–22 kW inverters have built-in DC reactors. The installation of an external DC reactor is not
necessary for these inverters.
• The inverter must be properly grounded using the ground terminal.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is turned on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed
from the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the
U and V terminals.
Remarque
Si la commande avant (Fx) est activée, le moteur doit tourner dans le sens anti-horaire si on le
regarde côté charge du moteur. Si le moteur tourne dans le sens inverse, inverser les câbles aux
bornes U et V.
Connecting the Cables
61
4.6 Connecting Cables to the Power Terminal Block
Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables to
other terminals will damage the inverter.
Note
The motor will rotate in the opposite direction if the U, V, and W terminals are connected in a wrong
phase order.
4.6.1 0.75–22 kW (200 V/400 V)
Cable connection for utilizing the built-in dynamic braking unit
Connect the cables from the dynamic braking unit to the P (+) and B terminals to utilize the
built-in dynamic braking unit.
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC power supply input
terminals AC input terminals
P (+) (+) DC voltage terminal (+) DC link voltage terminal
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal.
P (+), B Dynamic brake resistor
terminals Dynamic brake resistor terminals
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase induction
motor
Connecting the Cables
62
Cable connection for utilizing the optional dynamic braking unit
Connect the cables from dynamic braking unit to P (+) and N (-) terminals to utilize the optional
dynamic braking unit. Do not connect cables to B terminal.
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC power supply input
terminals AC input terminals
P (+) (+) DC voltage terminal (+) DC link voltage terminal
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal.
P (+), B Dynamic brake resistor
terminals Dynamic brake resistor terminals
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase induction
motor
4.6.2 30–75 kW (200 V/400 V)
Connect the cables from the dynamic braking unit to the P (+) and B terminals to utilize the
built-in dynamic braking unit.
In 30-75 kW 200 V model types, the P1 and P2 terminals are connected with a jumper pin.
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
Connecting the Cables
63
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC power supply input
terminals AC input terminals
P1 (+) (+) DC voltage terminal (+) DC link voltage terminal
P2, N (-) Dynamic brake resistor
terminal / DC common* Dynamic brake resistor terminals
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase induction
motor
*Contact LSIS Customer Support before configuring the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals as the DC common
source. There are a few factors that require special attention for this application.
Note
External DC reactors cannot be used with 30–75 kW inverters. To use a DC reactor with these
inverters, purchase a 30–75 kW inverter that has a built-in DC reactor.
• When a built-in DCR unit is present, the P1 (+) and P (-) terminals are connected to the reactor’s
input and output terminals respectively.
• If your product does not have a built-in DCR unit, the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals may be used as
the common DC source. Do not use the P1 (+) terminal as the common DC source, as this may
result in product damage.
• Use the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to connect a dynamic braking resistor to the inverter. Do not
connect the dynamic braking unit to the P1 (+) terminal, as this may result in product damage.
• Contact LSIS Customer Support before configuring the N (-) terminal as the DC common source.
There are a few factors that require special attention for this application.
4.6.3 90–160 kW (400 V)
Connect the cables from the dynamic braking unit to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to utilize an
external dynamic braking unit.
Connecting the Cables
64
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC power supply input terminals AC input terminals
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal
P2 (+), N (-) Dynamic brake resistor terminal Dynamic brake resistor terminals
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase
induction motor
4.6.4 185–220 kW (400 V)
Connect the cables from the dynamic braking unit to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to utilize an
external dynamic braking unit.
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC power supply input terminals AC input terminals
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal
P2 (+), N (-) Dynamic brake resistor terminal Dynamic brake resistor terminals
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase
induction motor
Connecting the Cables
65
4.6.5 280–375 kW (200 V/400 V)
Connect the cables from the dynamic braking unit to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to utilize the
built-in dynamic braking unit.
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) tAC power supply input
erminals AC input terminals
P1 (+) (+) DC voltage terminal (+) DC link voltage terminal
P2/N (-) Dynamic brake resistor
terminal / DC common* Dynamic brake resistor terminals
N (-) (-) DC voltage terminal (-) DC link voltage terminal
U, V, W Inverter output terminals Output terminals to a 3-phase induction
motor
*Contact LSIS Customer Support before configuring the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals as the DC common
source. There are a few factors that require special attention for this application.
• Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause the terminals to short
circuit and malfunction. Tightening the screws too much may damage the terminals and cause
them to short circuit and malfunction.
• Only use copper wires with a 600 V, 75 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and a 300 V,
75 ℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
• Power supply wiring must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting them to the U,
V, W terminals causes internal damage to the inverter. The motor should be connected to the U,
V, and W terminals. Arrangement of the phase sequence is not necessary.
Connecting the Cables
66
4.7 Specifications of the Power Terminal Block and
Exterior Fuse
Inverter capacity Terminal
screw size
Screw torque1)
(Kgf·cm)
Cable2)
Exterior fuse
mm² AWG or kcmil
R,S,T U,V,W R,S,T U,V,W Current Voltage
200V
0.75 kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 10 A 500 V
1.5 kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 15 A 500 V
2.2 kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 20 A 500 V
3.7 kW M4 7.1–12 4 4 12 12 32 A 500 V
5.5 kW M4 7.1–12 6 6 10 10 50 A 500 V
7.5 kW M4 7.1–12 10 10 8 8 63 A 500 V
11 kW M6 30.6–38.2 16 16 6 6 80 A 500 V
15 kW M6 30.6–38.2 25 25 4 4 100 A 500 V
18.5 kW M8 61.2–91.8 35 35 2 2 125 A 500 V
22 kW M8 61.2–91.8 50 50 1 1 160 A 500 V
30 kW M8 61.2 – 91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 200 A 500 V
37 kW M8 61.2 – 91.8 95 95 2/0 2/0 250 A 500 V
45 kW M8 61.2 – 91.8 95 95 2/0 2/0 350 A 500 V
55 kW M10 89.7 – 122.0 120 120 3/0 3/0 400 A 500 V
75 kW M10 89.7 – 122.0 150 150 4/0 4/0 450 A 500 V
400V
0.75–
1.5kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 10 A 500 V
2.2 kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 15 A 500 V
3.7 kW M4 7.1–12 2.5 2.5 14 14 20 A 500 V
5.5 kW M4 7.1–12 4 2.5 12 14 32 A 500 V
7.5 kW M4 7.1–12 4 4 12 12 35 A 500 V
11 kW M5 24.5–31.8 6 6 10 10 50 A 500 V
15 kW M5 24.5–31.8 10 10 8 8 63 A 500 V
18.5 kW M6 30.6–38.2 16 10 6 8 70 A 500 V
22 kW M6 30.6–38.2 25 16 4 6 100 A 500 V
30 kW M8 61.2–91.8 25 25 4 4 125 A 500 V
37 kW M8 61.2–91.8 25 35 4 2 125 A 500 V
45 kW M8 61.2–91.8 50 50 1 1 160 A 500 V
55 kW M8 61.2–91.8 70 70 1/0 1/0 200 A 500 V
75 kW M8 61.2–91.8 95 95 2/0 2/0 250 A 500 V
90 kW M12 182.4–215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 350 A 500 V
110 kW M12 182.4–215.0 100 100 4/0 4/0 400 A 500 V
132 kW M12 182.4–215.0 150 150 300 300 450 A 500 V
160 kW M12 182.4–215.0 200 200 400 400 450 A 500 V
185 kW M12 182.4–215.0 200 200 400 400 620 A 500 V
Connecting the Cables
67
Inverter capacity Terminal
screw size
Screw torque1)
(Kgf·cm)
Cable2)
Exterior fuse
mm² AWG or kcmil
R,S,T U,V,W R,S,T U,V,W Current Voltage
220 kW M12 182.4–215.0 250 250 500 500 800 A 500 V
280 kW M12 182.4–215.0 325 325 650 650 1000 A 500 V
315 kW M12 182.4–215.0 2x200 2x200 2x400 2x400 1200 A 500 V
375 kW M12 182.4–215.0 2x250 2x250 2x500 2x500 1400 A 500 V
1) Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause the terminals to short circuit
and malfunction.
2) Only use copper wires with a 600 V, 75℃ rating for the power terminal wiring.
4.7.1 Cable Length between the Inverter and the Motor
The maximum cable lengths of the inverter and the motor are listed in
.
Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 495 ft (150 m). For inverters with a
capacity of less than 3.7 kW, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage
drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and may
trigger over-current protection devices, or result in the malfunction of equipment connected to
the inverter.
Inverter capacity Up to 3.7 kW 5.5 kW or more
Maximum cable length < 164 ft (50 m) < 492 ft (150 m)
The following table lists maximum carrier frequencies available for model types with a rated
capacity of 5.5 kW or more.
Distance < 165 ft (50 m) < 330 ft (100 m) > 330 ft (100 m)
Allowed Carrier Frequency <15 kHz <5 kHz <2.5 kHz
Depending on the system layout and operating conditions at the installation site, high peak
output voltage may result.
Connecting the Cables
68
a) If the output peak voltage is too high even when the motor cable length is sho rter than the
maximum recommended cable length for the inverter capacity:
- use a motor with a high insulation rating.
- install an output circuit filter (micro surge filter).
- install a dv/dt filter, or a sine wave filter.
b) If the cable length is too long:
- use thicker cables to prevent voltage drop.
[Voltage Drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] / 1000]
- do not use 3-core cables.
- use a lower carrier frequency.
4.7.2 Protective Measures for the Inverter and the Motor
The inverter output voltage pulse, regardless of the actual output frequency, is identical to the
DC link voltage pulse, which has a very short rising time. When the power is transmitted
through the output cables, the output peak voltage can rise up to twice the total DC link
voltage (2.8 times the main power voltage).
If a switching device (a magnetic contactor or relay) is connected to the output side of the
inverter, high-voltage surges may result whenever a switch is made, regardless of the length of
the motor cable.
Such high-voltage surges can damage the inverter’s output components (such as the current
sensor), motor cables, and the motor itself. To protect the inverter and the motor from such
damage caused by a high-voltage surge, do not install switching devices in the output side of
the inverter. You can install an output reactor, dv/dt filter, or sine wave filter to protect the
inverter and motor from a surge voltage.
An output surge with a high switching frequency and fast rising time causes a motor shaft
current that runs through the motor bearing. It slowly corrodes the surface of the motor
bearing, eventually seizing up the motor.
To decrease the motor shaft current and protect the motor insulation, refer to
. Install a dv/dt filter or sine wave filter if possible,
regardless of the length of the motor cable.
Connecting the Cables
69
Only use Class H or RK5 UL listed input fuses and UL listed breakers. See the table above for the
voltage and current ratings for the fuses and breakers.
Utiliser UNIQUEMENT des fusibles d’entrée homologués de Classe H ou RK5 UL et des disjoncteurs
UL. Se reporter au tableau ci-dessus pour la tension et le courant nominal des fusibless et des
disjoncteurs.
4.8 Control Terminal Wiring for iS7 Inverters Rated
for Up To 22 kW
The iS7 inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for sequence inputs at the
terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit your requirements using the PNP/NPN selection
switch above the control terminal block. Refer to the following information for detailed
applications.
Connecting the Cables
70
4.8.1 NPN Mode (Sink)
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch. The factory default setting is NPN mode. CM
(24V GND) is the common ground terminal for all terminal inputs.
4.8.2 PNP Mode (Source)
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch. The factory default setting is NPN mode. CM
(24 V GND) is the common ground terminal for all terminal inputs, and 24 is the 24 V internal
source. If you are using an external 24 V source, select PNP (sink) mode and build a circuit that
connects the external source (-) and the CM terminal.
Connecting the Cables
71
4.8.3 0.75–22 kW (Basic I/O)
Wiring Examples
Default Functions Assigned for the Multi-Function Terminals
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
FX RX BX RST Sp-L Sp-M Sp-H JOG
Note
• The TR (termination resistor) switch is used to terminate the RS485 network connection (120 Ω).
• For analog voltage input, use a potentiometer rated at 0.5W, 1kOhm.
• Refer to 13 Table of Functions on page 398 for the multi-function terminal configurations.
Connecting the Cables
72
4.9 Control Terminal Wiring for iS7 Inverters Rated
for 30 kW or More
30–375 kW (control terminal block)
Connecting the Cables
73
Note
• The TR (termination resistor) switch is used to terminate the RS485 network connection (120 Ω) .
• Use a potentiometer rated for 0.5 W, 1 kΩ.
If the analog voltage (V) or current (I) input is used to set the frequency reference, the analog
input is reflected when the input is actually received. For instance, the voltage input 0 V at V1
does not indicate that no input is received at V1, but it means that 0 V input is actually received
at V1.
Note
When you use the analog voltage input, the bipolar input range (-10 – +10V), in comparison to the
unipolar input range (0–10V), allows for more accurate input control with smaller increments.
If the analog input is interrupted when setting a frequency reference using the analog voltage (V)
input and no voltage input is received at the terminal, an offset voltage may be applied to keep the
frequency reference at approximately 4–5 Hz.
4.10 Terminal Inputs for Inverter Operation
Input Type Symbol Name Description
Input signal
Terminal
input
P1–P8 iMulti-function
nput1–8
Configurable for multi-function input terminals.
Refer to 13 Table of Functions on page 398 for the
multi-function terminal configurations.
CM Common sequence Common terminal for terminal inputs (5G common
terminal is used for analog frequency inputs only).
Analog
input
VR(+)
Potentiometer
frequency reference
(+)
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
the analog voltage or current input.
Maximum output is +12 V, 100 mA.
VR(-)
Potentiometer
frequency reference
(-)
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
the analog voltage or current input.
Maximum output is -12 V, 100 mA.
Connecting the Cables
74
Input Type Symbol Name Description
V1 Voltage input for
frequency reference
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
the analog voltage input terminal.
Unipolar: 0–10 V
Bipolar: -10–10 V
Input resistance 20 kΩ
I1 Current input for
frequency reference
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
the current input terminals.
Input current: DC 0–20 mA
Input resistance 249 Ω
5G Frequency setting
common terminal
Common terminal for analog voltage and current
terminals (CM common terminal is used for
terminal inputs only).
Output Signal
Analog
output
AO1
Multi-function
analog voltage
output terminal
Used to send inverter output information to
external devices.
Output voltage: 0–10 V
Maximum output voltage: 10 V
Maximum output current: 10 mA
AO2
Multi-function
analog current
output terminal
Used to send inverter output information to
external devices.
Output current: 4–20 mA (0–20 mA)
Maximum output current: 20 mA
Terminal
output
Q1
Multi-function
terminal (open
collector)
DC 26 V, below 100 mA
EG Common terminal
for open collector
Common ground contact for an open collector
(with external power source).
24 External 24 V power
source Maximum output current: 150 mA
CM External 24 V
common
Common ground contact for the external 12 V
power source.
A1,
B1,C1 Fault signal output
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s safety
features are activated (below AC 250 V 5 A,
DC 30 V 5 A).
Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are connected
(B1 and C1 open connection)
Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts are
connected (A1 and C1 open connection)
A2, C2
Multi-function
relay2 output A
contact
Outputs the signal while running. User defined
multi-function output terminal.
(< AC 250 V, 5 A / < DC 30 V, 5 A)
S+,S-,CM RS-485 signal line Used to send or receive RS-485 signals. Refer to 11
Communication Function on page 351.
Connecting the Cables
75
4.11 Cable Specifications for Control Block Wiring
Terminal Name Cable size1) Specifications
mm2 AWG
P1–P8 Multi-function input terminal
0.33–
1.25 16–22
-
CM
Common terminal input
(5G common is used for
analog frequency inputs only).
Common earth for multi-function input
terminal
VR+ pAnalog frequency setting (+)
ower
Output voltage: +12 V
Maximum output voltage: 100 mA
VR- Analog frequency setting (-)
power
Output voltage: -12 V
Maximum output voltage: 100 mA
V1 Multi-function analog voltage
input terminal Input voltage: 0–10 V or -10–10 V
I1 Multi-function analog current
input terminal
0–20 mA input
Internal resistance: 249 Ω
AO1 Multi-function analog voltage
output terminal
0.33–
2.0
14–22
Maximum output voltage: 10 V
Maximum output current: 10 mA
AO2 Multi-function analog current
output terminal Maximum output current: 20 mA
5G
Frequency setting common
terminal (CM common
terminal is used for terminal
inputs only).
Common terminal of analog frequency
setting signal and analog current and
voltage terminals
Q1 Multi-function terminal
(open collector) DC 26 V, below 100 mA
EG Ground terminal for external
power
Common terminal for an open collector
external power source
24 External 24 V power supply
0.33–
1.25 16–22
Maximum output current: 150 mA
CM 24 V common sCommon terminal for external 24 V power
ource
A1 Multi-function relay 1 output A
0.33–
2.0
14–22
Below AC 250 V/5 A, Below DC 30 V/5 A
B1 Multi-function relay 1 output B Below AC 250 V/5 A, Below DC 30 V/5 A
C1 Multi-function relay 1
common terminal Below AC 250 V/5 A, Below DC 30 V/5 A
A2 Multi-function relay 2 output A Below AC 250 V/5 A, Below DC 30 V/5 A
C2 Multi-function relay 2
common terminal Below AC 250 V/5 A, Below DC 30 V/5 A
S+,S- RS485 signal input terminal
0.75 18
RS485 signal line
CM RS485 common terminal For multi-connections, RS485 power
ground (shield) connection terminal
1) Use shielded, twisted-pair cables.
Connecting the Cables
76
4.12 Setting the Built-in Surge Filter
The iS7 series inverters have a built-in surge filter between the input phases and the ground
connection to absorb and mitigate surge current. This filter consists of a Y-CAP and multiple
varistors.
However, in a non-grounded power system where specific ground faults occur frequently,
adequate measures are required to avoid inverter damage.
Refer to the following table for details on how to prevent damage to specific power systems.
Power supply system and ground type Varistors and Y-CAP connection Effect
Directly grounded system 2-pin connector (on) Reduced voltage stress and
noise
Non-grounded or impedance
ground system 2-pin connector (off)
Reduced risk of inverter
damage if ground fault
occurs
Note
The 0.75–22 KW (400 V) and 0.75–75 KW (200 V) products do not support this function.
• You can deactivate the built-in surge filter if there is no risk of surge voltage occurring in the
system.
• In order to prevent accidents, remove the jumper switch after the internal voltage of the
inverter is completely discharged.
Connecting the Cables
77
4.13 Activating or Deactivating the Surge Filter
4.13.1 iS7 30–75KW (400 V) Inverters
Contact LSIS Customer Support and ask for assistance to deactivate the built-in surge filter for
the 30–75 KW (400 V) inverters.
4.13.2 iS7 90–375 kW (400V) Inverters
Remove the keypad and the screws from the front cover, and then remove the front cover.
Be careful not to open the front cover with the keypad attached, as this can damage the keypad
cable.
Refer to the figure below and locate the SCR snubber board. On the circuit board, activate or
deactivate the surge filter by connecting the two jumper pins or breaking the connection
between the two pins using a jumper plug. The filter is turned on when the jumper plug is
installed, and it is turned off when the jumper plug is removed.
Connecting the Cables
78
Refer to the following figures to locate the jumper switch on the SCR snubber bo ard and install
or remove the jumper cap to activate or deactivate the built-in surge filter.
SV900-1600iS7 (400 V)
SV1850-2200iS7 (400 V)
SV2800-3750iS7 (400 V)
Connecting the Cables
79
4.14 Post-Installation Checklist
After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that the
inverter has been safely and correctly installed.
Items Check Point Resul
t
Installation
Location/Power
I/O Verification
Is the installation location appropriate?
Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating conditions?
Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input?
Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the equipment?
(Certain circumstances will result in degraded performance.
Power Terminal
Wiring
Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the inverter?
Is the circuit breaker correctly rated?
Are the power source cables correctly connected to the R/S/T terminals
of the inverter?
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W terminals may
damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the correct phase rotation
(U/V/W)?
(Caution: motors will rotate in the reverse direction if three-phase
cables are not wired in the correct phase rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal connections correctly rated?
Is the inverter grounded correctly?
Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal screws
tightened to their specified torques?
Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly on the motors (if
multiple motors are run using one inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by a magnetic
contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)?
Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection, and electromagnetic
interference filters installed correctly?
(These devices MUST not be installed on the output side of the inverter.)
Control
Terminal Wiring
Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control terminal wiring?
Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded?
Connecting the Cables
80
Items Check Point Resul
t
If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function input terminals
defined prior to the installation of the control wiring connections?
Are the control cables properly wired?
Are the control terminal screws tightened to their specified torques?
Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 328 ft (100 m) for model
types rated at 3.7 kW and below, and 984 ft (300 m) for model types
rated at more than 3.7 kW?
Is the total length of safety wiring < 100 ft (30 m)?
Miscellaneous
Are optional modules connected correctly?
Is there any debris left inside the inverter?
Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating a potential short
circuit risk?
Are the control terminal connections separated from the power
terminal connections?
Have the capacitors been replaced if they have been in use for > 2
years?
Has a fuse been installed for the power source?
Are the connections to the motor separated from other connections?
Note
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables have a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted-pair
cables. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.
4.15 Test Run
When you turn on the iS7 inverter for the first time, it starts in Easy Start mode to help you
configure the basic parameters required for inverter operation.
4.15.1 Entering Easy Start Mode
Connecting the Cables
81
The inverter starts in Easy Start mode when you turn on the inverter for the first time, or when
the inverter is turned on following a parameter initialization.
Note
• Before setting the parameter values for a user application, initialize the parameter settings to
make sure that the default setting is applied to all parameters.
• If you initialized all parameters after an inverter trip occurred, the inverter starts in Easy Start
mode after it is reset, regardless of the pending trip condition.
• Easy Start mode is not available while the inverter is already running.
4.15.2 Setting the Basic Parameters in Easy Start Mode
Refer to the following sequence table to understand the Easy Start sequence and configure the
basic parameters according to the instructions.
Sequence Instruction
Start Easy Set Select “Yes” to start the inverter in Easy Start mode (select “No” to start
the inverter in Monitor mode).
CNF-01 Language Sel Select the keypad display language (only English is available at the
moment).
DRV-14 Motor Capacity Set the motor capacity. (Ex: 0.75 kW, 1.5 kW)
BAS-11 Pole Number Set the number of poles in the motor.
BAS-15 Rated Volt Set the rated motor voltage. Set this value to “0 V” if the rated motor
voltage is identical to the input voltage.
BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel Set the rated motor frequency.
BAS19 AC Input Volt Set the inverter input voltage.
DRV-06 Cmd Source Set the source of the frequency reference. (Ex: KEYPAD, FX/RX-1, FX/RX-
2, etc.)
DRV-01 Cmd Frequency Set the frequency reference. (Ex: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, etc.)
Note
While you are in Easy Start mode, you can press the [ESC] key on the keypad to cancel Easy Start
Connecting the Cables
82
mode and enter Monitor mode.
Connecting the Cables
83
4.15.3 Checking the Inverter Operation
Using an inverter, you can easily operate a motor at a high speed. Before operating a motor using
an inverter, ensure that the set speed is within the motor's rated speed.
Follow the instructions to ensure that the motor operates correctly according to the inverter
settings, and adjust the settings if required.
1 Set DRV-06 (CMD source) to “0 (KEYPAD).”
2 Set DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src) to “0 (Keypad-1).”
3 Set DRV-01 (CMD Frequency) to a temporary speed (Ex: 60 Hz).
4 Press the FWD key on the keypad, and ensure that the motor is rotating in the correct
direction. When the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate
counterclockwise when viewed from the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the
reverse direction, switch the cables at the U and V terminals.
Ensure that the input power is within the inverter’s rated input voltage range during operation.
Peripheral Devices
84
5 Peripheral Devices
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter and
peripheral devices.
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power
rating, capacity, etc.). Also, ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices
(resistor brakes, contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available.
• Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more
detailed view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before
operating the inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.
• Supply input power within the voltage range approved for the inverter's rating.
• Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor installed in the input power supply.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous situation.
Install an additional safety device, such as an emergency brake, to prevent these situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly rated
circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.
• Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be installed
within 32.8 ft (10 m) of the power source if the input power exceeds 1000 kVA.
• 400 V class inverters require a motor with reinforced insulation. Micro surge voltages generated
at the motor terminals may deteriorate the motor insulation.
Peripheral Devices
85
5.1 Wiring Switch, Electronic Contactor, and Reactor
Specifications
5.1.1 Wiring Switch, Short Circuit Switch, and Electronic Contactor
Only use Class H or RK5 UL listed input fuses and UL listed breakers. See the table above for the
voltage and current ratings for the fuses and breakers.
Utiliser UNIQUEMENT des fusibles d’entrée homologués de Classe H ou RK5 UL et des disjoncteurs
UL. Se reporter au tableau ci-dessus pour la tension et le courant nominal des fusibless et des
disjoncteurs.
Note
• If you install the recommended reactors, you can maintain the power factor above 85%, and
keep the THD below 40% for operations at the rated load. Improvements are reduced at lighter
loads.
• Cable impedance affects the input power factor and occurrence of harmonic waves. The input
power factor and THD improvement of the reactors may be lower depending on the
transformer capacity, the transformer impedance, and the cable length.
• Refer to the specifications table and install recommended reactors. Although a higher
inductance value (L) of the reactor results in an improvement in the power factor and better
suppression of harmonic effects, power loss increases at the same time due to voltage drop.
• The capacity of built-in DC reactors in some iS7 inverter models is based on the normal duty
load factor. Therefore, improvements may be reduced during a heavy duty operation.
Peripheral Devices
87
5.1.2 Reactors
DC Reactor Specifications
The iS7 200 V/ 400 V 30–75 kW, 400 V/280–375 kW models are not supplied with a built-in DC
reactor. Refer to the following specifications tables for different models to choose an
appropriate DC reactor for your application.
<200V/30–75kW>
Inverter capacity DC reactor specifications
mH A
0300iS7-2 0.24 200
0370iS7-2 0.2 240
0450iS7-2 0.17 280
0550iS7-2 0.12 360
0750iS7-2 0.1 500
<400V/30–75kW>
(For Non-DCR products, remove the P1 and P2 shorting pins to install the DC reactor.)
Inverter capacity DC reactor specifications
mH A
0300iS7-4 0.98 75
0370iS7-4 0.87 90
0450iS7-4 0.55 110
0550iS7-4 0.47 150
0750iS7-4 0.48 180
<400V/280–375 kW>
Inverter capacity DC reactor specifications
mH A
2800iS7-4 0.09 836
3150iS7-4 0.076 996
3750iS7-4 0.064 1195
Note
All iS7 models, other than the 200 V/30–75 kW and 400 V/280–375 kW models, may be provided with
an optional built-in DC reactor.
Peripheral Devices
88
AC Reactor Specifications
You can install an AC reactor to prevent the capacitors and generators from overheating or
being damaged when the power source voltage is unbalanced.
When you install an AC reactor, connect the AC reactor cables to the R, S, and T terminals on
the inverter. Installation of an AC reactor is not necessary if a DC reactor is already installed in
the inverter.
To avoid power loss resulting from the incorrect installation of an AC reactor, contact LSIS
Customer Support to ensure that your model type and application requires the installation of
an AC reactor.
Refer to the following specifications tables to choose an appropriate AC reactor for your
application.
Set
Note 1) For model types with a rated capacity of 180 kW and above, contact LSIS Customer Support
for detailed information.
Note
• The 0.75–22kW (200 V/400 V) models are provided with a built-in dynamic braking unit.
Installation of additional dynamic braking units is not necessary for these models.
• Refer to the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer before installing a dynamic
braking unit. There may be specification changes that are not reflected in the table provided
with this manual.
• For detailed specifications of type A DB units, such as resistance/wattage/braking torque/%ED,
refer to the table in 5.1.6 DB Resistors on page 101. For type B and type C DB units, refer to the
instruction manual provided by the manufacturer.
DBU Terminal Arrangement
Group 1 Group 2
Terminal Description
G Ground Terminal
B2 Connect to the B2 terminal of a braking resistor.
B1 Connect to the B1 terminal of a braking resistor.
N Connect to the N terminal of an inverter.
P Connect to the P1 terminal of an inverter.
P N G B1 B2 G N B2 P/B1
Peripheral Devices
92
Peripheral Devices
93
Group 3 (75 kW DB unit) Group 4 (220 kW DB unit)
Terminal Description
G Ground Terminal
B2 Connect to the B2 terminal of a braking resistor.
B1 Connect to the B1 terminal of a braking resistor.
N Connect to the N terminal of an inverter.
P Connect to the P terminal of an inverter.
Group 5
Terminal Description
P (+) Connect to the P terminal of an inverter.
N ( - ) Connect to the N terminal of an inverter.
B1 Connect to the B1 terminal of a braking resistor.
B2 Connect to the B2 terminal of a braking resistor.
N.C Not used
E Ground terminal
Terminal Description
P (+) Connect to the P terminal of an inverter (DC bus).
N ( - ) Connect to the N terminal of an inverter (DC bus).
B1 Connect to the B1 terminal of an external braking resistor.
B2 Connect to the B2 terminal of an external braking resistor.
N.C Not used
E Ground terminal
Note
Refer to the instruction manual that is supplied with the DB unit to choose appropriate DB resistors
for installation.
Basic Wiring Connection for the DB Unit and DB Resistor
Peripheral Devices
95
DB Unit Terminal Description
B1 Connect to the B1 terminal of a DB resistor.
B2 Connect to the B2 terminal of a DB resistor.
5.1.4 DB Unit Dimensions
Group 1
Peripheral Devices
96
Group 2
Peripheral Devices
97
Group 3
Peripheral Devices
98
Group 4
Peripheral Devices
99
Group 5
Voltage Motor
capacity Dimensions (mm) Hole position Weight Hole size
[V] [kW] W H H2 D W1 H1 [kg] (φ)
220
15
140 227.4 192 76.4 125 215.4
1.50
M4
22 1.55
37 1.57
75 1.84
440
15 1.53
22 1.55
37 1.56
75 1.85
Peripheral Devices
100
Group 6
Frame
Voltage Motor
capacity %ED Dimensions (mm) Hole position Weight
Hole
size
[V] [kW] W H H2 D W1 H1 [kg] (φ)
A
220 37 50
200 219 190
165.2
160 208.5
3.77
M6
440
37 50 3.84
75 50 3.98
B
220
75 50
215 340 311 175 329.5
8.26
90 50 8.48
440
90 50 8.30
132 50 8.40
C 440
160 50
240 380 351 200 369.5
9.40
220 50 9.70
Peripheral Devices
101
5.1.5 Indicators on the DB unit
On a DB unit, there are three LED indicators (one red and two green indicators) that indicate
the operating condition of the DB unit.
Indicator
name Color Location Description
Power
indicator Red Middle
Turns on when the main power is supplied to the unit (if a DB
unit is connected to an inverter, the power indicator is turned
on when the main power is supplied to the inverter).
RUN
indicator Green Right Turns on when the DB unit is regenerating.
OHT
indicator Green Left
Turns on when the overheating protection function is
enabled.
If the DB unit temperature exceeds the maximum allowed
operating temperature, the overheating protection function
is activated to cut off the input to the DB unit (the power
indicator on the DB unit is turned off).
5.1.6 DB Resistors
The following table lists type A DB unit specifications for your reference. For type B and type C
DB unit specifications, refer to the instruction manuals that are supplied with the DB units.
Before installing a DB resistor, refer to the instruction manuals provided by the manufacturer
to choose an appropriate type of DB resistor.
Note
When you double the duty cycle (%ED) of a DB unit, the wattage ratings of the optional DB resistor
must be doubled accordingly.
Peripheral Devices
102
Inverter
capacity (kW) DB Unit Model type
Resistance
[ohm]
Wattage
[W] Type Reference
Wiring
[mm2]
2
0
0
V
C
l
a
s
s
0.75 - 150 150 TYPE 1
150%
braking
torque,
5%ED
1.25
1.5 - 60 300 TYPE 1 1.25
2.2 MCRB400W50 50 400 TYPE 1 2
3.7 MCRB600W33 33 600 TYPE 2 3.5
5.5 MCRM800W20 20 800 TYPE 3 6.63
7.5 MCRM1200W15 15 1200 TYPE 3 6.63
11 MCRM2400W10 10 2400 TYPE 3 13.3
15 MCRM2400W8 8 2400 TYPE 3 13.3
18.5 MCRM3600W5 5 3600 TYPE 3 13.3
22 MCRM3600W5 5 3600 TYPE 3 13.3
30 - 5 5000 -
100%
braking
torque,
10%ED
-
37 SV370DBU
-2U - 4.5 7000 - -
45 - 3.5 10000 - -
55 SV550DBU
-2U - 3.0 15000 - -
75 - 2.5 20000 - -
4
0
0
V
C
l
a
s
s
0.75 - 600 150 TYPE 1
150%
braking
torque,
5%ED
1.25
1.5 - 300 300 TYPE 1 2
2.2 MCRB400W200 200 400 TYPE 1 2
3.7 MCRB600W130 130 600 TYPE 2 2
5.5 MCRM1000W85 85 1000 TYPE 3 2.62
7.5 MCRM1200W60 60 1200 TYPE 3 2.62
11 MCRM2000W40 40 2000 TYPE 3 13.3
15 MCRM2400W30 30 2400 TYPE 3 13.3
18.5 MCRM3600W20 20 3600 TYPE 3 13.3
22 MCRM3600W20 20 3600 TYPE 3 13.3
30 - 16.9 6,400 -
100%
braking
torque,
10%ED
• If you install multiple DB units in parallel, the combined resistance value must match the
resistance value in the table above.
• If an appropriate braking resistor type is not listed in the table, find a braking resistor with
equivalent resistance and wattage values that are suggested in the table above.
5.1.7 DB Resistor Dimensions
TYPE Size [mm]
W H D A B C
1 64 410 30 - 392 6
2 128 390 43 65 373 6
3 220 345 93 140 330 7.8
4 220 445 93 140 428 7.8
5 220 445 165 140 430 7.8
Peripheral Devices
104
TYPE 1 (Maximum 400 Watts)
TYPE 2 (Maximum 600 Watts)
Peripheral Devices
105
TYPE 3, 4, and 5
5.1.8 Keypad Extension Cable for Remote Control (Optional)
Included items
Items
Keypad bracket Remote cable (2 m/3 m)
Peripheral Devices
106
Keypad Bracket Dimensions
Remote Cable Specifications
Model type Part name
64110009 INV, iS7 REMOTE CABLE (2 M)
64110010 INV, iS7 REMOTE CABLE (3 M)
Peripheral Devices
107
Installing the Remote Cable
Refer to the following figure to install the remote cable to extend the keypad cable length.
If a “Line Check” message is displayed on the keypad display and the keypad is not operating
correctly after installing the remote cable, check the cable connection on both sides.
Do not extend the keypad cable using a third-party extension cable. The keypad may not operate
correctly due to voltage drop and electromagnetic interference.
Note
• Ensure that the cable length between the keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10 ft
(3.04 m). Cable connections longer than 10 ft (3.04 m) may cause signal errors.
• Install a ferrite clamp to protect signal cables from electromagnetic interference (Ex. Wurth
Electronics ferrite clamp PN742732).
Using the Keypad
108
6 Using the Keypad
6.1 About the Keypad
A keypad is used to set inverter parameters, monitor the inverter’s status, and operate the
inverter.
6.1.1 Dimensions
Using the Keypad
109
6.1.2 Key Functions
The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.
Section Buttons Key Name Function Description
KEY
[MODE] key Used to switch between modes.
[PROG/ENT] key
If this button is pressed once, the parameter can be
edited at the status of the editable parameter code. If
this button is pressed after modification, it will save the
modified data.
[Up] key Switch between codes, or increase or decrease
[Down] key parameter values.
[Left] key Switch between groups or move the cursor during
[Right] key parameter setup or modification.
[MULTI] key Used to register jog or user codes.
[ESC] key
If you press this key before pressing the [PROG / ENT]
key, it will revert the parameter value to the previous
value.
If you press this key while editing the codes in any
function group, the keypad will display the first code of
the function group.
If you press this key while moving through the modes,
the keypad will display Monitor mode.
[FWD] key Used to operate the motor in the forward direction.
[REV] key Used to operate the motor in the reverse direction.
[STOP/RESET] key Used to stop the operation and release a fault.
Using the Keypad
110
6.1.3 Display Items
Monitor Mode
Parameter Mode
6.1.4 Display Item List
The following table lists the items in the display.
Item Description
Mode display items Displays the current mode’s display items. For more details, refer
to 6.3 Navigating Modes on page 116.
Using the Keypad
111
Item Description
Parameter group items Displays the current parameter group’s items. For more details,
refer to 6.4 Navigating Modes and Parameters on page 119.
Command source /
frequency reference items
Displays the types of sequences and the number of steps during an
auto sequence operation.
Status display items Displays the output frequency, output voltage, and current. For
more details, refer to 6.1.3 Display Items on pages 110.
Monitor mode display items Displays the current operation status. For more details, refer to 6.1.3
Display Items on pages 110.
Monitor display items
The following table lists display icons and their names and functions.
No Function Display Description
1 Operation
mode
MON Monitor mode
PAR Parameter mode
U&M User-defined and Macro mode
TRP Trip mode
CNF Configuration mode
2 Command
source
K Keypad operation command
O FieldBus communication option operation command
A Application option operation command
R Built-in 485 operation command
T Terminal block operation command
3 Frequency
reference
K Keypad frequency command
V V1 input frequency command
I I1 input frequency command
P Pulse input frequency command
U Frequency command during UP operation
(Up-Down operation)
D Frequency command during DOWN operation
(Up-Down operation)
S Frequency command during STOP operation
(Up-Down operation)
O FBus Option frequency command
X V2 and I2 frequency commands for sub-terminal block
Using the Keypad
112
N o Function Display Description
J Jog frequency command
R Internal 485 frequency command
1-9 A-F Multi-step frequency command
4 Multi-function
key settings
JOG key Used to switch to Keypad JOG mode
Local/Remote Used to select local or remote operation
User Group
Select key
Used to register parameters as a user group in
Parameter mode or delete parameters in the user
group.
5
Inverter
operating
status
STP Motor stopped
FWD Operating in the forward direction
REV Operating in the reverse direction
DC DC output
WAN Warning
STL Stalling
SPS Speed Search
OSS Software over current controlled
OSH Hardware over current controlled
TUN Auto tuning
*OSS / OSH may cause overcurrent when the load is too large or when the
acceleration/deceleration time is short. The inverter monitors the output current so that an
overcurrent trip does not occur and also performs overcurrent suppression.
At this time, the output frequency is automatically changed to reduce the output current or
the inverter output is temporarily cut off to prevent overcurrent.
Using the Keypad
113
6.2 Menu Items
The SV-iS7 series inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure different functions. Each mode
has its own function items suitable for the desired properties. The parameters in Parameter
mode and User & Macro mode are divided into smaller groups of relevant functions.
Using the Keypad
114
M ode Display Description
M onitor mode MON
Displays the inverter’s operation status information. You can
monitor the frequency setting, operating frequency display,
output current, voltage, etc.
Parameter mode PAR
Used to configure the functions required to operate the inverter.
These functions are divided into 12 groups based on purpose and
complexity.
User & Macro
mode U&M
Used to define User and Macro groups. These user-definable
groups allow specific functions of the inverter to be grouped and
managed in separate groups.
This mode will not be displayed when navigating through modes if
no User groups or Macro groups have been defined.
Trip mode TRP
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information, including the
previous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the operation
frequency, output current, and output voltage of the inverter at
the time of the fault can be monitored.
This mode will not be displayed if the inverter is not at fault and a
fault trip history does not exist.
Configuration
mode CNF
Used to configure the inverter features that are not directly
related to the operation of the inverter. The settings you can
configure in Configuration mode include keypad display language
options, monitor mode environment settings, communication
module display settings, and parameter duplication and
initialization.
6.2.1 Parameter Mode
Mode Display Description
Drive group DRV Includes frequency/acceleration/deceleration time setting,
operation command selection, etc.
Basic group BAS Configures basic operation parameters. These parameters include
motor parameters and multi-step frequency parameters.
Advanced function
group ADV
Configures acceleration or deceleration, patterns, and frequency
limits.
Control function
group CON Configures functions related to sensorless and vector control.
Input terminal
function group IN
Configures input terminal–related features, including digital multi–
functional inputs and analog inputs.
Using the Keypad
115
Mode Display Description
Output terminal
function group OUT
Configures the inverter output terminal block-related features,
including the relay and analog outputs.
Communication
function group COM
Configures the communication features for the RS-485, if one is
installed.
Application
function group APP
Configures the features related to PID control and auto sequence
operation.
Auto Sequence run
group AUT
Configures the necessary features for auto sequence operation.
This group will be displayed if the auto sequence operation in the
APP group is selected.
Application option
group APO
Configures the encoder and PLC option module-related features if
they are installed.
Protection group PRT Configures motor and inverter protection features.
Motor 2 function
group
(Motor 2)
M2
Configures the secondary motor-related features. This group will
be displayed when Motor #2 is selected from the multi-function
input terminal functions.
6.2.2 User & Macro Mode
Group Display Description
User group USR
Used to group frequently accessed function parameters. User
parameter groups can be configured using the multi-function key
on the keypad.
Macro group MCx
This provides different factory preset groups of functions based on
the type of load. Group MC1, MC2, or MC3 will be displayed when
the user selects the desired load type. Macro groups can be
selected in CNF mode. For more details, refer to 11.12 Parameter
Group for Transmission of Macro Group and User Group at U&M
Mode on page 361.
Using the Keypad
116
6 .3 Navigating Modes
6.3.1 Mode Navigation at the Factory Default
You can change the display to navigate modes by using the [MODE] key. The User & Macro
Mode and Trip Mode are not displayed when the inverter is set to the factory default settings.
For more details, refer to 11.12 Parameter Group for Transmission of Macro Group and User Group
at U&M Mode on page 361.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This is the
display of Monitor mode (MON).
• Press the [MODE] key.
Using the Keypad
117
• You are now in Parameter mode (PAR).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in Config mode (CNF).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in Monitor mode again.
6.3.2 Mode Navigation with User/Macro Mode and Trip Mode
If you register a user code or set the macro function using the [MULTI] key, the User & Macro
mode will be displayed, unlike the factory default settings during mode navigation. In addition,
when a trip occurs during operation, Trip mode will be displayed. The trip information will also
be saved in the trip mode history if you release the trip using the RESET function. The two
modes for mode navigation are as follows.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This is the
display of Monitor mode (MON).
• Press the [MODE] key.
Using the Keypad
118
• You are now in Parameter mode (PAR).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in User & Macro mode (U&M).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in Trip mode (TRP).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in Config mode (CNF).
• Press the [MODE] key.
• You are now in Monitor mode again.
Using the Keypad
119
6.4 Navigating Modes and Parameters
You can navigate modes by using the [Left] or [Right] keys after navigating to the Parameter
Mode or User & Macro Mode via the [Mode] key.
6.4.1 Group Navigation in Parameter mode
If you press the [Right] key in Parameter mode, the display will change as shown below. If you
press the [Left] key, the display order will be reversed.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This is the
display of Monitor mode (MON).
• Press the [MODE] key.
Using the Keypad
120
• You are now in Parameter mode (PAR).
• The Drive Group (DRV) of Parameter mode is
displayed.
• Press the [Right] key.
• You are now in the Basic Function Group (BAS).
• Press the [Right] key.
• You are now in the Advanced Function Group (ADV).
• Press the [Right] key 7 times.
• The group sequence will change and the Protection
Function Group (PRT) will be displayed.
• Press the [Right] key.
• You are now in the Drive group (DRV) of the
Parameter group again.
Using the Keypad
121
6.4.2 Group Shift in User & Macro Mode
To navigate to User & Macro Mode, the user code should be registered or the macro function
should be selected. For more details on how to register the user code and macro group, refer
to 11.12 Parameter Group for Transmission of Macro Group and User Group at U&M Mode on page
361. If the user code is registered and the macro function is selected, you can navigate to the
group as shown below.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This is
the display of Monitor mode (MON).
• Press the [MODE] key twice.
• You are now in the User & Macro mode (U&M).
• The User Group (USR) is displayed.
• Press the [Right] key.
• You are now in the Macro group (MC1).
• Press the [Right] key.
• You are now in the User Group (USR) again.
Using the Keypad
122
6 .5 Navigating through Codes (Function Items)
6.5.1 Code Navigation in Monitor Mode
To display the frequency, output current, and output voltage, press the [Up] or [Down] keys to
scroll through the items.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This
display is in Monitor mode.
• The cursor is located at the frequency item.
• Press the [Down] key.
• The second display item displays the output current.
• Do not press any key for approximately 2 seconds
after navigation.
• The output current text has disappeared and the
cursor has moved to the second display item.
• Press the [Down] key.
• The third display item displays the output voltage.
• Do not press any key for approximately 2 seconds
after navigation.
Using the Keypad
123
• The output voltage text has disappeared and the
cursor has moved to the third display item.
• Press the [Up] key twice.
• The first item displays the frequency.
• The frequency text has disappeared and the cursor
has moved to the first display item.
6.5.2 Code Navigation (function items) in Other Modes and Groups
Using the [Up] and [Down] keys: The following example demonstrates how to
navigate through the codes in the Drive (DRV) group and the Basic [BAS] group of
Parameter mode. Code navigation in other modes is the same as follows.
• Displays when the inverter is powered on. This
display is in Monitor mode.
• Press the [Down] key.
Using the Keypad
124
• Displays the Drive (DRV) group of Parameter mode.
If the DRV group is not displayed, press the [MODE]
key until the DRV group appears, or press the [ESC]
key.
• If you press the [Down] key, you will navigate to
code No. 01 in the DRV group of Parameter mode.
• Press the [Right] key.
• You have moved to the Basic (BAS) group of
Parameter mode.
• You can navigate through the codes using the [Up]
or [Down] keys.
6.5.3 Code Navigation Using Jump Code
In the Parameter mode and User/Macro mode groups, you can use the Jump Code Entry item
to move to a desired code. It is quicker to move to a large code number using the Jump Code
Entry item rather than the [Up] and [Down] keys. The following example demonstrates how to
move to code No. 09 of the Drive (DRV) group.
• Ensure that code No. 00 is displayed in the initial
display of the Drive (DRV) group of Parameter
mode.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
Using the Keypad
125
• The cursor flashes and you can enter the code
number.
• Press the [Up] key to enter 9 and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
• You have moved to code No. 09 of the DRV group.
• Press the [ESC] key to move to code No. 00 of the
DRV group.
Using the Keypad
126
6 .6 Setting Parameters
6.6.1 Parameter Settings in Monitor Mode
You can set some parameters, such as the frequency, in Monitor mode. The following example
demonstrates how to set the frequency.
• Ensure that the cursor is at the frequency item. Also,
ensure that the frequency can be set to 09 in the
Drive (DRV) group using the keypad.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• Detailed information of the item is displayed and the
cursor flashes.
• Press the [Left] or [Right] keys to move the cursor to
the desired location to set the frequency.
• Press the [Up] key to set the frequency to 10 Hz.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The frequency reference is set to 10 Hz.
Using the Keypad
127
6.6.2 Parameter Settings in Other Modes and Groups
The following example demonstrates how to change the frequency of the Drive (DRV) group in
Parameter mode. The frequency in the other modes or groups can be set as follows.
• This is the initial display in Parameter mode.
• Press the [Down] key.
• You have moved to the 01 frequency setting code.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The cursor flashes and you can enter the desired
frequency.
• If the frequency reference is set to 10 Hz, press the
[Left] or [Right] keys to move the cursor to the
desired place.
• Press the [Up] key to enter 10 Hz and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
• The frequency reference is set to 10 Hz.
Using the Keypad
128
6 .7 Monitoring Operating Status
6.7.1 Using Monitor Mode
Three items can be displayed in Monitor mode at a time. Also, some items, such as the
frequency item, can be edited. You can select the displayed items in Configuration (CNF) mode.
• This is the initial display in Monitor mode.
• The frequency, current, and voltage are set as the
default monitor items.
• The frequency reference is displayed when the
inverter operation has stopped, and the operating
frequency is displayed when the inverter is
operating.
• You can set the items to display in Monitor mode in
sequence from 21 to 23 in Configuration (CNF)
mode.
• Press the [Down] key to move to code No. 23
• Change the code No. 23 item in Monitor mode to
the output power.
• Ensure that the third displayed item in Monitor
mode is changed to the output power.
Using the Keypad
129
6.7.2 Monitoring Items
Mode Code Function Display Setting Range Initial Value
CNF
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current 2:Output Current
23 Monitor Line-3
3 Output Voltage
3:Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI Status
8 DO Status
9 V1 Monitor [V]
10 V1 Monitor [%]
11 I1 Monitor [mA]
12 I1 Monitor [%]
13 V2 Monitor [V]
14 V2 Monitor [%]
15 I2 Monitor [mA]
16 I2 Monitor [%]
17 PID Output
18 PID Ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
22 Trq Bias Ref
23 Speed Limit
24 Load Speed
25 Temperature
Using the Keypad
130
6.7.3 Using the Status Display
The items displayed on the right-top of the display are shown in other modes, including
Monitor mode. If you register a desired variable in the display, you can monitor it at any time
regardless of the mode navigation or change.
• This is the initial display of Monitor mode.
• When the inverter settings are set to the factory
default, the status item displays the frequency.
• Select the item to display in the status display in
code 20 of Configuration (CNF) mode.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key to change the item to
the output current.
• The unit at the top of the display is changed from
hertz (frequency) to amps (current).
• Ensure that the unit in the status display is
changed to amps (current) in Monitor mode.
Using the Keypad
131
6.8 Monitoring Faults
6.8.1 Faults during Inverter Operation
• If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
inverter enters Trip mode automatically and
displays the type of fault trip that has occurred.
• Press the [Down] key to view the information on the
inverter at the time of the fault, including the output
frequency, current, and operating status.
• When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is
released, the keypad display returns to the screen
that was displayed before the fault trip occurred.
Using the Keypad
132
6.8.2 Multiple Faults at a Time during Inverter Operation
• If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, the
number of fault trips that occurred is displayed next
to the fault trip type.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The types of all the fault trips are displayed.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The display mode that was shown before you
checked the fault information is displayed.
6.8.3 Saving and Monitoring the Fault Trip History
Previous fault trips can be saved in Trip mode. You can save up to 5 previous fault trips. Fault
trips caused by resetting the inverter, as well as low voltage faults caused by the inverter being
switched off, are also saved.
If there are more than 5 fault trips, the oldest 5 fault trips are automatically deleted.
Using the Keypad
133
• If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
inverter enters Trip mode and displays the type of
fault trip that has occurred.
• If you press the [STOP/RESET] key or an input is
entered on the terminal, the fault trip is
automatically saved and the display status that was
displayed before the fault trip occurred is displayed.
• Press the [MODE] key to move to Trip mode.
• The most recent fault trip is saved in the Last-1 code.
• Press the [Right] key.
• The previous fault trips are saved in the Last-2 code.
• If another fault trip occurs, the previous fault trips
saved in the Last-2 code move to the Last-3 code.
Using the Keypad
134
6 .9 Initializing Parameters
You can initialize the changed parameters. In addition to initializing the entire parameter, you
can also select the individual parameter mode to be initialized.
• Monitor mode is displayed.
• Press the [MODE] key to move to Configuration
(CNF) mode.
• Press the [Down] key to move to code No. 40.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• Of the parameter items to initialize, select All
Groups and then press the [PROG/ENT] key.
Using the Keypad
135
• The Parameter Initialization option is displayed
again when the initialization is complete.
Basic Functions
136
7 Basic Functions
7.1 Setting Frequency References
The iS7 inverter provides several methods to set up and modify a frequency reference for an
operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1) and current (I1) signals], or RS-
485 (digital signals from higher-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs) can be used.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency
reference source Freq Ref Src
0 KeyPad-1
0–9 -
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
8 Field Bus
9 Pulse
Basic Functions
137
Basic
Functions
7.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)
You can modify the frequency reference using the keypad and apply changes by pressing the
[ENT/PROG] key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to “0 (Keypad-1)”. Input the
frequency reference for an operation at DRV-01 (Frequency reference).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
01 Frequency
reference Cmd Frequency 0.00 0
.00–max.
frequency* Hz
07
Frequency
reference
source
Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–9 -
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the max. frequency, as configured with DRV-20.
7.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)
You can use the [UP] and [DOWN] cursor keys to modify a frequency reference. To use this as a
second option, set the keypad as the source of the frequency reference by going to DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) and changing the parameter value to “1 (Keypad-2)”. This allows
frequency reference values to be increased or decreased by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN]
cursor keys.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
01 Frequency
reference Cmd Frequency 0.00
0.00–max.
frequency * Hz
07
Frequency
reference
source
Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad-2 0–9 -
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the max. frequency, as configured with DRV-20.
7.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source
You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1
terminal. Use voltage inputs ranging from 0–10 V (unipolar) for forward-only operations. Use
voltage inputs ranging from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, with negative voltage
Basic Functions
138
inputs used for reverse operations.
7.1.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input
Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to “0 (unipolar)”. Use a voltage output from an external source or use the
voltage output from the VR terminal to provide inputs to V1. Refer to the diagrams below for
the wiring required for each application.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if “0” is sele cted.
Basic Functions
140
0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details
C ode Description
IN-01 Freq at 100%
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set with
code IN-01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in code IN-
11 (or IN-15) is 100%.
• Set code IN-01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes IN-02–IN-16. The
motor will run at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
• Set code IN-11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes IN-01–IN-16. The
motor will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum frequency–60
Hz) when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
IN-05 V1
Monitor[V] Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
IN-07
V1 Filter
The V1 filter may be used when there are large variations between reference
frequencies. Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant, but
this requires an increased response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach 63%
of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple steps.
[V1 Filter ]
IN-08 V1 volt x1–
IN-11 V1 Perc y2
These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset values
of the output frequency, based on the input voltage.
Basic Functions
141
Basic
Functions
Code Description
IN-16 V1 Inverting mInverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to “1 (Yes)” if you need the
otor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
IN-17 V1
Quantizing
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input (V1
terminal) signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system,
because it suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish
system sensitivity (resultant power of the output frequency will decrease
based on the analog input).
You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code IN-07 to reduce the noise,
but increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause pulsations
(ripples) in the output frequency.
Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the
maximum input. Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the maximum analog
input (60 Hz), the output frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6 Hz for
every 0.1 V change in voltage.
When the analog input is increased, an increase in the input equal to 75% of
the set value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency will
increase according to the set value. Likewise, when the analog input
decreases, a decrease in the input equal to 75% of the set value will make an
initial change to the output frequency.
As a result, the output frequency will be different at acceleration and
deceleration, mitigating the effect of analog input changes over the output
frequency (ripples).
Basic Functions
142
Code Description
[V1 Quantizing]
Basic Functions
143
Basic
Functions
7.1.3.2 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–+10 V Input
Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to “2 (V1)”, and then set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to “1
(bipolar)”. Use the output voltage from an external source to provide an input to V1.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–9 -
IN 01
Frequency at
maximum analog
input
Freq at 100% 60.00 0–max.
frequency Hz
Basic Functions
144
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 0.00–10.00 V V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
12 V1 minimum input
voltage V1- volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V V
13 V1 output at
minimum voltage (%) V1- Perc y1 0.00 -100.00–0.00% %
14 V1 maximum input
voltage V1- Volt x2 -10.00 -10.00–0.00 V V
15 V1 output at
maximum voltage (%) V1- Perc y2 -100.00 -100.00–0.00% %
Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs
Command /
Voltage Input
Input voltage
0–10 V -10–0 V
FWD Forward Reverse
REV Reverse Forward
10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details
Code Description
IN-12 V1- volt x1–
IN-15 V1- Perc y2
Sets the gradient level and offset value of the output frequency in relation to
the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when IN-06 is set to “1
(bipolar)”.
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to “-2 (V)” with 10%
output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to “-8 (V)” with an 80% output
ratio, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6–48 Hz.
Basic Functions
145
Basic
Functions
Code Description
For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions IN-
08 V1 volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2 on page 오류! 책갈피가 정의되어 있지
않습니다..
Basic Functions
146
7.1.3.3 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I1)
You can set and modify a frequency reference using input current at the I1 terminal. Set DRV-
07 (Frequency reference source) to “3 (I1)” and apply an input current of 0–20 mA to I1.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src 3 I1 0–9 -
IN
01
Frequency at
maximum analog
input
Freq at 100% 60.00 0–max.
frequency Hz
20 I1 input monitor I1 Monitor 0.00 0.00–20.00 mA
22 I1 input filter time
constant I1 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
23 I1 minimum input
current I1 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
24 I1 output at
minimum current (%) I1 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
25 I1 maximum input
current I1 Curr x2 20.00 4.00–20.00 mA
26 I1 output at
maximum current (%) I1 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
31 I1 rotation direction
Input Current (I1) Setting Details
Code Description
IN-01 Freq at
100%
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current
(when IN-26 is set to 100%).
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00, and default settings are used for IN-23–26, an
input current of 20 mA (max) to I1 will produce a frequency reference of
40.00 Hz.
• If IN-26 is set to 50.00, and default settings are used for IN-01 (60 Hz)
and IN-23–26, an input current of 20 mA (max) to I1 will produce a
frequency reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).
IN-20 I1 Monitor Used to monitor the input current at I1.
IN-22 I1 Filter Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of the target
frequency based on the input current at I1.
IN-23 I1 Curr x1–
IN-26 I1 Perc y2
Configures the gradient level and offset value of the output frequency.
[Gradient and offset configuration based on output frequency]
IN-32 I1
Quantizing
Same as V1 Quantizing. For more details, refer to 7.1.3.1 Setting a Frequency
Reference for 0–10 V Input on page 138.
Basic Functions
148
7.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference Using an I/O Expans ion
Module (Terminal V2/I2)
After installing an optional I/O I/O expansion moduleto the iS7 inverter, you can set and modify
a frequency reference using the input voltage or current at the V2/I2 terminal.
7.1.4.1 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Voltage at V2 Terminal
Set the DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to “4 (V2)” and apply an input voltage of -10–+12 V
to the V2 terminal.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 rFrequency
eference source Freq Ref Src 4 V2 0–9 -
IN
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 -10.00–
+10.00 V
37 V2 input filter time
constant V2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
38 Minimum V2 input
voltage V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
39
Output% at
minimum V2
voltage
V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
40 Maximum V2 input
voltage V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V
41
Output% at
maximum V2
voltage
V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
42 Minimum V2 input
voltage’ V2 -Volt x1’ 0.00 0–10 V
43
Output% at
minimum V2
voltage’
V2 -Perc y1’ 0.00 0–100 %
44 Maximum V2 input
voltage’ V2 -Volt x2’ -10.00 0–10 V
45 Output% at V2 -Perc y2’ -100.00 -100–0 %
Basic Functions
149
Basic
Functions
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
maximum V2’
voltage
46 dInvert V2 rotational
7.1.4.2 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current at I2 Terminal
Set the DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to “5 (I2)” and apply an input voltage of 0–20 mA
to the I2 terminal.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src 5 I2 0–9 -
50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–20.00 mA
52 I2 input filter time
constant I2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
53 I2 minimum input
current I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
54 I2 output at
minimum current (%) I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
55 I2 maximum input
current I2 Curr x2 20.00 4.00–20.00 mA
56 I2 output at
maximum current (%) I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
61 I2 rotation direction
7.1.5 Setting a Frequency with Pulse Input (with an optio nal
encoder module)
After installing an optional encoder module, you can set a frequency reference by setting DRV-
07 (Frequency reference source) to “9 (Pulse)” and providing a pulse frequency of 0–32.00 kHz
to the pulse input terminal.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 sFrequency reference
ource Freq Ref Src 7 Encoder 0–9 -
IN 01 Frequency at
maximum analog input
Freq at
100% 60.00
0.00–max.
frequency Hz
APO
01 Encoder option mode Enc Opt
Mode 2 Reference 0-2 -
04 Encoder type selection Enc Type Sel 0 - 0-2 -
05 Encoder pulse selection Enc Pulse
Sets the encoder option mode. Set APO-01 to “2 (Reference)” to receive a
pulse input for the frequency reference.
APO-04 Enc Type
Sel Sets the output type.
APO-05 Enc Pulse
Sel Selects the encoder pulse to use.
APO-06 Enc Pulse
Num Sets the number of pulses that is appropriate for the encoder specification.
APO-09 Pulse
Monitor
Displays the pulse frequency supplied at the encoder option module when
APO-1 is set to “2 (Reference)”.
APO-10 Enc Filter Sets the time for the pulse input to reach 63% of its nominal frequency
(when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
APO-11 Enc Pulse
x1–IN-96 Enc Perc
y2
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.
Basic Functions
152
7.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communi cation
Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485
communication. Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to “6 (Int 485)” and use the RS-485
signal input terminals (S+/S-/SG) for communication. For more details, refer to 11
Communication Function on page 351.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–9 -
COM
01
Integrated RS-485
communication
inverter ID
Int485 St ID - 1 1–250 -
02
Integrated
communication
protocol
Int485 Proto
0 ModBus RTU
1 ModBus 0–2 -
ASCII
2 LS Inv 485
04 Integrated
communication speed
Int485
BaudR 3 9600 bps 1200–38400 bps
04
Integrated
communication frame
configuration
Int485 Mode
0 D8/PN/S1
0–3 -
1 D8/PN/S2
2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
Basic Functions
153
Basic
Functions
7.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input
If you set a frequency reference via the analog input at the control terminal block, you can hold
the operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the analog
frequency hold terminal. The operation frequency will be linked to the analog input signal.
Group Code Name LCD Display SParameter
etting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src
0 Keypad-1
0–9 -
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 Encoder
8 Field Bus
9 PLC
7.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)
You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting DRV-
21 (Speed unit selection) to “0 (Hz Display)” or “1 (Rpm Display)”.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 21 Speed unit
selection Hz/Rpm Sel
0 Hz Display
0–1 -
1 Rpm Display
7.4 Setting Multi-Step Frequency
Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies) to the
Px terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set at DRV-07. Px terminal parameter
values 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), 9 (Speed-H), and 10 (Speed-X) are recognized as binary
commands and work in combination with Fx or Rx run commands. The inverter operates
according to the frequencies set at BAS-50–64 (multi-step frequency 1–15) and the binary
command combinations.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
Multi-step Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
BAS Group 50–64 Configure multi-step frequency 1–15.
IN-65–75 Px
Define
Choose the terminals to set up as multi-step inputs, and then set the relevant
codes (IN-65–75) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), 9 (Speed-H), or 10 (Speed-X).
Provided that terminals P6, P7, and P8 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-M and
Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be available.
Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block inputs
after receiving an input signal.
After IN-89 is set to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P6, the inverter
will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before proceeding to
accelerate or decelerate based on the configuration at P6.
Basic Functions
157
Basic
Functions
7.5 Command Source Configuration
Various devices can be selected as command input devices for the iS7 inverter. Input devices
available include the keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485 communication, and field
bus adapter.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command Source Cmd Source
0 Keypad
0–5 -
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
5 PLC
7.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device
Set DRV-06 to “0 (Keypad)” to select the keypad as the command source.
Since the keypad is now the command source, forward or reverse operation starts when the
[FWD] or [REV] key is pressed, and it stops when the [STOP/RESET] key is pressed.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 0 KeyPad 0–5 -
Basic Functions
158
7.5.2 The Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run
commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by
setting DRV-06 (command source) to “1 (Fx/Rx-1)”. Select two terminals for the forward and
reverse operations, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 11 multi-function terminal codes,
IN-65–75 for P1–P8 [optional: P9–P11]) to “1 (Fx)” and “2 (Rx)” respectively. This application
enables both terminals to be turned on or off at the same time, constituting a stop command
that will cause the inverter to stop operating.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Uni
t
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
IN
65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define(Px:
P1– P8 [optional:
P9–P11])
1 Fx
0–51 -
2 Rx
88 Delay time setting Run On Delay - 1.00 0.00–100.00 Sec
Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-06 Cmd Source Set to “1 (Fx/Rx-1)”.
IN-65–75 Px Define Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
IN-88 Run On Delay
Set the delay time if the inverter operation needs to be synchronized with
other sequences. When the run command input (Fx/Rx) is given, the
operation begins after the set time has elapsed.
Basic Functions
159
Basic
Functions
Basic Functions
160
7.5.3 The Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and
Rotation Direction Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by
setting DRV-06 (command source) to “2 (Fx/Rx-2)”. Select two terminals for run and rotation
direction commands, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 11 multi-function terminal codes,
IN-65–75 for P1–P11 [optional: P9–P11]) to “1 (Fx)” and “2 (Rx)” respectively. This application
uses an Fx input as a run command, and an Rx input to change a motor’s rotation direction (On:
Rx, Off: Fx).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–5 -
IN
65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define (Px:
P1–P8
[optional: P9–
P11])
1 Fx
- -
2 Rx
88 Delay time setting Run On Delay - 1.00 0.00–100.00 Sec
Run Command and Fwd/Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal –
Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-06 Cmd Source Set to “2 (Fx/Rx-2)”.
IN-65–75 Px Define Assign a terminal for the run command (Fx).
Assign a terminal for changing the rotation direction (Rx).
IN-88 Run On Delay
Set the delay time if the inverter operation needs to be synchronized
with other sequences. When the run command input (Fx/Rx) is given,
the operation begins after the set time has elapsed.
Basic Functions
161
Basic
Functions
7.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device
Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by setting DRV-06
(command source) in the Drive group to “3 (Int 485)”. This configuration uses upper level
controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, to control the inverter by transmitting and receiving signals via
the S+, S-, and RS-485 signal input terminals at the terminal block. For more details, refer to 11
Communication Function on page 351.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
COM
04
Integrated
communication
inverter ID
Int485 St ID 1 1–250 -
05
Integrated
communication
protocol
Int485 Proto 0 ModBus
RTU - -
06
Integrated
communication
speed
Int485 BaudR 3 9600 bps 1200–38400 bps
07
Integrated
communication
frame setup
Int485 Mode 0 D8 / PN / S1 - -
7.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching
Local/remote mode switching is useful for checking the inverter's operation, or to perform an
inspection while retaining all parameter values. Also, in an emergency, it can also be used to
override controls and operate the system manually using the keypad.
The [MULTI] key is a programmable key that can be configured to carry out multiple functions.
Use local/remote operation mode switching only when it is necessary. Improper mode switching
may interrupt the inverter’s operation.
Basic Functions
162
Group
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 42 [MULTI] key
functions
Set CNF-42 to “2(Local/Remote)” to perform local/remote mode switching
using the [MULTI] key.
Once the parameter is set, “R” (remote) is displayed on the keypad, and the
inverter will automatically begin operating in remote mode. Changing from
local to remote operation will not alter any previously configured parameter
values and the operation of the inverter will not change.
Press the [MULTI] key to switch the operation mode to “local.”
“L” (local) is displayed on the keypad, and the command source and frequency
source indication on the keypad (in MON mode) changes to “K/K.”
The inverter stops operating if it was previously running in remote mode, and
you can operate the inverter using the keypad.
Press the [MULTI] key again to switch the operation mode back to “remote.”
“R” (remote) is displayed again on the keypad, and the command source and
frequency source indication on the keypad (in MON mode) changes according
to the previous parameter settings.
The inverter is now ready to operate in remote mode, and the inverter
operation may vary depending on the type of input source.
Note
Local/Remote Operation
• Full control of the inverter is available with the keypad during local operation.
• During local operation, jog commands will only work if one of the multi-function terminals (Px:
P1–P11, codes IN-65–75) is set to “13 (RUN Enable)” and the relevant terminal is turned on.
• During remote operation, the inverter will operate according to the previously set frequency
reference source and the command received from the input device.
• If ADV-10 (power-on run) is set to “0 (No)”, the inverter will not operate on power-on even when
the following terminals are turned on:
Basic Functions
163
Basic
Functions
- Fwd/Rev run (Fx/Rx) terminal
- Fwd/Rev jog terminal (Fwd jog/Rev Jog)
- Pre-excitation terminal
To operate the inverter manually with the keypad, switch to local mode. Use caution when
switching back to remote operation mode as the inverter will stop operating. If ADV-10 (power-
on run) is set to “0 (No)”, a command through the input terminals will work only after all the
terminals listed above have been turned off and then turned on again.
• If the inverter has been reset to clear a fault trip during an operation, the inverter will switch to
local operation mode at power-on, and full control of the inverter will be with the keypad. The
inverter will stop operating when operation mode is switched from “local” to “remote”. In this
case, a run command through an input terminal will work only after all the input terminals have
been turned off.
Inverter Operation During Local/Remote Switching
Switching operation mode from “remote” to “local” while the inverter is running will cause the
inverter to stop operating. Switching operation mode from “local” to “remote”, however, will cause
the inverter to operate based on the command source:
• Analog commands via terminal input: The inverter will continue to run without interruption
based on the command at the terminal block. If a reverse operation (Rx) signal is ON at the
terminal block at startup, the inverter will operate in the reverse direction even if it was running
in the forward direction in local operation mode before the reset.
• Digital source commands: All command sources, except terminal block command sources
(which are analog sources), are digital command sources that include the keypad, LCD keypad,
and communication sources. The inverter stops operating when switching to remote operation
mode, and then starts operating when the next command is given.
7.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention
The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors from running in a
forward or reverse direction. When reverse direction prevention is configured, pressing the
[REV] key on the keypad will cause the motor to decelerate to 0 Hz and stop.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 09 Run prevention
options Run Prevent
0 None
1 0–2 -
Forward
Prev
2 Reverse
Prev
Basic Functions
164
Basic Functions
165
Basic
Functions
Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details
Code Description
ADV-09 Run
Prevent
Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting Description
0 None Do not set run prevention.
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.
7.8 Power-on Run
The Power-on Run feature can be set up to start an inverter operation after powering up based
on the run commands by terminal inputs (if they are configured).
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
To enable Power-on Run, set DRV-06 (command source) to “1 (Fx/Rx-1)” or “2 (Fx/Rx-2)” and
ADV-10 to “1”. If a run command via a terminal input is on, the inverter starts operating
according to the terminal input settings as soon as it is turned on.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1, 2 Fx/Rx-1 or
Fx/Rx-2 0–5 -
ADV 10 Power-on run Power-on Run 1 Yes 0–1 -
Basic Functions
166
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring when a load, such as a fan, is free-running on a
Power-on Run, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 4 to “1”. The inverter will perform a speed
search at the beginning of the operation. If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will
start its operation in a normal V/F pattern and accelerate the motor.
• If the inverter has been turned on without Power-on Run enabled, the terminal block command
must be first turned off, and then turned on again to begin the inverter’s operation.
7.9 Reset and Restart
The reset and restart operations can be set up for inverter operation following a fault trip,
based on the terminal block operation command (if it is configured).
• Use caution when operating the inverter with reset and restart enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
• Stop the frequency reference signal if you do not want the inverter to run again after a
reset.
Set PRT-08 (RST Restart) to “1 (yes)” to allow the inverter to start operating after it is reset if a
fault trip occurs. PRT-10 (Retry Delay) sets the delay time for a restart (the time the inverter will
wait before it restarts).
The number of auto-restarts (PRT-09) refers to the number of times the inverter will try
restarting its operation. If fault trips occur again after a restart, the retry number counts down
each time the inverter restarts until the number becomes “0”. Once the inverter restarts
successfully after the initial fault trip, the inverter does not restart until the next fault trip occurs.
The number of auto-restarts set at PRT-09 that decreased after a restart reverts to the original
setting value if successful operation continues for a certain period of time.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source
1 Fx/Rx-1
1–2 -
2 Fx/Rx-2
PRT
08 Reset restart
setup RST Restart 1 Yes
No(0)
[default] /
Yes(1)
-
09 No. of auto restart Retry Number 1 0–10 -
Basic Functions
167
Basic
Functions
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
10 Auto restart delay
time Retry Delay 1.0 0–60.0 sec
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set the CON-71 (Speed search options) bit 2 to “1”.
The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation. If the speed search
is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F pattern and accelerate the
motor.
• If the inverter has been turned on without “reset and restart” enabled, the terminal block
command must first be turned off and then turned on again to begin inverter operation.
7.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
7.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency
Regardless of the operating frequency, acc/dec time values can be set based on the maximum
frequency. To set acc/dec time values based on the maximum frequency, set BAS-08 (Acc/Dec
reference) to “0 (Max Freq)”.
The acceleration time set at DRV-03 (Acceleration time) refers to the time required for the
inverter to reach the maximum frequency from a stopped state (0 Hz). Likewise, the value set at
DRV-04 (Deceleration time) refers to the time required to return to a stopped state (0 Hz) from
the maximum frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
03 tAcceleration
ime Acc Time
75 kW and less 20.0
0.0–600.0 sec
90 kW and up 60.0
04 Deceleration
time Dec Time
75 kW and less 30.0
0.0–600.0 sec
90 kW and up 90.0
20 Maximum Max Freq 60.00 0.00–400.00 Hz
Basic Functions
168
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
frequency
BAS 08
Acc/Dec
reference Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq
Max Freq/Delta
Freq -
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1 0–2 (0.01/0.1/1) sec
Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-08 Ramp T
Mode
Set BAS-08 to “0 (Max Freq)” to setup acc/dec time based on maximum
frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the acc/dec time based on the maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the acc/dec time based on the operating frequency.
If, for example, the maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the acc/dec times are set
to 5 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz (half of
60 Hz). Therefore, the time required to reach 30 Hz is 2.5 seconds (half of 5
seconds).
BAS-09 Time scale
Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when
more accurate acc/dec times are required, due to load characteristics, or
when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
Configuration Description
0 0.01 sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1 sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1 sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set to 6000 seconds, a time scale change from 1
second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.
Basic Functions
169
Basic
Functions
7.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency
Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next frequency from the
existing operation frequency. To set the acc/dec time values based on the existing operation
frequency, set BAS-08 (Acc/Dec reference) to “1 (Delta Freq)”.
Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Setting Range Uni
t
DRV
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference Ramp T Mode 1 Delta
Freq Max Freq/Delta Freq -
Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency– Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-08 Ramp T
Mode
Set BAS-08 to “1 (Delta Freq)” to set acc/dec times based on operation
frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the acc/dec time based on the maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the acc/dec time based on the operating frequency.
If the acc/dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references
are used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration
stage will take 5 seconds (refer to the graph below).
Basic Functions
170
7.10.3 Multi-Step Acc/Dec Time Configuration
The acc/dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC
(acceleration time) and DEC (deceleration time) codes in the DRV group.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-step
deceleration time1–3 Dec Time–x x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
IN
65–
75
Px terminal
configuration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
P9–P11])
11 XCEL-L
12 XCEL-M - -
49 XCEL-H
89 Multi-step command
delay time
In Check
Time 1 1–5000 ms
Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-70, 72, 74
Acc Time 1–3 Set multi-step acceleration time 1–3.
BAS-71, 73, 75
Dec Time 1–3 Set multi-step deceleration time 1–3.
IN-65–75
Px Define (P1–P8
[optional P9–P11])
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step acc/dec time
inputs.
Configuration Description
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
49 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Basic Functions
171
Basic
Functions
Code Description
acc/dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will control the
acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values set at BAS-70–75
If, for example, the P7 and P8 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL-M
respectively, the following operation will be available.
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If IN-89
is set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the inverter
searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the time expires, the
acc/dec time will be set based on the input received at P6.
7.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency
By configuring the switch frequency, you can switch between two different sets of acc/dec
times (acc/dec gradients) without configuring the multi-function terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
BAS 70 Multi-step Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Basic Functions
172
Group Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
acceleration time1
71 dMulti-step
eceleration time1 Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
ADV 60 Acc/dec time
switch frequency Xcel Change Fr 30.00
0–Maximum
frequency Hz/RPM
Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
ADV-60
Xcel Change Fr
After the acc/dec switch frequency has been set, the acc/dec gradients
configured at BAS-70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation
frequency is at or below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency
exceeds the switch frequency, the gradient level configured for the
acceleration and deceleration times (set at DRV-03 and DRV-04) will be used.
If you configure the P1–P8 [optional: P9–P11]) multi-function input terminals
for multi-step acc/dec gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will
operate based on the acc/dec inputs at the terminals regardless of the
acc/dec switch frequency configurations.
Basic Functions
173
Basic
Functions
7.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration
The acc/dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth out the
inverter’s acceleration and deceleration curves. A linear pattern features a linear increase or
decrease to the output frequency, at a fixed rate. An S-curve pattern offers a smoother and
more gradual increase or decrease of output frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator
doors, etc. The S-curve gradient level can be adjusted using codes ADV-03–06 in the advanced
group.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 08 Acc/dec reference mRamp T
ode 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
ADV
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern
0 Linear
0–1 -
1 S-curve
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern
0 Linear
0–1 -
1 S-curve
03 S-curve acc start
gradient Acc S Start 40 1–100 %
04 S-curve acc end
gradient Acc S End 40 1–100 %
05 S-curve dec start
gradient Dec S Start 40 1–100 %
06 S-curve dec end
gradient Dec S End 40 1–100 %
Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
ADV-03 Acc S Start
Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve, acc/dec
pattern. ADV-03 defines the S-curve gradient level as a percentage up to half
of the total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
ADV-03 is set to 50%, ADV-03 configures the acceleration up to 30 Hz (half of
60 Hz). The inverter will perform S-curve acceleration in the 0-15 Hz
frequency range (50% of 30 Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the
remaining acceleration within the 15–30 Hz frequency range.
ADV-04 Acc S End Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve acc/dec
Basic Functions
174
Code Description
tphaettteortna.l AaDccVe-l0e3r adteiofnin.es S-curve gradient level as a percentage, above half of
If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
ADV-04 is set to 50%, setting ADV-04 configures acceleration to increase
from 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz) to 60 Hz (end of acceleration). Linear acceleration
will be applied within the 30-45 Hz frequency range. The inverter will
perform an S-curve acceleration for the remaining acceleration in the 45–60
Hz frequency range.
ADV-05 Dec S Start
–
ADV-06 Dec S End
Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes ADV-05 and
ADV-06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes ADV-03 and
ADV-04.
Note
The actual acc/dec time during an S-curve application
The actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
The actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Note that actual acc/dec times become greater than the user-defined acc/dec times when S-curve
acc/dec patterns are in use.
Basic Functions
176
7.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation
Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate
the inverter at a fixed frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
7.13 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control
Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels, and output patterns to achieve a
target output frequency with the V/F control. The amount of torque boost used during low
frequency operations can also be adjusted.
7.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation
A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a fixed
rate for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. A linear V/F pattern is
particularly useful when a constant torque load is applied.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F - -
18 Base frequency Base Freq 60.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear - -
Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-18 Base Freq
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency
when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this
parameter value.
DRV-19 Start Freq
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the inverter
starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce an output voltage while
the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, the
output voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full stop (0
Hz).
Basic Functions
178
7.13.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation
Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides non-linear
acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the entire frequency
range.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern
Sets the parameter value to “1 (Square)” or “2 (Square2)” depending on the
load’s start characteristics.
Setting Function
1 Square The inverter produces an output voltage proportionate to
1.5 square of the operation frequency.
3 Square2
The inverter produces an output voltage proportionate to
2 square of the operation frequency. This setup is ideal for
variable torque loads, such as fans or pumps.
Basic Functions
179
Basic
Functions
7.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation
The iS7 inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of a specific motor.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0–2 -
41 User frequency 1 User Freq 1 15.00 0–Maximum
frequency Hz
42 User voltage 1 User Volt 1 25 0–100% %
43 User frequency 2 User Freq 2 30.00 0–Maximum
frequency Hz
44 User voltage 2 User Volt 2 50 0–100% %
45 User frequency 3 User Freq 3 45.00 f0–Maximum
requency Hz
46 User voltage 3 User Volt 3 75 0–100% %
47 User frequency 4 User Freq 4 60 0–Maximum
frequency Hz
48 User voltage 4 User Volt 4 100 0–100% %
User V/F pattern Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-41 User Freq 1
–BAS-48 User Volt
4
Sets the parameter values to assign user-defined frequencies (User Freq x)
for the start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to
correspond with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt x).
Basic Functions
180
The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15
(motor rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to “0,” it will be based on the input voltage.
• When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to change the output pattern
from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient motor torque or motor
overheating due to over-excitation.
• When a user V/F pattern is in use, the forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque boost
(DRV-17) will not operate.
Basic Functions
181
Basic
Functions
7.14 Torque Boost
7.14.1 Manual Torque Boost
Manual torque boost enables users to adjust the output voltage during low-speed operation or
motor start. You can increase the low-speed torque or improve motor-starting properties by
manually increasing the output voltage. Configure the manual torque boost while running
loads that require a high starting torque, such as lift-type loads.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
15 Torque boost options Torque
Boost 0 Manual 0–1 -
16 Forward torque boost Fwd Boost* 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
17 Reverse torque boost Rev Boost* 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
* For 90 kW–160 kW model types, the default setting value is 1.0 [%].
Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-16 Fwd Boost Sets the torque boost for forward operation.
DRV-17 Rev Boost Sets the torque boost for reverse operation.
Output Voltage = Output voltage affected by DRV-16,17 Manual torque boost parameter
= V/F voltage + Boosted voltage
= (??????? ??????? – ??????? ???????) × ??????? ?????????
???? ?????????
+ ??????? ???????
Basic Functions
182
Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating.
7.14.2 Auto Torque Boost
Set DRV-15 to “1 (Auto)” to enable auto torque boost. While manual torque boost adjusts the
inverter output based on the setting values, regardless of the type of load used during the
operation, auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of
output voltage required for the torque boost based on the entered motor parameters.
Because auto torque boost requires motor-related parameters, such as stator resistance,
inductance, and no-load current, auto tuning (BAS-20) has to be performed before the auto
torque boost can be configured. Similarly to manual torque boost, configure auto torque boost
while running a load that requires high starting torque, such as lift-type loads. Refer to 8.9 Auto
Tuning on page 227.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 15 Torque boost mode Torque Boost 1 Auto 0–2 -
BAS 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 2 Rs+Lsigma 0–3 -
7.14.3 Advanced Auto Torque Boost
Manual Torque Boost, regardless of load characteristics, outputs the inverter voltage according
to the torque boost amount set by the user. Auto Torque Boost automatically calculates the
boost amount, but auto tuning the motor is required. For Advanced Auto Torque Boost, the
inverter outputs the inverter voltage by adjusting the boost amount according to the load itself
without auto tuning the motor.
Advanced Automatic Torque Boost is adjusted according to the load determined by the Adv
ATB M Gain, Adv ATB G Gain of DRV-27 and 28 values and it can be used when starting torque
is insufficient or when excessive current flows..
Group eCod Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 15 Torque boost
mode Torque Boost 2 Advanced Auto 0–2 -
Basic Functions
183
Basic
Functions
Group Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
16 Fwd Boost Note1) Fwd Boost 2.0 0-15 %
17 Rev Boost Note2) Rev Boost 2.0 0-15 %
26 Adv ATB Filter Adv ATB Filter 100 1-1000 msec
27 Adv ATB M Gain Adv ATB M Gain 50.0 0-300.0 %
28 Adv ATB G Gain Adv ATB G Gain 50.0 0-300.0 %
* Note 1, Note 2) For 90 kW – 160 kW products, the factory shipment value is 1.0 [%].
Advanced Auto Torque Boost Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-16 Fwd Boost Adjusts the torque boost amount for forward rotation
DRV-17 Rev Boost Adjusts the torque boost amount for reverse rotation.
DRV-26 Adv ATB Filter Filter gain for calculating the Auto Torque Boost value.
DRV-27 Adv ATB M Gain Gain for calculating the reverse Auto Torque Boost value.
DRV-28 Adv ATB G Gain Gain for calculating the regeneration Auto Torque Boost value.
If there is no load, the additional voltage amount due to Auto Torque Boost is 0, which gives
the same result as the normal manual boost.
When the load is applied, the amount of compensation voltage varies depending on the
operation and reverse directions.
If you set the DRV-16 and DRV-17 values differently when using Advanced Auto Torque Boost
at no load, a current hunting operation may occur.
Output voltage = Primary output voltage + Secondary output voltage
Primary output voltage
= Output voltage affected by DRV-16,17 Manual torque boost parameter
= (??????? ??????? – ??????? ???????) × ??????? ?????????
???? ?????????
+ ??????? ???????
Secondary output voltage
= Output voltage affected by DRV-27,28 ATB M/G Gain parameter and motor load
If the torque boost amount is set too large, overheating of the motor due to over-excitation will
occur.
7.15 Output Voltage Setting
Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input
voltage to the inverter. Set BAS-15 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set
voltage becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter
operates above the base frequency, and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the
input voltage at the inverter, the inverter adjusts the voltage and supplies the motor with the
voltage set at BAS-15 (motor-rated voltage). If the motor’s rated voltage is higher than the input
voltage at the inverter, the inverter will supply the inverter input voltage to the motor.
If BAS-15 (motor-rated voltage) is set to “0,” the inverter corrects the output voltage based on
the input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base frequency
andwhen the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will be the
inverter output voltage.
Basic Functions
185
Basic
Functions
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 220 0, 180–480 V
7.16 Start Mode Setting
Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in the
stopped condition.
7.16.1 Acceleration Start
Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the
motor accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc - -
7.16.2 Start After DC Braking
This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking before an
inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to inertia, DC braking
will stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a stop. DC braking can also be used
with a mechanical brake connected to a motor shaft when a constant torque load is applied, if
a constant torque is required after the mechanical brake is released.
Basic Functions
186
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
time DC-Start Time 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
13 DC Injection Level DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %
The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC braking
resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the inverter. If the DC
braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be damaged.
7.17 Stop Mode Setting
Select Stop mode to stop the inverter operation.
7.17.1 Deceleration Stop
Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
decelerates to 0 Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec - -
Basic Functions
187
Basic
Functions
7.17.2 Stop after DC Braking
When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking
frequency) the inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a stop
command input, the inverter begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency reaches the
DC braking frequency set at ADV-17, the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor and stops it.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
14 Output block time
before braking DC-Block Time 0.10 0.00–60.00 sec
15 DC braking time DC-Brake Time 1.00 0–60 sec
16 DC braking amount DC-Brake Level 50 0–200 %
17 DC braking frequency DC-Brake Freq 5.00 0.00–60.00 Hz
Note
DC braking does not produce stop torque. Install appropriate peripheral devices if stop torque is
required in your application.
DC Braking After Stop Setting Details
Code Description
ADV-14 DC-Block
Time
Sets the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia of the
load is great, or if the DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is set too high, a fault trip
may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter supplies DC voltage
Basic Functions
188
Code Description
btoe ftohreemDoCt obrr.aPkrinegve. nt overcurrent fault trips by adjusting the output block time
ADV-15 DC-
Brake Time Sets the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
ADV-16 DC-
Brake Level
Sets the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based on the
rated current of the motor.
ADV-17 DC-
Brake Freq
Sets the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached, the
inverter starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than the DC
braking frequency, the dwell operation will not work and DC braking will start
instead.
• The motor can overheat or be damaged if an excessive amount of DC braking is applied to the
motor or if the DC braking time is set to a high value.
• DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
7.17.3 Free Run Stop
When the operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops due to
residual inertia.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Basic Functions
189
Basic
Functions
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -
When there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high speed, the load’s
inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even after the inverter output is blocked.
7.17.4 Power Braking
When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor-regenerated energy,
a control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level or reaccelerate the motor in
order to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short deceleration
times are needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is needed without
causing an over voltage fault trip.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Power Braking - -
• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to loads that
require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking takes
priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit 3 of PRT-50 (stall prevention and
flux braking) and ADV-08 (braking options) are set, power braking will take precedence.
• Note that if the deceleration time is too short or the inertia of the load is too great, an
Basic Functions
190
overvoltage fault trip may occur.
• Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time may be longer than the preset
deceleration time.
7.18 Frequency Limit
The operation frequency can be limited by setting a maximum frequency, start frequency,
upper limit frequency, and lower limit frequency.
7.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start
Frequency
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
20 Maximum frequency Max Freq 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-19 Start Freq
Sets the lower limit value for all speed unit parameters that are expressed in
Hz or rpm. Any operation frequency input that is lower than the start
frequency is treated as a 0 Hz input.
DRV-20 Max Freq
Sets an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are expressed
in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (DRV-18). An operation frequency
cannot be set higher than the maximum frequency.
7.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency
Values
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Uni
t
ADV 24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 --- No ---- No/Yes -
Basic Functions
191
Basic
Functions
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Uni
t
25 Frequency lower
limit value Freq Limit Lo 0.50
0.0–maximum
frequency Hz
26 Frequency upper
limit value Freq Limit Hi 60.00
0.5–maximum
frequency Hz
34 Jog Freqency Lim it Jog Freq Limit 1 --- Yes ---- No/Yes -
Basic Functions
192
Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
C ode Description
ADV-24 Freq Limit
The initial setting is “0 (No).” Changing the setting to “1 (Yes)” allows you to
set the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and the upper limit frequency (ADV-
26). When the setting is “0 (No)”, codes ADV-25 and ADV-26 are not visible.
ADV-25 Freq Limit Lo
ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi
Sets upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are
restricted to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using
the keypad.
ADV-34 Jog Freq Limit
This code allows you to select whether to use the frequency limit function
with frequency upper/lower limits for jog operations.
When ADV-34 is set to “Yes”, the frequency limit is applied if the frequency
limit function using the frequency upper/lower limits is set the same as a
normal operation for jog operations.
When ADV-34 is set to “No”, the frequency limit value is not applied even if
the frequency limit function using the frequency upper/lower limits is set
for jog operations. However, the frequency limit for the maximum
frequency and the start frequency applies.
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to “Yes,” the frequency set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) is the
minimum frequency (Low Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to “No,” the frequency set at DRV-19
(Start Freq) becomes the minimum frequency.
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to “Yes,” the frequency set at ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi) is the
maximum frequency (High Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to “No,” the frequency set at DRV-
Basic Functions
193
Basic
Functions
20 (Max Freq) becomes the maximum frequency.
7.18.3 Frequency Jump
Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. The inverter will avoid specific
frequency ranges during acceleration and deceleration. Operation frequencies cannot be set
within the preset frequency jump band.
When the operation frequency is increased while the frequency parameter setting value
(voltage, current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency band,
the frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band. Then, the
frequency will increase when the frequency parameter setting exceeds the range of
frequencies used by the frequency jump band.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
27 Frequency jump Jump Freq 0 --- No ---- No/Yes -
28 Jump frequency
lower limit1 Jump Lo 1 10.00
0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 1 Hz
29 Jump frequency
upper limit1 Jump Hi 1 15.00
Jump frequency lower
limit 1–Maximum
frequency
Hz
30 Jump frequency
lower limit 2 Jump Lo 2 20.00
0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 2 Hz
31 Jump frequency
upper limit 2 Jump Hi 2 25.00
Jump frequency lower
limit 2–Maximum
frequency
Hz
32 lJump frequency
ower limit 3 Jump Lo 3 30.00
0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 3 Hz
33 Jump frequency
upper limit 3 Jump Hi 3 35.00
Jump frequency lower
limit 3–Maximum
frequency
Hz
Basic Functions
194
7.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting
Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both the first
and second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation commands to the
multi-function input terminal. Mode switching can be used to stop remote control during an
operation using the communication option and to switch the operation mode to operate via
the local panel, or to operate the inverter from another remote control location.
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes IN-65–75 and set the parameter value to
“15 (2nd Source)”.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using the
values set at BAS-04–05 instead of the values set at DRV-06 and DRV-07.
The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating with
the 1st command source (Main Source).
BAS-06 Trq 2nd Src
If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using the
torque reference set at BAS-06 instead of the value set at DRV-08.
Codes DRV-08 and BAS-06 are visible only when DRV-09 (Control mode) is set
to “sensorless” or “vector” control mode, and DRV-10 (Torque control) is set
to “Yes.”
• When you set the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and input
the signal, the inverter’s operation state changes according to the operation frequency and the
operation command configured for the 2nd command. Before shifting the input to the multi-
function terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. An overvoltage fault trip may
occur if the deceleration time is too short or the inertia of the load is too high.
• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch
command modes.
Basic Functions
196
7.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control
Fi lter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured to
improve the response of the input terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
IN
85 Multi-function input
terminal On filter DI On Delay 0 0–10000 ms
86 Multi-function input
terminal Off filter DI Off Delay 0 0–10000 ms
87 Multi-function input
terminal selection DI NC/NO Sel 0000 0000* - -
90 Multi-function input
terminal status DI Status 0000 0000* - -
* From the last bit to the first, the bits are for multi-purpose inputs P1–P8 (the last bit is for input 1,
and the first bit is for input 8).
Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details
Code Description
IN-85 DI On Delay,
IN-86 DI Off Delay
When the terminal receives an On or Off input signal, it is recognized as an On
or Off signal after the set delay time has elapsed.
IN-87 DI NC/
NO Sel
Selects terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the dot
corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table below. With the
bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as an A
terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment on, it indicates that
the terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally Closed) contact.
Terminals are numbered P1–P8, from right to left.
Type B terminal status (Normally Closed) A terminal status (Normally Open)
Keypad
IN-90 DI Status
Displays the configuration of each contact. When a segment is configured as
an A terminal at DRV-87, the On condition is indicated by the top segment
turning on. The Off condition is indicated when the bottom segment is turned
on. When contacts are configured as B terminals, the segment dots behave
conversely. Terminals are numbered P1–P8, from right to left.
Type A terminal setting (On) A terminal setting (Off)
Keypad
Basic Functions
197
Basic
Functions
7.21 Expanded I/O Control with an Optional I/O
Expansion Module
You can install an I/O expansion module to add 3 digital input and 3 digital output (relay output)
multi-function terminals to the iS7 inverter. The following table lists the function codes to
control the expanded I/O functions.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
8 Learning Advanced Features
This chapter describes the advanced features of the iS7 inverter.
8.1 Operating with Auxiliary References
Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the main
and auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency reference is used as
the operating frequency, while auxiliary references are used to modify and fine-tune the main
reference.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Frequency reference
source Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 0–9 -
BAS
01 Auxiliary frequency
reference source Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–5 -
02 Auxiliary frequency
reference calculation type
Aux Calc
Type 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
03 Auxiliary frequency
reference gain
Aux Ref
Gain - 0.00 -200.0–200.0 %
IN 65–75 Px terminal configuration Px Define 36 dis Aux Ref 0–48 -
* Codes IN-01–16 must be set to the default values, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity), set to “1 (Bipolar)”.
The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary frequency
references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example where the DRV-
07 Frq Src code has been set to “0 (Keypad-1)”, and the inverter is operating at a main reference
frequency of 30.00 Hz. Signals at -10 to +10 V are received at terminal V1, with the reference
gain set at 5%. In this example, the resulting frequency reference is fine-tuned within the range
of 27.00–33.00 Hz* (+/- 5% of 60 Hz).
Auxiliary Reference Setting Details
Code Description
BAS-01 Aux Ref
Src
Sets the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
Configuration Description
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
199
Code Description
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled.
1 V1 Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of the auxiliary frequency reference.
2 I1 Sets the I1 (current) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of the auxiliary frequency reference.
3 V2 Sets the V2 (voltage) terminal at the optional I/O expansion
module as the source of the auxiliary frequency reference.
4 I2 Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the optional I/O expansion
module as the source of the auxiliary frequency reference.
5 Pulse Sets the pulse input terminal at the optional encoder
module as the source of the auxiliary frequency reference.
BAS-02
Aux Calc Type
Sets the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure the
auxiliary reference and set BAS-02 to decide the percentage to be reflected
when calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in
either plus (+) or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even
when unipolar analog inputs are used.*
Configuration Formula for frequency reference
0 M+(G*A) Main reference + (BAS-03 x BAS-01 x IN-01)
1 M*(G*A) Main reference x (BAS-03 x BAS-01)
2 M/(G*A) Main reference / (BAS-03 x BAS-01)
3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference + (Main reference x [BAS-03 x BAS-
01])
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference + BAS-03 x 2 x (BAS-01–50) x IN-01
5 M*{G*2*(A-
50)} Main reference x (BAS-03 x 2 x [BAS-01–50])
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference / (BAS-03 x 2 x [BAS-01–50])
7 M+M*G*2*
(A-50)
Main reference + Main reference x BAS-03 x 2 x
(BAS-01–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may
occur due to analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
BAS-03 Aux Ref
Gain
Adjusts the size of the input (BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) configured for the auxiliary
frequency.
IN-65–75 Px
Define
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to “40 (dis Aux Ref)” and turn it
on to disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate using
Learning Advanced Features
200
Code Description
the main frequency reference only.
The auxiliary command frequency is turned off when the terminal input (Px) set to “40 (dis Aux
Ref)” is on.
Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #1
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency, and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency (DRV-07): Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): V1 [Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
• IN-01–32: Factory default
Example: An input voltage of 6 V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10 V is 60
Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36 Hz [=60 Hz X (6 V/10 V)] or 60% [= 100%
X (6 V/10 V)].
Setting * Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36 Hz(A))=48 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=36 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3 Hz
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300 Hz
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)=33 Hz
* M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: Auxiliary frequency
reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
** If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
201
Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #2
The Keypad Frequency Setting is the Main Frequency, and I2 Analog Voltage is the Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency (DRV-07): Keypad (Operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (BAS-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): I1 [Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
• IN-01–32: Factory default
Example: An input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I1, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24 Hz [=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}] or 40% [=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}].
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3 Hz (Reverse )
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300 Hz (Reverse )
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-
50[%])
30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)=27 Hz
* M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: Auxiliary frequency
reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
** If the frequency setting is chan ged to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
Learning Advanced Features
202
Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #3
V1 is the Main Frequency, and I1 is the Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency (DRV-07): V1 (frequency command setting to 5 V and is set to 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency (BAS-01): I1 [Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain (BAS-03): 50%
• IN-01–32: Factory default
Example: An input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I1, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24 Hz [=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])}] or 40% [=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}].
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3 Hz (Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300 Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)=27 Hz
* M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: Auxiliary frequency
reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may occur due to analog
input variation and deviations in the calculations.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
203
8.2 Jog Operation
The jog operation allows for temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog operation
command using the multi-function terminals.
The jog operation is the second-highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog
operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation modes,
the jog operation overrides all other operation modes.
8.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog via Multi-function Terminal
The jog operation is available using the multi-function terminal input. To start a forward jog
operation, an Fx operation command must be entered. The table below lists parameter
settings for a forward jog operation using the multi-function terminal input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 0.5– Max Freq Hz
12 Jog operation
acceleration time JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
13 dJog operation
eceleration time JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define(Px:
P1–P8 [optional:
P9–P11])
6 JOG - -
Forward Jog Details
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px Define
Select an input terminal from IN-65–75 (P1–P8 [optional: P9-P11]) and set
it to “6 (Jog)”.
[Terminal settings for jog operation using the P5 terminal]
DRV-11 JOG Frequency Sets the operation frequency.
Learning Advanced Features
204
Code Description
DRV-12 JOG Acc Time Sets the acceleration speed for a jog operation.
DRV-13 JOG Dec Time Sets the deceleration speed for a jog operation.
If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an Fx operation command is on, the operation
frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.
8.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog via Multi-function
Terminal
For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start an operation, but while
using jog operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also starts an operation.
The priorities for the frequency, acc/dec time and terminal block input during operation in
relation to other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical to jog operation 1.
If a different operation command is entered during a jog operation, it is ignored and the
operation maintains the jog frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 0.5–Max Freq Hz
12 Jog operation
acceleration time JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
13 Operation
deceleration time JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
IN 65–75 cPx terminal
onfiguration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional: P9–P11])
46 FWD JOG
- -
47 REV JOG
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
205
8.2.3 Jog Operation via Keypad Input
The jog operation is available using the keypad input as well.
The priorities for the frequency, acc/dec time, and terminal block input during an operation in
relation to other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical to jog operations
using the terminal input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 0.5–Max Freq Hz
12 Jog operation
acceleration time JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
13 Operation
deceleration time JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
The table below lists parameter settings for a forward jog operation using the keypad input.
MODE Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF - 42 Multi-Key Sel 1 JOG Key - -
PAR DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 Keypad 0–5 sec
After setting CNF-42 to “1 (JOG Key)” and DRV-06 (in PAR mode) to “0 (Keypad)”, you can start
the jog operation using the keypad by pressing the [MULTI] key on the keypad.
Learning Advanced Features
206
When you press the [MULTI] key, “J” is displayed on the keypad indicating that a j og operation
via the keypad is available. Press and hold the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform forward or reverse
jog operations. Jog operations stop when you lift your finger from the [FWD] or [REV] key on
the keypad.
8.3 Up/down Operation
The acc/dec time can be controlled via the input at the multi-function terminal block. The up-
down operation can be applied easily to a system that uses the upper-lower limit switch signals
(such as those of a flow meter) for acc/dec commands.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
65
Up/down
operation
frequency save
U/D Save Mode 1 Yes 0–1 -
85 Up/down mode Sel U/D Mode Sel 0 U/D Normal
0:U/D Normal
1:U/D Step
2:U/D
Step+Norm
-
86 Up/down Step
freqency U/D Step Freq - 0
0-maximum
frequency Hz
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
17 Up
18 Down 0–51 -
19 U/D Save
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
207
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
P9–P11]) 20 U/D Clear
Learning Advanced Features
208
Up/down Operation Setting Details
C ode Description
IN-65–75 Px Define
Select two terminals for up/down operation and set them to “19 (Up)” and
“20 (Down)”, respectively. With the operation command input, acceleration
begins when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration stops and constant
speed operation begins when the signal is off.
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is on.
Deceleration stops and a constant speed operation begins when both the
Up and Down signals are entered at the same time.
ADV-65 U/D Save
Mode
During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved
automatically under the following conditions: The operation command (Fx
or Rx) is off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.
You can also save the up/down operation frequency while the inverter is
operated at a constant speed by setting one of the multi-function terminals
(IN-65–75) to “19 (U/D Save)”, or by setting ADV-65 to “1 (Yes)”.
If the up/down frequency saving function is enabled for the terminal and
keypad inputs, the operation frequency will be saved as described in the
following table:
Save by keypad input
(ADV-65) set to “1
(Yes)”
Save by keypad input
(IN-65–75) set to “19 (U/D
Save)”
U/D Save Result
X X X
O X O
X O O
O O O
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
209
Code Description
When the operation command is turned on again, or when the inverter
regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation from a fault
trip, it resumes operation at the saved frequency.
To delete the saved frequency, use the multi-function terminal block. Set
one of the multi-function terminals to “20 (U/D Clear)” and apply signals to it
during a constant speed operation. The saved frequency and the up/down
operation configuration will be deleted.
ADV-85 U/D Mode
Sel
Configuration Description
0 U/D Normal Targeted Frequency increase or decrease based
on Max/Min Frequency
1 U/D Step According to Edge input of up/down port,
Learning Advanced Features
210
Code Description
AFrDeVq-u8e6nsceyt twinilgl bdea tinec. rease or decrease as much as
2 U/D Step+Norm Frequency that will be set by Edge input.
1 : U/D STEP
Output
Frequency
Up
Down
FX
3sec
2 : U/D STEP+Norm
Output
Frequency
Up
Down
FX
3sec 3sec
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
211
8.4 3-Wire Operation
The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is released),
and is used when operating the inverter with a push button.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx - 1 0–5 -
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define(Px:
P1–P8 [optional:
P9–P11])
14 3-Wire 0–51 -
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum input
time (t) for 3-wire operation is 1 ms, and the operation stops when both the forward and
reverse operation commands are entered at the same time.
[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]
[3-wire operation]
Learning Advanced Features
212
8.5 Safe Operation Mode
When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in Safe mode, operation
commands can be entered in Safe mode only. Safe mode is used to safely control the inverter
through the multi-function terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
70 Safe operation
selection Run En Mode 1
DI
Dependent
Always Enable /
DI Dependent -
71 Safe operation
stop mode Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0–2 -
72
Safe operation
deceleration
time
Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define(Px: P1–P8
[optional: P9–P11]) 13 RUN Enable 0–51 -
Safe Operation Mode Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px Define From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in Safe mode
and set it to “13 (RUN Enable)”.
ADV-70 Run En
Mode
Setting Function
0 Always Enable Safe operation mode is deactivated.
1 DI Dependent Recognizes the operation command from a multi-
function input terminal.
ADV-71 Run Dis
Stop
Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal
configured for Safe mode is off.
When the Safe mode signal is given, the inverter decelerates according to the
settings at the Q-Stop time. The inverter decelerates and stops according to
the deceleration time (Dec Time) settings if the run command is off.
Setting Function
1 Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function
terminal is off.
2 Q-Stop
The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in Safe
mode. It stops after deceleration and then the
operation can resume only when the operation
command is entered again. The operation will not
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
213
Code Description
begin if only the multi-function terminal is on.
3 Q-Stop
Resume
The inverter decelerates to the deceleration time (Q-
Stop Time) in Safe operation mode. It stops after
deceleration. Then, if the multi-function terminal is
on, the operation resumes as soon as the operation
command is entered.
ADV-72 Q-Stop
Time
Set the deceleration time when ADV-71 (Run Dis Stop) is set to “1 (Q-Stop)” or
“2 (Q-Stop Resume)”.
8.6 Dwell Operation
When DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “0 (V/F mode)”, a dwell operation may be used to
maintain torque during inverter application, such as when enough torque is required before
releasing mechanical brakes on lift-type loads. A dwell operation is based on the acc/dec dwell
frequency and the dwell time set by the user. The following conditions also affect dwell
operations.
• Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command is given, acceleration
continues until the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within the
acceleration dwell operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has passed,
acceleration is carried out based on the set acceleration time and operation speed.
• Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is given, deceleration continues
until the deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed are reached within the
deceleration dwell operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time has passed,
deceleration is carried out based on the set deceleration time, and then the operation
stops.
Learning Advanced Features
214
Group
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
20 Dwell frequency
during acceleration Acc Dwell Freq 5.00
Start frequency
– Maximum
frequency
Hz
21 Operation time
during acceleration Acc Dwell Time 0.0 0.0–60.0 sec
22 Dwell frequency
during deceleration Dec Dwell Freq 5.00
Start frequency
– Maximum
frequency
Hz
23 Operation time
during deceleration Dec Dwell Time 0.0 0 .0– 60.0 sec
Note
Dwell operations are not performed when:
• The dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or the dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.
• Re-acceleration is attempted from a stop or during deceleration, since only the first acceleration
dwell operation command is valid.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
215
[Acceleration dwell operation]
• Although a deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are entered
and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work during a deceleration
operation by a simple frequency change (which is not deceleration due to a stop operation), or
during external brake control applications.
[Deceleration dwell operation]
8.7 Slip Compensation Operation
Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and motor
rotation speed. As the load increases, there can be variations between the setting frequency
and motor rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation of
these speed variations.*
*If DRV-09 is set to Sensorless, Vector, or V/F PG, the variation (slip) is automatically compensated.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV
09 Control mode Control Mode 2 Slip Compen 0–5 -
14 Motor Capacity Motor Capacity 2 0.75 kW
(0.75 kW based) 0.2–450 kW
BAS
11 Number of
motor poles Pole Number 4 2–48 -
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 90 (0.75 kW based) 0–3000 rpm
Learning Advanced Features
216
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
13 cRuartreednmtotor Rated Curr 3.6 (0.75 kW based) 1–10000 A
14 cMotor no-load
Slip Compensation Operation–Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-09 Control Mode Sets DRV-09 to “2 (Slip Compen)” to carry out the slip compensation
operation.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity Sets the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
BAS-11 Pole Number Enters the number of poles from the motor rating plate.
BAS-12 Rated Slip Enters the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
BAS-13 Rated Curr Enters the rated current from the motor rating plate.
BAS-14 Noload Curr
Enters the measured current when the load on the motor axis is
removed and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If the
no-load current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30-
50% of the rated motor current.
BAS-16 Efficiency Enters the efficiency from the motor rating place.
BAS-17 Inertia Rate
If inertia rate < 10 x motor inertia, set BAS-16 to “0”.
If inertia rate = 10 x motor inertia, set BAS-16 to “1”.
If inertia rate > 10 x motor inertia, set BAS-16 to “2–8”.
ADV-92 Slip Gain Mot-H
ADV-93 Slip Gain Gen-H
This is the slip compensation gain used in the region where the output
frequency is higher than the slip compensation gain switching frequency
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
217
Code Description
(ADV-98). You can set the gain values differently for the
reverse/regeneration operations.
ADV-94 Slip Gain Mot-L
ADV-95 Slip Gain Gen-L
This is the slip compensation gain used in the region where the output
frequency is lower than the slip compensation gain switching frequency
(ADV-98). You can set the gain values differently for the
reverse/regeneration operations.
ADV-96 Slip Filter sThe filter time constant used when calculating the current required for
lip compensation.
ADV-97 Slip Comp Freq
You can set the frequency at which slip compensation starts.
It is used when load compensation is not performed properly due to a
low load compensation amount when stopped.
At a constant speed, when it is above this frequency setting value, it
calculates the real time slip to compensate the load. If it is below, it
compensates the load by using the previously calculated slip. When
accelerating, the load is compensated by carrying out the sleep
operation regardless of this frequency value. When decelerated, the load
is compensated by using the previous calculated slip regardless of this
frequency.
When this value is set to 0, the slip operation is compensated in real time
at all frequencies regardless of acceleration/deceleration and constant
speed
ADV-98 Slip Gain Freq Input using the rated speed of the motor nameplate
Note
The following is a formula for calculating the rated slip:
?? = ?? × 120
? − ???
??= Rated slip frequency, ?? = Rated frequency
???= Number of rated motor rotations, ?= Number of motor poles
Ex.) If the rated frequency is 60 Hz, the rated revolution is 1740 rpm, and the pole number is 4:
?? = 60 × 120
4 − 1740 = 60???
Learning Advanced Features
218
8.8 PID Control
PI D control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) controls that provide more effective control for
automated systems. The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter operation
are as follows:
Purpose Function
Speed Control
Controls the speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the
equipment or machinery being controlled. This control maintains a
consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
Pressure Control
Controls the pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of
the equipment or machinery being controlled. This control
maintains a consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.
Flow Control
Controls the flow by monitoring the current amount of flow in the
equipment or machinery being controlled. This control maintains a
consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Temperature Control
Controls the temperature by monitoring the current temperature
levels of the equipment or machinery being controlled. This control
maintains a consistent temperature or operates at the target
temperature.
8.8.1 PID Basic Operation
PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated system
process control to maintain the speed, pressure, flow, temperature, or tension.
Group Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
frequency
39 PID wakeup level LPID WakeUp
ev - 35 0–100 %
40 PID wakeup mode
option
PID WakeUp
Mod 0 Below Level 0–2 -
41 PID Rev Run
Enable PID Rev Run En 0 No 0-1 -
42 PID unit option PID Unit Sel 0 Hz 0–12 -
43 PID gain unit PID Unit Gain - 100.0 0–300 %
44 PID scale unit PID Unit Scale 2 X 1 0–2 -
45 PID proportional
gain 2 PID P2-Gain - 100.0 0–1000 %
IN 65–
75
Px circuit function
setting
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
P9–P11])
22 I-Term Clear
23 PID 0–51 -
Openloop
24 P Gain2
Note
• Normal PID output (PID OUT) is bipolar and is limited by APP-29 (PID Limit Hi) and APP-30 (PID
Limit Lo) settings.
• If a PID change operation (changes from PID operation to normal operation) comes into multi-
function inputs (P1-P11), the value of [%] is converted to [Hz] and is output.
• DRV-20 (MaxFreq) value equals 100% of PID output.
PID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code Description
APP-01 App Mode Sets the code to “2 (Proc PID)” to enable process PID.
APP-16 PID Output Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
scale set at APP-42, APP-43, and APP-44 are applied on the display.
APP-17 PID Ref Value
Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit,
gain, and scale set at APP-42, APP-43, and APP-44 are applied on the
display.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
221
Code Description
APP-18 PID Fdb Value Displays the latest feedback value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
scale set at APP-42, APP-43, and APP-44 are applied on the display.
APP-19 PID Ref Set
Sets the reference value when APP-20 (PID Ref Source) is set to “0
(Keypad)”. If the reference source is set to any input other than the
keypad, this value will be ignored.
APP-20 PID Ref Source
Set the reference input source for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set
as the PID feedback source at APP-21 (PID F/B Source), it cannot be set as
the PID reference source. To set V1 as a reference source, change the
feedback source settings first.
Setting Function PID F/B
Source
0 Keypad Keypad X
1 V1 Terminal input for -10–10 V input voltage O
2 I1 Terminal input 0-20 mA input current O
3 V2 T[W/ optional I/O expansion module]
erminal input for -10–10 V input voltage
O
4 I2 T[W/ optional I/O expansion module]
erminal input 0-20 mA input current
O
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal O
6 Encoder t[W/ optional encoder module] Pulse input
erminal
O
7 FieldBus F[W/ optional communication module]
ieldbus Communication input
O
8 PLC [W/ optional PLC module] Input from a PLC O
9 Synchro C[W/ optional synchronization module]
ommand via synchronization operation
O
10 TBinary
ype
[W/ optional BCD module] Command via
BCD option module
X
The PID reference source setting can be monitored at APP-17 (PID Ref
Value) according to the information types for monitoring set at CNF-06–
08.
APP-21 PID F/B Source
Sets a feedback input source for the PID control. Keypad input (keypad-1,
keypad-2) cannot be selected as the source of FB input. Also, the input
type selected as the PID input source at APP-19 (PID Ref Set) cannot be set
as the PID feedback input source.
For example, if the V1 terminal is set as the PID reference source at APP-
20, you must select input types other than the V1 terminal as the PID
feedback source.
You can set codes 06–08 in the CNF group to “18 (PID Fdb Value)” to
monitor the feedback values.
APP-22 PID P-Gain, Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference and
Learning Advanced Features
222
Code Description
APP-26 P Gain Scale feedback. If the P-gain is set to 50%, then 50% of the difference (error) is
output.
The setting range of P-gain is 0.0–1000.0%. You can set APP-26 (P-Gain
Scale) to adjust the input scale if a more accurate control is required.
APP-23 PID I-Time
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the
time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-Time) is
set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error and
remains at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be reduced by PID I
Time. When the multi-function terminal block is set to “21 (I-Term Clear)”
and is turned on, all of the accumulated errors are deleted.
APP-24 PID D-Time
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential
time (PID D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change in errors per sec is
100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
APP-25 PID F-Gain Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value
leads to a faster response.
APP-27 PID Out LPF
Used when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
(default value is 0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a
higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the
PID controller output is, but the slower the response time.
APP-28 PID Mode
Set APP-28 to “0 (Process PID)” to add certain target values to the PID
output to produce the final output.
Set APP-28 to “1 (Normal PID)” to use the PID output without additional
processing (modification).
APP-29 PID Limit Hi,
APP-30 PID Limit Lo Sets the values to limit the output of the PID controller.
APP-32 PID Out Scale Sets APP-32 to adjust the scale of the controller output.
PID Rev Run En
Default is set to “No”. When set to “No”, the lower limit frequency limit is
set to 0 Hz when the frequency is decreased via PID control, so that it
does not reverse. If it is set to “Yes”, when the frequency decreases by PID
control, it falls below 0 Hz and operates in the reverse direction.
APP-42 PID Unit Sel
Set APP-42 to select the unit for the PID control.
Setting Unit Application Description
0 % - Displays certain values into as a
percentage.
1 Bar
Pressure Units for expressing different types
of pressure.
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 kPa
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
223
Code Description
5 Hz
Speed Units for inverter output frequency
6 rpm or motor revolution.
7 V Voltage
Units for electric voltage, current,
electrical consumption, or
consumed power.
8 I Current
9 kW Electric power
10 HP Horse power
11 °F
Temperature Units for expressing temperature.
12 °C
APP-43 PID Unit Gain,
APP-44 PID Unit Scale
Adjust the unit value and scale to fit the unit selected at APP-42 (PID Unit
Sel).
APP-45 PID P2-Gain
Set APP-45 (PID P2-Gain) for an alternative PID controller gain and use the
alternative gain via a terminal input.
Set IN-65–75 to “23 (P Gain2)”. When the selected terminal is on, the gain
set at APP-45 is used instead of the gain set at APP-22 and APP-23.
Learning Advanced Features
224
PID Control Block Diagram
Note
• If the PID switching operation (switching from PID operation to normal operation) is performed
at the multi-function inputs (P1-P11), % values are converted into Hz values.
• The polarity of the Normal PID output PID OUT is unipolar, and is limited by APP-29 (PID Limit
Hi) and APP-30 (PID Limit Lo).
• 100% is based on the setting at DRV-20 (maxFreq).
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
225
8.8.2 Pre-PID Operation
Pre-PID operation refers to a section of a PID operation where the inverter runs without PID
control. The inverter accelerates to a set frequency and runs without PID control, and then the
PID control begins after the PID output exceeds the set value at APP-35 (Pre-PID Exit).
Code Description
APP-34 Pre-PID Frq
Sets the target frequency to operate without PID control. The inverter
continues running at the set frequency until the PID feedback exceeds the
feedback value (%) set at APP-35.
APP-35 Pre-PID Exit
Sets the feedback value of the PID control (PID reference) to stop pre-PID
operation and start PID control.
APP-36 Pre-PID
Delay
Sets the time until a pre-PID fault trip occurs. If a feedback smaller than the
PID reference set at APP-35 is maintained for the set time, a pre-PID fail trip
occurs and inverter output is stopped.
Learning Advanced Features
226
8.8.3 PID Sleep Mode
If an operation continues at a frequency lower than the PID operation conditions at APP-38
(Sleep Freq) for a set duration at APP-37 (PID Sleep DT), the inverter enters PID sleep mode. In
PID sleep mode, the inverter resumes PID operation when the PID Wakeup level conditions set
at APP-39 (PID WakeUp Lev) are met.
Code Description
APP-37 PID Sleep DT,
APP-38 PID Sleep Freq
Sets the PID sleep frequency and delay time. The inverter stops
operation and enters sleep mode if an operation is maintained at a
frequency lower than the sleep frequency set at APP-38 for the time
set at APP-37.
APP-39 PID WakeUp Lev,
APP-40 PID WakeUp Mod
Sets the reference for PID wakeup at APP-39. If APP-40 is set to “0
(Below Level)”, PID operation is resumed when the feedback volume is
lower than the reference.
If APP-40 is set to “0 (Below level)”, PID operation will resume when the
feedback volume is lower than the reference.
If APP-40 is set to “1 (Above Level)”, PID operation will resume when
the feedback volume is higher than the reference.
If APP-40 is set to “2 (Beyond level)”, PID operation will resume when
the difference between the speed reference and the feedback is larger
than the wakeup reference set at APP-39.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
227
8.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)
When one of the multi-function terminals (IN-65–75) is set to “22 (PID Openloop)” and is turned
on, the PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal turns off,
the PID operation starts again.
8.9 Auto Tuning
The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for an auto torque
boost or sensorless vector control.
Example - Auto Tuning Based on 0.75 kW, 220 V Motor
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 2 0.75 kW kW
BAS
11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 -
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 40 Rpm
13 Rated motor current Rated Curr 3.6 A
14 Motor no-load current Noload curr 1.6 A
15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 220 V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 %
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None -
21 Stator resistance Rs 2.600 Ω
22 Leakage inductance Lsigma 17.94 mH
23 Stator inductance Ls 15.44 mH
24 Rotor time constant Tr 145 ms
APO 01 Encoder option mode Enc Opt Mode 0 None
Learning Advanced Features
228
Auto Tuning Default Parameter Setting
Motor
Capacity
(kW)
Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-14 Motor
Capacity
Set the motor capacity. The maximum motor capacity is limited by the inverter’s
capacity.
BAS-20 Auto
Tuning
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key to run auto tuning.
Setting Function
0 None
The auto tuning function is disabled. Also, if you select one of the
auto tuning options and run it, the parameter value will revert
back to 0 when auto tuning is complete.
1 All Measures all motor parameters while the motor is rotating,
Learning Advanced Features
230
Code Description
including stator resistance (Rs), stator inductance (Lsigma), no-
load current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant (Tr), etc.
If an optional encoder module is installed, the inverter state is
also measured (requires appropriate settings for encoder-related
functions).
Use this setting when DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “5 (Vector)”.
Since the motor is rotating while the parameters are being
measured, if the load is connected to the motor spindle, the
parameters may not be measured accurately. For accurate
measurements, remove the load attached to the motor spindle.
If DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-2)”, the rotor
time constant (Tr) must be measured in a stopped position.
2 tAll (static
ype)
Measures all parameters while the motor is in the stopped
position, including stator resistance (Rs), stator inductance
(Lsigma), no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant (Tr),
etc.
Use this setting when DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “4
(Sensorless-2)”.
Since the motor is not rotating while the parameters are
measured, the measurements are not affected when the load is
connected to the motor spindle.
3 Rs+Lsigma
Measures the stator resistance (Rs) and stator inductance
(Lsigma) while the motor is not rotating. The measured values
are used for auto torque boost and sensorless vector control.
Since the motor is not rotating while the parameters are
measured, the measurements are not affected when the load is
connected to the motor spindle.
4 Enc. Test
Runs auto tuning after installing the optional encoder to the
inverter and connecting the encoder cables to the motor. Auto
tuning checks the cable connection. Ensure that the encoder
related parameters are correctly set before auto tuning.
5 Tr
Uses this setting to measure the rotor time constant (Tr) when
DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “5 (Vector)”. The motor rotates
during auto tuning.
6 Tr (Stdstl)
Uses this setting to measure the rotor time constant (Tr) when
DRV-09 (Control mode) is set to “4 (Sensorless-2)”. The motor
does not rotate during auto tuning.
BAS-14
Noload Curr,
BAS-21
Rs–BAS-24 Tr
Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters that are not
included in the auto tuning measurement list, the default setting will be displayed.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
231
• Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
• Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated
voltage, and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default parameter
setting is used for values that are not entered.
Note
Before checking the encoder status using auto tuning, ensure that the following parameters are
correctly set.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
BAS 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Enc Test 0–6
APO
01 Encoder option mode Enc Opt Mode 1 Feedback 0–2
04 Encoder type selection Enc Type Sel 0 Line Driver 0–2
05 Encoder pulse direction Enc Pulse Sel 0 (A+B) 0–2
06 Encoder pulse number Enc Pulse Num - 1024 10–4096
08 Encoder feedback monitor Enc Monitor - 0 -
Encoder status checking details
Code Description
BAS-20 Auto Tuning
Sets the auto tuning type to “3 (Enc Test)” to check the encoder
connection.
The inverter operates in the Fx direction and accelerates to +20 Hz until
it decelerates to 0 Hz and continues operating in the Rx direction,
accelerating to -20 Hz.
BAS-20 parameter value is automatically changed to “None” if a
connection error is not detected.
The “Enc reverse” message is displayed if the encoder connection is not
correct. If this happens, you can change the APO-05 (ENC Pulse Sel)
parameter setting to match the actual direction, or swap the two
encoder cables that are connected to the motor.
APO-01 ENC Opt Mode Sets the encoder option mode to “1 (Feed-back)”.
APO-04 Enc Type Sel Select an encoder type.
Setting Output details
Learning Advanced Features
232
0 Line Driver
Line driver output
1 Totem or
Com
Totem pole output
2 Open
Collector
Open collector output
APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel Sets the direction of the encoder output pulse.
0: A+B (Fx, for frequency reference) / 1: -(A+B) (Rx)
APO-06 Enc Pulse Num Sets the number of output pulses per one motor revolution.
APO-08 Enc Monitor Converts the encoder output into motor speed (Hz or RPM) for
monitoring.
8.10 V/F Operation Using Speed Sensor
You can install an optional encoder module to the inverter to enhance the accuracy of V/F
control. Before operating the inverter, check the encoder connection by running an auto
tuning operation.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 1 V/F PG 0–5 -
CON 45 pPG operation
roportional gain PG P-Gain - 3000 0–9999 -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
233
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
46 PG operation
integral gain PG I-Gain - 50 0–9999 -
47 mPG operation
aximum slip PG Slip Max % - 100 0–200 %
APO 01 Encoder option
Sets the control mode to “1 (V/F PG)”. This mode adds a speed controller
to a regular V/F mode. The command frequency becomes the speed
reference of the speed controller, and the feedback is used as the
encoder input.
CON-45 PG P-Gain,
CON-46 PG I-Gain
Sets the proportional and integral gain (P-Gain/I-gain) of the speed
controller.
Higher P-gain results in a faster response. However, excessively high P-
gain may lead to unstable operation.
Lower I-gain results in a faster response. However, excessively low P-gain
may lead to unstable operation.
CON-47 PG Slip
Max %
Sets the maximum slip for the speed controller as a percentage (%) based
on the rated slip set at BAS-12 (Rated Slip).
For example, if CON-47 is set to 90% when the rated slip set at BAS-12 is
30 rpm, the maximum slip for the speed controller becomes 27 rpm, (90%
of 30 rpm,).
8.11 Sensorless-1 Vector Control
Sensorless-1 vector control mode provides high performance operation without requiring a
speed sensor. Motor parameter information is required for sensorless-1 vector control mode.
Before operating the inverter in sensorless-1 mode, run auto tuning first.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV
09 Control mode Control Mode 3 Sensorless-1 -
10 Torque control option Torque Control 0 No -
14 Motor-rated capacity Motor Capacity x x.xx kW
Learning Advanced Features
234
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
BAS
11 Motor pole number Pole Number - 4 -
12 Motor-rated slip Rated Slip - 2.00 Hz
13 Motor-rated current Rated Curr - 3.6 A
14 Motor No-load current Noload curr - 0.7 A
15 Motor-rated voltage Rated Volt - 220 V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency - 83 %
20 Auto tuning options Auto Tuning 2 Rs+Lsigma -
CON
21
Sensorless speed
controller proportional
gain 1
ASR-SL P Gain1 - 100.0 %
22 Sensorless speed
controller integral gain 1 ASR-SL I Gain1 - 150 ms
• For sensorless-1 mode operation, the motor’s rated capacity must match the inverter’s rated
capacity. If the inverter capacity is too large for the installed motor, run the motor in V/F mode.
• Sensorless-1 mode operation does not support multiple motor control (MMC) features. Do not
connect multiple motors to one inverter that is operating in sensorless-1 mode.
Sensorless-1 Vector Control–Details
Code Description
DRV-14 Motor Capacity,
BAS-11 Pole Number,
BAS-12 Rated Slip,
BAS-13 Rated Curr,
BAS-15 Rated Volt,
BAS-16 Efficiency
Motor parameter information is required for sensorless-1 vector
control mode.
Check the motor’s rating plate for the motor capacity and other
performance-related information, set the relevant parameters, and
then run auto tuning at BAS-20.
BAS-20 Auto Tuning
After setting all the parameter values (DRV-14 Motor Capacity, BAS-11
Pole Number, BAS-12 Rated Slip, BAS-13 Rated Curr, BAS-15 Rated Volt,
and BAS-16 Efficiency), perform auto tuning.
To perform astatic auto tuning when the motor does not rotate, set
BAS-20 to 2 (Rs+Lsigma). The default motor no-load current is used,
and the motor stator resistance (Rs) and leakage inductance (Lsigma)
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
235
Code Description
values are saved at BAS-21 and BAS-22.
To perform rotating auto tuning, separate the load from the motor
axis, if possible, and set BAS-20 to “1 (ALL)”. The motor no-load current,
motor stator resistance (Rs), and motor leakage inductance (Lsigma)
values are saved at BAS-14, BAS-21, and BAS-22 respectively.
CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1,
CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1
Set the speed controller proportionately and integral gains for
sensorless-1 vector control according to the default motor parameters
and acc/dec time.
Appropriate controller gain values must be set based on the load
characteristics. Motor overheating or an unstable system may result if
the gain values are not properly set.
DRV-10 Torque Control
Selects the speed control and torque control modes. If you set DRV-10
(Torque control) to “1 (Yes)”, the operation switches into torque control
mode. Refer to 8.14 Torque Control on page 245 for details.
• Torque control is not available during low-speed regeneration and
low-speed operation under a light load. Select vector control
mode instead.
• When the inverter is operated in torque control mode, do not
switch between forward and reverse rotations. Overcurrent or Rx
deceleration fault trips may result.
• When the inverter is operated in sensorless vector control mode,
enable accelerating speed search by setting the CON-71 (Speed
search) bits to “0001” if the inverter is expected to start or restart
while the motor is free-running.
8.12 Sensorless-2 Vector Control
Similar to sensorless-1 vector control mode, sensorless-2 vector control mode provides high-
performance inverter operation without requiring a speed sensor. It utilizes various gain values
for more precise vector control.
Motor parameter information is required for sensorless-2 vector control mode. Before
Learning Advanced Features
236
operating the inverter in sensorless-2 mode, run auto tuning first.
Grou
p
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV
09 Control mode Control Mode 4 Sensorless-2 -
10 Torque control option Torque Control 0 No -
14 Motor-rated capacity Motor Capacity x Varies depending on
motor capacity. kW
BAS
11 Motor pole number Pole Number - 4 -
12 Motor-rated slip Rated Slip - Varies depending on
motor capacity. Hz
13 Motor-rated current Rated Curr - Varies depending on
motor capacity. A
14 Motor No-load current Noload curr - Varies depending on
motor capacity. A
15 Motor-rated voltage Rated Volt - 220/380/440/480 V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency - Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
20 Auto tuning options Auto Tuning 1 All -
CON
20 Sensorless 2nd
gain display setting SL2 G View Sel 1 Yes -
21 Sensorless speed controller
proportional gain1 ASR-SL P Gain1 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
22 iSensorless speed controller
ntegral gain 1 ASR-SL I Gain1 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. ms
23 Senseless speed controller
proportional gain 2 ASR-SL P Gain2 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
24 Sensorless2 speed controller
integral gain 2 ASR-SL I Gain2 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
26 Sensorless2 measurer gain 1 GObserver
ain1 - 10500 -
27 Sensorless2 measurer gain 2 Observer
Gain2 - 100.0 %
28 Sensorless2 measurer gain 3 Observer
Gain3 - 13000 -
29 Sensorless2 speed estimator
proportional gain 1 S-Est P Gain 1 - V
aries depending on
motor capacity. -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
237
Grou
p
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
30 Sensorless2 speed estimator
integral gain 1 S-Est I Gain 1 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. -
31 Sensorless2 speed estimator
proportional gain 2 S-Est P Gain 2 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
32 Sensorless2 speed estimator
integral gain 2 S-Est I Gain 2 -
Varies depending on
motor capacity. %
48 Current controller P gain ACR P-Gain - 1200 -
49 Current controller I gain ACR I-Gain - 120 -
• For sensorless-2 mode operation, the motor-rated capacity must match the inverter’s rated
capacity. If the inverter capacity is too large for the installed motor, run the motor in V/F mode.
• Sensorless-2 mode does not support multiple motor control (MMC) features. Do not connect
multiple motors to one inverter that is operating in sensorless-1 mode.
Sensorless-2 Vector Control–Details
Code Description
DRV-14 Motor Capacity,
BAS-11 Pole Number,
BAS-12 Rated Slip,
BAS-13 Rated Curr,
BAS-15 Rated Volt,
BAS-16 Efficiency
Motor parameter information is required for sensorless-2 vector control
mode.
Check the motor’s rating plate for the motor capacity and other
performance related information, set the relevant parameters, and then
run auto tuning at BAS-20.
BAS-20 Auto Tuning
After setting all the parameter values (DRV-14 Motor Capacity, BAS-11
Pole Number, BAS-12 Rated Slip, BAS-13 Rated Curr, BAS-15 Rated Volt,
and BAS-16 Efficiency), perform a rotating auto tuning.
To perform rotating auto tuning, separate the load from the motor
axis, and set BAS-20 to “1 (ALL)”. The motor stator resistance (Rs),
leakage inductance (Lsigma), stator inductance (Ls), no-load current
(Noload Curr), and rotor time constant (Tr) are saved in BAS-21, BAS-22,
BAS-23, BAS-14, and BAS-24, respectively.
CON-20 SL2 G View Sel
Set CON-20 to “1 (Yes)” to view various medium speed* gains (CON-23
ASR-SL P Gain2, CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2, CON-27 Observer Gain2, CON-
28 Observer Gain3, CON-31 S-Est P Gain2, and CON-32 S-Est I Gain2) for
Learning Advanced Features
238
Code Description
user configuration. These parameters are not visible if CON-20 is set to
“0 (No)”.
*Medium speed: A speed range that is approximately 50% of the base
frequency.
CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1,
CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1
Sets the speed controller proportionately and integral gain values for
sensorless-2 vector control.
The P-gain is proportionate to speed deviation. Increasing the P-gain
increases torque output and immediately eliminates speed deviation.
The I-gain is an integral gain which represents the time (ms) until the
torque output is made under a steady speed deviation. Decreasing the
I- gain can eliminate the speed deviation faster.
After setting the speed controller gain values, observe the changes and
fine-tune the values to improve the speed control waveforms. Note that
vibration may result if the set P-gain value is too large or the set I-gain
value is too small. If oscillation is observed in the waveform, first
increase the I-gain, and then increase the P-gain to find the optimal
values.
CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2,
CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2
These codes are visible only when CON-20 is set to “1 (yes)”.
Set the speed controller proportionately and integral gain values for
sensorless-2 vector control for operation speeds greater than 50% of
the base frequency.
CON-23 (ASR-SL P Gain2) and CON-24 (ASR-SL I Gain2) are set as
percentage values (%) based on the proportionately set speed controller
and integral gain1 values set at CON-21 (ASR-SL P Gain1) and CON-22
(ASR-SL I Gain1).
Therefore, P-gain2 and I-gain2 values of less than 100% result in
decreased responsiveness when the inverter is operating above
medium speed.* For example, if both P-gain1 and P-gain2 are set to
50%, the actual P-gain2 value is 25% of the reference. Likewise, if I-gain1
is set to 100 ms and I-gain2 is set to 50%, the resulting I-gain 2 value
becomes 200 ms. By default, the speed controller gain values are set
according to the motor parameters and acceleration and deceleration
times.
*Medium speed: A speed range that is approximately 50% of the base
frequency.
These codes are visible only when CON-20 is set to “1 (yes)”.
The observer gain values may be adjusted by system engineers only.
Sensorless-2 vector control mode requires the observers to estimate the
motor’s stator current and rotor magnetic flux.
While observer gain1 (CON-26) is applied when the inverter operates at
low to medium speeds, observer gain2 (CON-27) is applied when the
inverter operates at medium to high speeds. Observer gain3 (CON-28) is
applied in torque control mode.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
239
Code Description
CON-29 S-Est P Gain1,
CON-30 S-Est I Gain1
Sets the speed estimator gain values for sensorless-2 vector control
mode. Increase or decrease the speed estimator P-gain or I-gain by
small increments if the displayed speed does not match the speed
reference.
You can also adjust the speed estimator gain values if the motor
vibrates severely, or a high current ripple occurs at power on. Decrease
the speed estimator P-gain or I-gain gradually to reduce the vibration or
current ripple.
By default, the speed estimator gains are set according to the default
motor parameters and acceleration and deceleration times.
CON-31 S-Est P Gain2,
CON-32 S-Est I Gain2
These codes are visible only when CON-20 is set to “1 (yes)”.
You can set the speed estimator gains to a frequency higher than the
medium speed* in sensorless-2 vector control mode.
CON-31 and CON-32 are set as percentage values of low-speed gain
values set at CON-29 and CON-30. For example, if CON-29 S-Est P-Gain1
is 300 and CON-31 S-Est P-Gain2 is 40.0%, the speed estimator P-gain at
higher than the actual medium speed is 120.
By default, the speed estimator gains are set according to the default
motor parameters and acceleration and deceleration times.
*Medium speed: A speed range that is approximately 50% of the base
frequency.
CON-34 SL2 OVM Perc
When the output voltage/input voltage ratio is below 100% (when the
output voltage is not over modulated), the output voltage bears linear
characteristics to the input voltage. In sensorless-2 control mode, you
can set CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) to define a voltage range to be limited in
the over modulated zone. By default, CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc) is set as
120%. However, for a high-impact load where the load often exceeds
the torque limit, such as a press load, you can increase the limit value to
avoid frequent over current fault trips.
Also, in areas where the power supply is unstable, the input voltage
tends to be lower than the rated input voltage, which results in more
frequent overcurrent (OC1) fault trips with aforementioned high-impact
load applications. If this is the case, you can set CON-34 (SL2 OVM Perc)
as 140–150% to avoid frequent fault trips.
CON-48 ACR P-Gain,
CON-49 ACR I Gain Sets the current PI controller P-gain and I-gain values.
DRV-10 Torque Control
Selects the speed control and torque control modes. If you set DRV-10
(Torque control) to “1 (Yes)”, the operation switches to torque control
mode.
Refer to 8.14 Torque Control on page 245 for details.
Learning Advanced Features
240
Code Description
• Torque control is not available during low-speed regeneration and
low-speed operation under a light load. Select vector control mode
instead.
• When the inverter is operated in torque control mode, do not
switch between forward and reverse rotations. Overcurrent or Rx
deceleration fault trips may occur.
• When the inverter is operated in sensorless vector control mode,
enable accelerating speed search by setting the CON-71 (Speed
search) bits to “0001,” if the inverter is expected to start or restart
while the motor is free-running.
In sensorless-2 control mode, the motor may overheat or the system may become unstable if the
gain values are not properly set.
Note
Sensorless-2 vector control mode is greatly affected by the motor and load characteristics.
Therefore, it is sometimes necessary to adjust the controller gain values.
When a sensorless-2 vector control is operated in speed mode [DRV-10 (torque control) is set to “0
(No)”. If the operation is unstable at extremely low speeds (below 2–3 Hz), or if the speed bounces
during startup, increase the CON-22 (ASR-SL I Gain1) value to 200% of the default value. With a
regenerative load, motor torque ripples may occur frequently. In this case, decrease the CON-21
(ASR-SL P Gain1) value to 50% of the default value. If this does not solve the problem, increase the
CON-21 (ASR-SL P Gain1) value back to the default, and decrease the CON-30 (S-Est I Gain1) value to
50% of the default value.
8.13 Vector Control Mode Operation
With an optional encoder module installed to the inverter, vector control mode provides highly
precise operation abilities.
Similar to sensorless-1 and sensorless-2 vector control modes, vector control mode requires
motor parameter values for operation. Before operating the inverter in sensorless-2 mode, run
auto tuning first.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 5 Vector -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
241
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
21 Speed unit
selection Hz / rpm Sel 1 Rpm Display -
BAS 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 1 All -
CON
09 Initial excitation time PreExTime - 1.0 sec
10 Initial excitation power supply Flux Force - 100.0 %
11 Continued operation duration Hold Time - 1.0 sec
12 gSpeed controller proportional
ain 1 ASR P Gain 1 - 50.0 %
13 Speed controller integral gain 1 ASR I Gain 1 - 300 ms
15 Speed controller
proportional gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 - 50.0 %
16 Speed controller integral gain 2 ASR I Gain 2 - 300 ms
18 Gain exchange frequency Gain Sw Freq - 0.00 Hz
19 Gain exchange time Gain Sw Delay - 0.10 sec
51 Speed controller
reference filter ASR Ref LPF - 0 ms
52 Torque controller
output filter Torque Out LPF - 0 ms
53 Torque limit
compensation Trq BiasFF - 0.0 %
IN 65–75 PX terminal function setting Px Define 36 Asr Gain 2 -
Learning Advanced Features
242
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
65–75 PX terminal function setting Px Define 37 ASR P/PI -
• For vector control mode operation, the motor-rated capacity must match the inverter’s rated
capacity. If the inverter capacity is too large for the installed motor, run the motor in V/F mode.
• Vector control mode does not support multiple motor control (MMC) features. Do not connect
multiple motors to one inverter that is operating in vector control mode.
Vector Control Mode–Details
Code Description
DRV-14 Motor Capacity,
BAS-11 Pole Number,
BAS-12 Rated Slip,
BAS-13 Rated Curr,
BAS-15 Rated Volt,
BAS-16 Efficiency
Motor parameter information is required for vector control mode
operation.
Check the motor’s rating plate for the motor capacity and other
performance-related information, set the relevant parameters, and
then run auto tuning at BAS-20.
APO-01 Enc Opt Mode Sets the encoder option mode to “1 (feedback)”.
APO-04 Enc Type Sel
Sets the encoder’s signal delivery options.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the encoder and select
one of the following options:
0: Line Driver / 1: Totem or Com / 2: Open Collect
APO-05 Enc Pulse Sel
Sets the encoder output pulse options.
Setting Description
0 (A+B) Fx operation
1 (A+B) Rx operation
2 A Frequency reference
APO-06 Enc Pulse Num Sets the number of pulses per rotation.
APO-08 Enc Monitor rConverts the encoder output into motor rotation and displays in Hz or
pm units.
BAS-20 Auto Tuning
To test the encoder:
Sets the auto tuning type to “3 (Enc Test)” to check the encoder
connection.
The inverter operates in the Fx direction and accelerates to 20 Hz until
it decelerates to 0 Hz and continues operating in the Rx direction,
accelerating to 20 Hz.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
243
Code Description
The BAS-20 parameter value is automatically changed to “None” if a
connection error is not detected.
The “Enc reverse” message is displayed if the encoder connection is
not correct. If this happens, you can change the APO-05 (ENC Pulse Sel)
parameter setting to match the actual direction, or swap the two
encoder cables that are connected to the motor.
To perform rotating auto tuning, separate the load from the motor
axis, and set BAS-20 to “1 (ALL)”. The motor stator resistance (Rs),
leakage inductance (Lsigma), stator inductance (Ls), no-load current
(Noload Curr) and rotor time constant (Tr) are saved in BAS-21, BAS-22,
BAS-23, BAS-14, and BAS-24 respectively.
CON-09 PreExTime Sets the initial excitation time. Operation begins after the motor is
excited to the rated speed.
CON-10 Flux Force
Flux force may be used to reduce the initial excitation time. The motor
flux increases based on a time constant. To reduce the time to reach
the rated flux, you can supply a flux larger than the rating at first, and
then reduce the amount of flux when the motor is excited close to the
rated flux.
Motor flux
Excitation flux
Forced flux
CON-12 ASR P Gain1,
CON-13 ASR I Gain1
Sets the speed controller proportional and integral gain values.
Increasing the P-gain increases responsiveness and torque output,
while decreasing the I-gain increases responsiveness.
However, note that excessively high P-gain or low I-gain settings may
result in motor speed oscillation.
CON-15 ASR P Gain2,
CON-16 ASR I Gain2
These codes are used to configure the gains that are applied based on
the load characteristics and motor speed. The switching of gain values
Learning Advanced Features
244
Code Description
siswpitecrhfoinrgmteimd eb asseet da toCnOthNe-1s9w. itching frequency set at CON-18 and the
CON-51 ASR Ref LPF sSets the filter time constant that is used in vector speed mode for the
peed controller.
CON-52 Torque Out LPF
Sets the filter time constant that can be used in vector speed or vector
torque mode. In vector speed mode, it is applied to the speed
controller. In vector torque mode, it is applied to the torque reference.
CON-48 ACR P-Gain,
CON-49 ACR I Gain
Sets the P-and I-gain values for the current PI controller. These gains
are used in sensorless speed/torque modes and vector speed/torque
modes.
IN-65–75 Px Define
Sets the multi-function terminals to control the gains and controllers.
Setting Description
36 ASR Gain2 pWhen the terminal is on, gain switching takes
lace after the time set at CON-19 has passed.
37 ASR P/PI sWhen the terminal is on, the integral controller
tops operating.
CON-53 Torque Lmt Src
Sets the input source for the torque limit function. The torque limit
function is used to limit the output to adjust the torque reference.
Setting Description
0 Keypad-1 Sets the torque limit using the keypad (up to
1 Keypad-2 200% of the motor rated torque).
2 V1
Sets the torque limit using the analog terminals.
3 I1
6 Int 485 Sets the torque limit using the built-in 485
communication device.
IN-02 Torque at 100%
Sets the torque limit values for the analog input.
If CON-53 is set to “2 (V1)” and IN-02 is set to “200%”, the torque limit
becomes 200% when 10 V input is supplied to V1.*
(*Applies only if all V1 function parameters use default setting values.)
When any device other than the keypad is selected as the torque limit
input source, set CNF-21–23 to “21 (Torque Limit)”.
Sets the direction of the torque limit when CON-53 is set to “0 (Keypad-
1)” or “1 (Keypad-2)”. The torque limit can be set up to 200% of the
motor rated torque.
Setting Description
FWD +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for FX motoring operation.
FWD –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for FX regenerating operation.
REV +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for RX motoring operation.
REV –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for RX regenerating operation.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
245
Code Description
CON-58 Trq Bias Src
Selects the input source for the offset setting to be added to the
torque reference.
Setting Description
0 Keypad-1 Sets the torque bias using the keypad (-120% –
1 Keypad-2 +120%, set at CON-59).
2 V1 Sets the torque bias using the analog terminals.
(-120% –+120%, set at CON-59).
The setting can be viewed in monitor mode. Set
CFG-06–08 to “21 (Torque bias)”.
3 I1
CON-59 Torque Bias Sets the torque bias value between -120%– +120%.
IN-65–75 Px Define
Sets one of the multi-function terminals to “48 (Trq Bias)”. Torque bias
input via the keypad or analog input is applied only when this multi-
function terminal is on.
CON-60 Trq BiasFF
Sets the compensation volume to add to the bias to make up for the
loss caused by motor rotation. Negative (-) values diminish the torque
bias.
CON-11 Hold Time
When a run command stops, the inverter holds the zero speed output
for the set time before the motor decelerates to a complete stop.
8.14 Torque Control
You can use torque control to operate the inverter to produce a certain amount of torque as
indicated by the torque reference. In torque control mode, the motor speed is decided by the
amount of load because a motor can run at a constant speed when the output torque and
torque load are equal. The motor speed increases when the output torque becomes greater
than the torque load. You can set a speed limit to maintain the motor speed within a certain
range. Note that torque control is not available during the speed control operations.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Note
• Basic parameters for inverter operation must be correctly set before you can operate the
inverter in torque control mode.
• Torque control is not available during low speed regeneration and light load operation. Operate
the inverter in vector control mode instead.
• Do not switch between Fx and Rx operations while the inverter is operating in torque control
mode. An overcurrent or reverse deceleration fault trip may occur as a result.
Torque Control–Details
Code Description
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
247
Code Description
DRV-08 Trq Ref
Src
Select the input source for the torque reference.
Setting Description
0 Keypad-1 Sets the torque reference using the keypad (up to 180%
1 Keypad-2 of rated motor torque, set at CON-02).
2 V1 Sets the torque reference using the analog terminals.
The torque reference changes based on the set value at
IN-02 (Torque at 100%).
For example, if IN-02 is set to 200%, the torque reference
becomes 200% when 20 mA current is supplied.
The setting can be viewed in monitor mode. Set CFG-06–
08 to “19 (Torque Ref)”.
3 I1
6 Int485 Sets the torque reference using the built-in RS485
communication device.
CON-02 CMD
Torque Sets the torque reference for keypad input.
IN-02 Torque at
100% Sets the torque reference for analog terminal input.
CON-35 SL2 L-
ExcitLmt
This is the ratio to improve the operating characteristics in the low torque/low
speed range by lowering the magnetic flux current. However, if the value is set
too low, stable sensorless control may not be possible.
CON-62 Speed
Lmt Src
Select the input source for the speed limit.
Setting Description
0 Keypad-1 Sets the speed limit using the keypad (CON-63 FWD
1 Keypad-2 Speed Lmt / CON-64 REV Speed Lmt).
2 V1 Set the torque reference using the analog terminals, in
the same manner as setting a frequency reference.
The setting can be viewed in monitor mode. Set CNF-21–
23 to “23 (Speed Limit)”.
3 I1
6 Int485
CON-65 Speed
Lmt Gain
Set the torque reference decrement rate between 100%–5000% for when the
speed limit is exceeded.
IN-65–75 Px
Define
Sets one of the multi-function inputs to “35 (Speed/Torque)”. Switching
between torque control mode and speed (vector) control mode takes place
when the terminal is on.
8.15 Droop Control
Learning Advanced Features
248
Droop control is used to balance the load when operating multiple motors for a single load, or
to prevent speed controller saturation in vector control mode.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
CON
66 Droop operation amount Droop Perc - 0.0 %
67 Droop start torque Droop St Torque - 100.0 %
Droop Control–Details
Code Description
CON-66 Droop
Perc Sets the percentage rate for the droop operation based on the rated torque.
CON-67 Droop
start torque
Sets the torque to start droop operation. Based on the set value, the motor
speed can be calculated as follows:
torque DroopStTorque
Torque reference DroopStTorque
Droop speed Maximum frequency DroopPerc
100% -
-
8.16 Speed / Torque Control Switching
Set one of the multi-function terminals to switch between speed and torque control modes.
This function is only available in vector control mode.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
CON
68
Torque mode–speed
mode switching
acceleration time
SPD/TRQAcc T - 20.0 sec
69
Torque mode–speed
mode switching
deceleration time
09 Control mode Control Mode 5 Vector -
10 Torque control Torque Control
0 No -
1 Yes -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
249
Set a multi-function input Px to “35 (Speed/Torque)”.
If the terminal is on during a vector torque operation, where DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to “5
(Vector)” and DRV-10 (Torque Control) is set to “1 (Yes)”, the operation switches from torque to
speed mode based on the acceleration and deceleration times set at CON-68 (SPD/TRQAcc T)
and CON-69 (SPD/TRQDec T).
If the terminal is on during a vector speed operation, where DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to “5
(Vector)” and DRV-10 (Torque Control) is set to “0 (No)”, the operation switches from speed to
torque mode.
8.17 Kinetic Energy Buffering
When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage decreases, and a
low voltage trip occurs, blocking the output. A kinetic energy buffering operation uses
regenerative energy generated by the motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link
voltage. This extends the time for a low voltage trip to occur after an instantaneous power
interruption.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
CON
77 Kinetic energy
buffering selection KEB Select
0 None
1 KEB-1 0–2 -
2 KEB-2
78 Kinetic energy
buffering start level
KEB Start
Lev 125 110–200 %
79 Kinetic energy
buffering stop level
KEB Stop
Lev 130 130–210 %
86 Kinetic energy
buffering P-Gain KEB P Gain 1000 0–20000 %
87 Kinetic energy
buffering I gain KEB I Gain 500 1–20000 %
88 Kinetic energy
buffering slip gain
KEB Slip
Gain 30.0 0–2000.0 %
89
Kinetic energy
buffering acceleration
time
KEB Acc
Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 Sec
IN 65–75 PX terminal setting
option Px Define 50 KEB-1 Select 0–51
Learning Advanced Features
250
K inetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
Code Description
CON-77
KEB Select
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected.
Note
If a multi-function terminal is set to “50 (KEB-1 Select)”, KEB operation is
available via terminal input only. Set CON-77 to “0 (none)” in this case.
Setting Function
0 None General deceleration is carried out until a low voltage trip
occurs.
1 KEB-1
If input power failure occurs, the inverter output frequency is
controlled and the regeneration energy from the motor is
charged by the inverter. Normal operation is resumed when
the power is supplied again, using the acceleration time set
at CON-89 (KEB Acc Time).
2 KEB-2
If input power failure occurs, the inverter output frequency is
controlled and the regeneration energy from the motor is
charged by the inverter. The motor decelerates and stops
when the power is supplied again, using the deceleration
time set at DRV-04 (Dec Time).
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
251
Code Description
CON-78
KEB Start Lev,
CON-79
KEB Stop Lev
Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation. The set
values must be based on the low voltage trip level at 100%, and the stop level
(CON-79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-78).
CON-86
KEB P Gain
Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation. It
operates the inverter by modifying the set value to prevent malfunctions
caused by low voltage after power interruptions.
CON-87
KEB I Gain
Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Sets the gain value to maintain the operation until the frequency stops during
the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-88
KEB Slip Gain
Used to prevent malfunctions caused by low voltage from initial kinetic energy
buffering occurring due to power interruptions.
CON-89
KEB Acc Time
Sets the acceleration time for the frequency reference when the inverter’s
operation becomes normal after the kinetic energy buffering operation.
IN-65–75 Px
Define
Sets a multi-function input Px to “50 (KEB-1 Select)”.
If the terminal is on during an operation, the inverter operates in KEB-1 mode.
The inverter output frequency is controlled to the output level set at CON-78
and the regeneration energy from the motor is charged by the inverter.
Normal operation is resumed when the power is supplied again, using the
acceleration time set at CON-89 (KEB Acc Time).
If the terminal is not on, KEB operation does not start when the input power
failure occurs.
If a multi-function terminal is set to “50 (KEB-1 Select)”, KEB operation is
available via terminal input only. Set CON-77 to “0 (none)” in this case.
• Depending on the duration of instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load
inertia, a low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation.
• Motors may vibrate during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads, except for
Learning Advanced Features
252
variable torque loads (for example, fan or pump loads).
8.18 Energy Saving Operation
8.18.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation
If the inverter output current is lower than the current set at BAS-14 (Noload Curr), the output
voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at ADV-51 (Energy Save). The voltage before the
energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the percentage. The manual
energy saving operation will not be carried out during acceleration and deceleration.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
50 oEnergy saving
peration E-Save Mode 1 Manual
0 None
1 Manual -
2 Auto
51 Energy saving
amount Energy Save 30 0–30 %
8.18.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation
The inverter automatically finds the optimal energy saving point based on the motor rated
current (BAS-13) and the no-load current (BAS-14).
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 50 Energy saving E-Save Mode 2 Auto 0–2 -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
253
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Setting Range Unit
operation
BAS
13 Motor-rated
current Rated Curr
Depends on
inverter capacity 1–1000 A
14 Motor no-load
current Noload Curr
Depends on
inverter capacity 0.5–1000 A
If the operation frequency is changed, or acceleration or deceleration is carried out during an
energy saving operation, the actual acc/dec time may take longer than the set time due to the time
required to return to general operations from the energy saving operation.
Learning Advanced Features
254
8.19 Speed Search Operation
Speed search operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur when the inverter voltage
output is disconnected and the motor is idling. Since this feature estimates the motor rotation
speed based on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact speed.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
The speed search is carried out as it controls the
inverter output current during idling below the CON-
72 (SS Sup-Current) parameter setting. If the
direction of the idling motor and the direction of the
operation command at restart are the same, a stable
speed search function can be performed at about 10
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
255
Code Description
Hz or lower. However, if the direction of the idling
motor and the direction of the operation command
at restart are different, the speed search does not
produce a satisfactory result because the direction of
idling cannot be established.
1 Flying Start-2
The speed search is carried out by the PI controller,
which controls the ripple current generated by the
counter electromotive force during no-load rotation.
As this mode establishes the direction of the idling
motor (forward/reverse), the speed search function
is stable regardless of the direction of the idling
motor and direction of the operation command.
However, because the ripple current is used, which is
generated by the counter electromotive force while
idling (the counter electromotive force is
proportional to the idle speed), the idle frequency is
not determined accurately and re-acceleration may
start from zero speed when the speed search is
performed for the idling motor at a low speed (about
10 - 15 Hz, though it depends on motor
characteristics).
CON-71 Speed
Search
Speed search can be selected from the following four options. If the top
display segment is on, it is enabled (On). If the bottom segment is on, it is
disabled (Off).
Item Bit Setting On Status Bit Setting Off Status
Keypad
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Setting
Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
Speed search for general
acceleration
Initialization after a fault trip
Restart after instantaneous power
interruption
Start with power-on
Learning Advanced Features
256
Code Description
oSppeeeradt isoenacrocmhfmora ngde nruenras,l aacccceelelerraatitoionns:t aIfrbtsi tw1i tihs sthetetsop“e1e” da nsedatrhceh inverter
operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a fault trip may occur if
the operation command is run for the inverter to provide voltage output.
The speed search function prevents such fault trips from occurring.
Initialization after a fault trip other than an LV trip: If bit 2 is set to “1”
and PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to “1 (Yes)”, the speed search operation
automatically accelerates the motor to the operation frequency used before
the fault trip when the [STOP/RESET] key is pressed (or the terminal block
input is on) after a fault trip.
Automatic restart after an instantaneous power interruption: If bit 3 is
set to “1”, and if a low voltage trip occurs due to a power interruption but
the power is restored before the internal power shuts down, the speed
search operation accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference
before the low voltage trip.
If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power is
disconnected, the inverter generates a low voltage trip and blocks the
output. When the input power returns, the operation frequency before the
low voltage trip and the voltage is increased by the inverter’s inner PI
controller.
If the current increases above the value set at CON-72, the voltage stops
increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current decreases
below the value set at CON-72, the voltage increases again and the
frequency stops decelerating (t2 zone). When the normal frequency and
voltage are resumed, the speed search operation accelerates the motor
back to its frequency reference before the fault trip.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
257
Code Description
Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to “1” and ADV-10 (Power-on Run) to “1
(Yes)”. If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter operation
command is on, the speed search operation will accelerate the motor up to
the frequency reference.
CON-72 SS Sup-
Current
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation
based on the motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is set to “1 (Flying
Start-2)”, this code is not visible.
CON-73 SS P-Gain,
CON-74 SS I-Gain
The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70 (SS
Mode) is set to “1”(Flying Start-2), different factory defaults based on motor
capacity [at DRV-14 (Motor Capacity)] are used.
CON-75 SS Block
Time
The block time parameter prevents overvoltage trips due to counter
electromotive force by cutting off the inverter output for the set time before
carrying out a speed search.
Note
• If operated within the rated output, the iS7 series inverter is designed to withstand
instantaneous power interruptions of up to 15 ms and maintain normal operation [when 200–
230 V AC input voltage is supplied to 200 V class model types, and 380–460 V AC input voltage is
supplied to 400 V class model types, and when the inverter is operating with static load current
(CT load)].
• The DC voltage inside the inverter changes depending on the load. Low voltage fault trips may
result if the power interruption lasts longer than 15 ms, or the output voltage exceeds the rated
input voltage.
8.20 Auto Restart Settings
When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter
automatically restarts based on the parameter settings.
Group eCod Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range tUni
PRT
08 Select start at trip reset RST Restart
0 No
- -
1 Yes
09 Auto restart count Retry Number 6 0–10 -
Learning Advanced Features
258
Group
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range
Uni
t
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0.1–60.0 sec
CON
71 oSelect speed search
peration Speed Search - 0000–1111 bit
72 Speed search startup
current
SS Sup-
Current
Up to 75 kW 150
80–200 %
Over 75 kW 100
73 Speed search
proportional gain SS P-Gain 100 0–9999
74 Speed search integral
gain SS I-Gain 200 0–9999
75 Output block time
before speed search SS Block Time 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
Auto Restart Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-08
RST Restart Set PRT-08 to “1 (Yes)” to enable reset restart.
PRT-09
Retry Number,
PRT-10
Retry Delay
The number of available auto restarts can be set at PRT-09. If a fault trip
occurs during an operation, the inverter restarts after the time set at PRT-10
(Retry Delay). At each restart, the inverter counts the number of tries and
subtracts it from the number set at PRT-09 until the retry number count
reaches 0. After an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 sec, it
will increase the restart count number. The maximum count number is
limited by the number set at PRT-09.
If the inverter stops due to low voltage, an emergency stop, an inverter
overheating, or a hardware malfunction, auto restart is not activated.
At auto restart, the acceleration options are identical to those of the speed
search operation. Codes CON-72–75 can be set based on the load. For the
speed search function details, refer to 8.19 Speed Search Operation on page
254.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
259
[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]
If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The motor may
automatically start to rotate.
8.21 Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency
Settings)
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CON
04 Carrier
Frequency Carrier Freq 5.0 0.7–15.0 kHz
05 Switching Mode PWM* Mode 0 Normal PWM Normal PWM / Low
Adjusts motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings. Power
transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high frequency switching
voltage to the motor. The carrier frequency refers to the switching speed in
this process. If the carrier frequency is set high, it reduces operational noise
from the motor. If the carrier frequency is set low, it increases operational
Learning Advanced Features
260
Code Description
noise from the motor.
CON-05 PWM
Mode
The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by
changing the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting “1
(LowLeakage PWM)” reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to
when “0 (Normal PWM)” is selected. However, it increases the motor noise.
Low leakage PWM uses a two-phase PWM modulation mode, which helps
minimize degradation and reduces switching loss by approximately 30%.
Item
Carrier Frequency
0.7 kHz 15 kHz
LowLeakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Motor temperature ↑ ↓
Inverter heat Loss ↓ ↑
High frequency ↑ ↓
Inverter output current
wave form Bad Good
Inverter noise ↓ ↑
Inverter leakage current ↓ ↑
• The factory default carrier frequency for 90–160 kW model types is 3 kHz. The figure in the
red box (D: 5.0) is a factory default carrier frequency for models types up to 75 kW,
provided for your reference only.
• Since low carrier frequencies can transmit a much higher frequency than the capacity of
the output current, an increase in motor loss will occur. Some motors may stall due to
increased high frequency current and lack of torque may cause the inverter to stop.
• iS7 Series Inverter Derating Standard (Derating): The overload rate represents an acceptable
load amount that exceeds the rated load, and is expressed as a ratio based on the rated load
and the duration. The overload capacity on the iS7 series inverter is 110%/1 min for normal
loads.
• The current rating differs by load types, and it also has an ambient temperature limit.
• Current derating for ambient temperature at variable torque (VT) load operation:
• Current derating table by ambient temperature and carrier frequency:
Inverter Capacity 0.75–7.5kW 11–22kW 30–75kW
CT Load
Normal Temp. (25℃) 10 kHz 10 kHz 5 kHz
High Temp. (40℃) 7 kHz 7 kHz 4 kHz
High Temp. (50℃) 5 kHz 5 kHz 4 kHz
VT Load Normal Temp. (25℃) 7 kHz 7 kHz 3 kHz
High Temp. (40℃) 2 kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz
8.22 2nd Motor Operation
The 2nd motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors. Using the
2nd motor operation, a parameter for the second motor is set. The second motor operates
when a multi-function terminal input defined as a second motor function is turned on.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define(Px: P1–P8
[optional: P9–P11]) 26 2nd Motor - -
M2 04 2nd motor M2-Acc Time - 5.0 0–600 sec
Learning Advanced Features
262
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Settin g Range Unit
acceleration
time
2nd Motor Operation Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px
Define
Set one of the multi-function input terminals (P1–P11) to “26 (2nd Motor)” to
display the M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal sent to a multi-
function terminal set as the second motor will operate the motor according to
the code settings listed below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input
signals to the multi-function terminals will not read as a second motor
parameter.
• You can set the 2nd motor control mode at M2-08 (M2-Ctrl Mode). V/F PG
and Vector control modes are not supported with the 2nd motor
operation.
• PRT-50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2-28 (M2-Stall Lev)
settings can be used.
• PRT-40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before M2-29 (M2-ETH 1 min) and
M2-30 (M2-ETH Cont) settings can be used.
Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a Second Motor
Code Description Code Description
M2-04 Acc Time Acceleration time M2-15 M2-Efficiency Motor efficiency
M2-05 M2-Dec Time Deceleration time M2-17 M2-Rs Stator resistance
M2-06 M2-Capacity Motor capacity M2-18 M2-Lsigma Leakage inductance
M2-07 M2-Base Freq Motor base frequency M2-25 M2-V/F Patt V/F pattern
M2-08 M2-Ctrl Mode Control mode M2-26 M2-Fwd Boost Forward torque boost
M2-10 M2-Pole Num Pole number M2-27 M2-Rev Boost Reverse torque boost
M2-11 M2-Rate Slip Rated slip M2-28 M2-Stall Lev Stall prevention level
M2-12 M2-Rated Curr Rated current M2-29 M2-ETH 1 min Motor heat protection 1
min rating
M2-13 M2-Noload
Curr No-load current M2-30 M2-ETH Cont
Motor heat protection
continuous rating
M2-14 M2-Rated Volt Motor-rated voltage
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
263
Learning Advanced Features
264
Example - 2nd Motor Operation
Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operations between a 7.5 kW motor and a secondary
3.7 kW motor using terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Grou
p
Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
IN 67 Terminal P3
configuration P3 Define 26 2nd Motor - -
M2
06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity - 3.7 kW - -
08 Control mode M2-Ctrl Mode 0 V/F - -
8.23 Supply Power Transition
A supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to the
inverter from the inverter output power to the main supply power source (commercial power
source), or vice versa.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
P9–P11])
16 Exchange - -
OUT
31–32 Multi-function relay 1–2 Relay1–2 17 Inverter Line - -
33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line - -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
265
Supply Power Transition Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–75
Px Define
When the motor power source changes from the inverter output to the main
power supply, select a terminal to use and set the code value to “16
(Exchange)”. Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To
reverse the transition, switch off the terminal.
OUT-31 Relay 1,
OUT-32 Relay 2,
OUT-33 Q1
Define
Set the multi-function relay or multi-function output to “17 (Inverter Line)” or
“18 (Comm Line)”. The relay operation sequence is as follows.
8.24 Cooling Fan Control
This function turns the inverter’s heatsink cooling fan on and off. It is used in situations where
the load stops and starts frequently or when a noise-free environment is required. The correct
use of cooling fan controls can extend the cooling fan’s life.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 64 Cooling fan control Fan Control
0 During Run
1 Always On 0–2 -
2 Temp Control
Learning Advanced Features
266
Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings
C ode Description
ADV-64 Fan
Control
Settings Description
0 During Run
The cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is on. The cooling
fan stops when the power is supplied to the inverter
and the operation command is off. When the inverter
heat sink temperature is higher than its set value, the
cooling fan operates automatically regardless of its
operation status.
1 Always On The cooling fan runs constantly if power is supplied to
the inverter.
2 Temp
Control
With power connected and the run operation
command on: if the setting is in Temp Control, the
cooling fan will not operate unless the temperature in
the heat sink reaches the set temperature.
Note
In 11–75 kW model types, if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by input current
harmonic waves or noise, the cooling fan may run to protect the inverter even when ADV-64 is set
to “0 (During Run)”.
8.25 Input Power Frequency Settings
Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 60 Hz to 50 Hz, all
other frequency (or RPM) settings, including the maximum frequency, base frequency, etc., will
change to 50 Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting from 50 Hz to 60 Hz will
change all related function item settings from 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 10 Input power
frequency 60/50 Hz Sel 0 60 Hz 0–1 -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
267
8.26 Input Power Voltage Settings
Set the inverter input power voltage. The low voltage fault trip level changes automatically
according to the set voltage standard.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 19 Input power voltage AC Input
Volt
200 Type 220 170–230
V
400 Type 380 380–480
8.27 Read, Write, and Save Parameters
Use read, write, and save parameter functions to copy parameters from the inverter to the
keypad or from the keypad to the inverter.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF
Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-46 Parameter Read
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved
parameters on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with the copied
parameters.
CNF-47 Parameter Write
Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with the copied
parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, the previously
saved data will be used. If there is no saved data on the keypad, “EEP
Rom Empty” will be displayed.
CNF-48 Parameter Save
As parameters set during communication transmission are saved in
RAM, the setting values will be lost if the power turns off and on. When
setting parameters during communication transmission, select “1 (Yes)”
at CNF-48 to save the set parameters.
Learning Advanced Features
268
8.28 Parameter Initialization
U ser changes to parameters can be initialized (reset) to factory default settings on all or
selected groups. Parameters cannot be reset during operation or a fault trip condition.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 40 iParameter
Initialize all data. Select “1 (All
Grp)” and press the
[PROG/ENT] key to start
initialization. On completion, “0
(No)” will be displayed.
2 Initialize DRV group DRV Grp
Initialize data by groups. Select
Initialize group and press the
[PROG/ENT] key to start
initialization. On completion, “0
(No)” will be displayed.
3 Initialize BAS group BAS Grp
4 Initialize ADV group ADV Grp
5 Initialize CON group CON Grp
6 Initialize IN group IN Grp
7 Initialize OUT group OUT Grp
8 Initialize COM group COM Grp
9 Initialize APP group APP Grp
10 Initialize AUT group AUT Grp
11 Initialize APO group APO Grp
12 Initialize PRT group PRT Grp
13 Initialize M2 group M2 Grp
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
269
8.29 Parameter Viewing and Lock Options
8.29.1 Parameter View Lock
Use parameter view lock to hide parameter mode (PAR mode) after registering and entering a
user password. Other modes (CNF, U&M, MAC and TRP modes) will still be visible when the
parameter view lock is enabled.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow the steps
below to register a password.
No Procedure
1
Press the [PROG/ENT] key on code CNF-51 to show the previous
password input window. If a password is being registered for the
first time, enter “0”. It is the factory default.
2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3
If the entered password matches the saved password, a new
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until the
user enters a valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, code CNF-51 (View Lock PW) will be displayed.
CNF-50 View Lock
Set
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. The [Locked]
sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter view lock is
enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the password. The
[locked] sign will disappear, and PAR mode becomes visible again.
Learning Advanced Features
270
8.29.2 Parameter Lock
U se parameter lock to prevent unauthorized modification of parameter settings. To enable
parameter lock, register and enter a user password first.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No Procedures
1
Press the [PROG/ENT] key on code CNF-53 to display the saved
password input window. If a password is being registered for the
first time, enter “0”. It is the factory default.
2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
3
If the entered password matches the saved password, then a new
window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The process will
not progress to the next stage until the user enters a valid
password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, code CNF-53 will be displayed.
CNF-52 Key Lock
Set
To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. The [Locked] sign
will be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled. Once
enabled, pressing the [PROG/ENT] key will not allow the edit mode to run. To
disable parameter lock, re-enter the password. The [Locked] sign will
disappear.
If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
271
8.29.3 Changed Parameter Display
This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this
feature to track changed parameters.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 41 Changed parameter
display Changed Para 1 View Changed - -
Changed Parameter Display Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-41
Changed Para
Setting Function
0 View All Display all parameters
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only
8.30 User Group
Create a user-defined group and register user-selected parameters from the existing function
groups. The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64 parameter registrations.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF
42 Multi-function key
settings Multi Key Sel 3 UserGrp SelKey - -
45 rDelete all user
egistered codes UserGrp AllDel 0 No - -
User Group Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-42 Multi Key Sel
Selects “3 (UserGrp SelKey)” from the multi-function key setting options. If
user group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function key
to the user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display user group
(USR Grp) items on the keypad.
Learning Advanced Features
272
Code Description
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
No Procedure
1 Set CNF- 42 to “3 (UserGrp SelKey)”. The icon will be displayed
at the top of the LCD display.
2
In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter you
need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example, if the
[MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in DRV-01 (Cmd
Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.
❶ Group name and code number of the parameter.
❷ Name of the parameter.
❸ Code number to be used in the user group. Pressing the
[PROG/ENT] key on the code number (40 Code) will register DRV-01
as code 40 in the user group.
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40.
❺ Setting range of the user group code. Entering “0” cancels the
settings.
3 ❸ Set a code number to use to register the parameter in the user
group. Select the code number and press the [PROG/ENT] key.
4
Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If no
code is registered, “Empty Code” will be displayed. Entering “0”
cancels the settings.
5
The registered parameters are listed in the user group in U&M
mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if necessary.
For example, a parameter can be registered as code 2, code 11, etc.
in the user group.
Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group.
No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to “3 (UserGrp SelKey)”. The icon will be displayed
at the top of the LCD display.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
273
Code Description
2 In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the code that
is to be deleted.
3 Press the [MULTI] key.
4 Select “YES” on the deletion confirmation screen, and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
5 The parameter is deleted.
CNF-25 UserGrp
AllDel Set to “1 (Yes)” to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
8.31 Macro Selection
The macro selection function is used to put various application functions together in a group.
For applications with the iS7 series inverters, two basic macro configurations for “Draw”* and
“Traverse” applications (MC1 and MC2) are currently available in U&M mode. Macro functions
cannot be added by the user, but the data can be modified.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 43 Macro selection Macro Select
0 None
1 Draw 0–2 -
2 Traverse
*The draw application is an open loop tension control which maintains a stable tension load applied
to the material by utilizing the difference between the main reference and the auxiliary reference
(Refer to 8.1 Operating with Auxiliary References on page 198 for details).
A list of macro settings is displayed for user selection. When a macro function is
selected, all the related parameters are automatically changed based on the
inverter’s macro settings.
Learning Advanced Features
274
8.32 Easy Start
Run Easy Start to easily set up the basic motor parameters required to operate a motor in a
batch. Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to “1 (Yes)” to activate the feature, initialize all parameters by
setting CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to “1 (All Grp)”, and restart the inverter to activate Easy Start.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 61 Parameter easy
start settings Easy Start On 1 Yes - -
Easy Start Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-61 Easy Start On
Follow the procedures listed below to set the Easy Start parameters.
No Procedures
1 Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to “1 (Yes)”.
2 Set CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to “1 (All Grp)” to initialize all parameters
in the inverter.
3
Restarting the inverter will activate Easy Start. Set the values in the
following screens on the keypad. To exit Easy Start, press the [ESC]
key.
Start Easy Set: Select “Yes”.
CNF-01 Language Sel: Select a language.
DRV-30 kW/HP Select : select the capacity of the unit.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.
BAS-11 Pole Number: Set motor pole number.
BAS-15 Rated Volt: Set motor rated voltage.
BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel: Set motor rated frequency.
BAS-19 AC Input Volt: Set input voltage.
DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set command source.
DRV-01 Cmd Frequency: Set frequency reference.
When the settings are complete, the minimum parameter settings
on the motor have been made. The keypad will return to a
monitoring display. Now the motor can be operated with the
command source set at DRV-06.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
275
8.33 Config (CNF) Mode
The config mode parameters are used to configure keypad-related features.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF*
2 LCD brightness/
contrast adjustment LCD Contrast - -
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver x.xx -
11 Keypad S/W version Keypad S/W
Ver x.xx - -
12 Keypad title version KPD Title Ver x.xx - -
30–32 Power slot type Option-x Type None - -
41 Display changed
parameters Changed Para 0 View All 0–1 -
44 Erase trip history Erase All Trip No - -
60 Add title update Add Title Up No - -
62 Initialize accumulated
electrical energy
WH Count
Reset No - -
74 fAccumulated cooling
an operation time Fan Time 00:00:00
75
Accumulated cooling
fan operation time
initialization
Fan Time Rst 0 No
Config Mode Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-2 LCD Contrast Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the keypad.
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver,
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver Checks the OS version in the inverter and on the keypad.
CNF-12 KPD Title Ver Checks the title version on the keypad.
CNF-30–32 Option-x Type Checks the type of option board installed in the option slot.
CNF-41 Changed Para Displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults.
Learning Advanced Features
276
Code Description
C NF-44 Erase All Trip Deletes the stored trip history.
CNF-60 Add Title UP
When the inverter SW version is updated and more code is added, CNF-
60 settings will add, display, and operate the added codes. Set CNF-60
to “1 (Yes)” and disconnect the keypad from the inverter. Reconnecting
the keypad to the inverter updates titles.
CNF-62 WH Count Reset Initialize the accumulated electrical energy consumption count.
CNF-74 Fan Time Displays the accumulated cooling fan operation time.
CNF-75 Fan Time Rst Initialize the accumulated cooling fan operation time at CNF-74.
8.34 Timer Settings
Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer and set the On/Off controls to the multi-function
outputs and relays according to the timer settings.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
Setting
Timer Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px Define Selects one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a timer
terminal by setting it to “38 (Timer In)”.
OUT-31 Relay 1,
OUT-36 Q1 Define
Sets the multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer to
“28 (Timer out)”.
Inputs a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output
(Timer out) after the time set at OUT-55 has passed. When the multi-
function input terminal is off, the multi-function output or relay turns off
after the time set at OUT-56.
8.35 Auto Sequence Operation
Create operation sequences that can be automatically run using terminal inputs. You can
configure up to two sequences for automated inverter operation.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
APP 01 Applied function
selection APP Mode 4
Auto
Sequence 0–4 -
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
P9–P11])
41 SEQ-1
0–51 -
42 SEQ-2
43 Manual
44 Go Step
45 Hold Step
OUT
31–32 Multi-function relay
1–2 Relay 1–2 20 Step Pulse - -
33 Multi-function
output 1 Q1 Define 21 Seq Pulse - -
AUT
01 Auto operation
type Auto Mode
0 Auto-A
-
1 Auto-B
02 Auto operation
terminal delay time Auto Check - 0.10 0.02-2.00 Sec
Learning Advanced Features
278
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
04 Number of
sequence 1 steps* Step Number 1 - 2 1–8 -
04 Number of
*The same parameter setting is required for each step (eight steps max.) at AUT-10–AUT-74.
Auto Sequence Operation Details
Code Description
APP-01 APP Mode
Sets APP-01 to “4 (Auto Sequence)”. Auto sequence group (AUT group)
parameters become visible. In an auto sequence group, you can set the
type of sequence operation, acc/dec times, and rotation direction for
each step.
Setting Function mode
0 None
1 Traverse
2 Proc PID
3 Reserved
4 Auto Sequence
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
279
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px Define
Selects the multi-function input terminals to assign auto sequence
functions.
Setting Functions Description
41 SEQ-1 Runs sequence-1 operation.
42 SEQ-2 Runs sequence-2 operation.
43 Manual
Operates the inverter with the command
source and frequency reference source set at
DRV-06 and DRV-07.
44 Go Step
In sequence operation mode, if the auto
sequence operation type at AUT-01 is set to “1
(Auto-B)” and the terminal is on while the
motor is stopped, the next step is operated.
45 Hold Step
In sequence operation mode, if the auto
sequence operation type at AUT-01 is set to “0
(Auto-A)” and the terminal is on, the current
step operation is maintained.
OUT-31 Relay 1–2 Set one of the multi-function output relays to “20 (Step Pulse)” to produce
a pulse output (100 ms) at each step change.
OUT-36 Q1 Define Set the multi-function output terminal to “21 (Seq Pulse)” to produce a
pulse output (100 ms) at the last step of a sequence.
AUT-01 Auto Mode
Select the auto sequence operation type.
Setting Functions Description
0 Auto-A
Runs all the steps in a sequence automatically
when a signal is received at a multi-function
terminal set for SEQ-1 or SEQ-2.
1 Auto-B
While a signal is received at a multi-function
terminal set for SEQ-1 or SEQ-2, the operation
proceeds to the next step each time a terminal
input is received at the multi-function terminal
set to “44 (Go Step)”.
AUT-02 Auto Check
Sets the time for the inverter to recognize simultaneous inputs for SEQ-1
and SEQ-2. The inputs are regarded to be simultaneous if the second
signal is received within the set time after the first signal is received.
AUT-04 Step Number
Sets the number of steps in a sequence. Parameters for setting step
frequency, acc/dec times, and rotational direction become visible
depending on the number of steps.
AUT-10 Seq 1/1 Freq Sets the operation frequency for step 1. “1/1” indicates
“sequence#/step#.”
Learning Advanced Features
280
Code Description
2Fo/1r Ferxeaqm.”ple, sequence-2 begins operation with the set frequency at “Seq
AUT-11 Seq 1/1 XcelT
Sets the acceleration or deceleration time for the step. Acceleration or
deceleration times indicate the time it takes for the operation frequency
to transit to the next step frequency.
AUT-12 Seq 1/1 StedT Sets the time duration for the inverter to maintain the reference
frequency set at AUT-10.
AUT-13 Seq 1/1 Dir Sets the rotational direction for the step.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
281
8.36 Traverse Operation
The traverse operation is used to periodically change the motor rotation. In its application as a
winder, the traverse operation ensures that the thread or wire is evenly wound on a spindle
without tangles.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
lower limit Trv Offset Lo - 0.0 0–20.0 %
IN 65–75 Px terminal
configuration
Px Define
(Px: P1–P8
[optional:
P9–P11])
27 Trv Offset
Lo - -
28 Trv Offset Hi - -
Traverse Operation Details
Code Description
APP-01 APP Mode
Set APP-01 to “1 (Traverse)”. Parameters for the traverse operation
become visible.
Setting Function mode
0 None
1 Traverse
2 Proc PID
3 Reserved
4 Auto Sequence
Learning Advanced Features
282
Code Description
A PP-08 Trv Amplit % Sets the operation frequency for the scramble operation as a percentage
of the inverter’s frequency reference.
APP-09 Trv Scramb %
Sets the scramble frequency (frequency jump volume at the beginning of
a deceleration) for traverse operation as a percentage of the traverse
operation frequency.
APP-10 Trv Acc Time,
APP-11 Trv Dec Time Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for the traverse operation.
APP-12 Trv Offset Hi
Sets the high offset amount for the traverse operation as a percentage of
the inverter’s frequency reference.
After setting one of the multi-function terminals to “28 (Trv Offset Hi)”,
the offset value is added to the traverse operation frequency when the
terminal input is on.
APP-13 Trv Offset Lo
Sets the low offset amount for traverse operation as a percentage of the
inverter’s frequency reference.
After setting one of the multi-function terminals to “27 (Trv Offset Lo)”,
the offset value is deducted from the traverse operation frequency when
the terminal input is on.
8.37 Brake Control
Brake control is used to control the On/Off operation of the electronic brake load system.
Check the inverter’s control mode set at DRV-09 before configuring the brake control sequence
as the operation sequence varies by the control mode.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F - -
When the brake control is activated, DC braking (ADV-12) at inverter
start and dwell operation (ADV-20–23) do not operate.
Brake Operation Sequence in Control Modes Other than
“Vector”
During the motor stop state, if an operation command is entered,
the inverter accelerates up to the brake release frequency (ADV-44–
45) in a forward or reverse direction.
After reaching the brake release frequency, if the motor current
reaches the brake release current (BR Rls Curr), the output relay or
multi-function output terminal for brake control sends a release
signal.
Once the signal has been sent, acceleration will begin after
maintaining the frequency for the brake release delay time (ADV-42
BR Rls Dly).
If a stop command is sent during operation, the motor decelerates.
Once the output frequency reaches the brake engage frequency (ADV-
47 BR Eng Fr), the motor stops decelerating and sends out a brake
engage signal to a preset output terminal.
The frequency is maintained for the brake engage delay time (ADV-47
BR Eng Dly) and it becomes “0” afterwards. If the DC braking time (ADV-
15) and DC braking resistance (ADV-16) are set, the inverter output is
blocked after DC braking. For more details on DC braking, refer to
7.17.2 Stop after DC Braking on page 187.
Learning Advanced Features
284
Code Description
Brake Operation Sequence in “Vector” control Mode
When an operational command is entered, the output relay or
multi-function output terminal for brake control sends a brake
release signal after the pre-excitation time is passed. Once the
signal has been sent, acceleration will begin after the brake release
delay time (ADV-42 BR Rls Dly) has passed.
If a stop command is sent during operation, the inverter
decelerates to “0 Hz” and sends out a brake engage signal. Then,
the output is cut off after the brake engage delay time (ADV-46 BR
Eng Dly) has passed.
The brake engage sequence does not operate in torque control
mode.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
285
8.38 Multi-function Output On/Off Control
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
66
Output contact
On/Off control
options
On/Off Ctrl Src 1 V1 0–4 -
67 Output contact
point On level On-C Level - 90.00 10–100 %
68 Output contact
point Off level Off-C Level - 10.00
0–Output
contact on level %
OUT 31–
33
Multi-function
relay, Multi-
function output 1
Relay x or Q1 34 On/Off
Control - -
Multi-function Output On/Off Control Details
Code Description
If the analog input value exceeds the set value, the output relay or
multi-function output terminal can be turned on or off.
Select the analog input to use for On/Off control at ADV-66 and set
the levels at which the output terminal is on and off at ADV-67 and
68 respectively.
If the analog input value exceeds the value set at ADV-67, the
output terminal is on. If the analog input is below the value set at
ADV-68, the output terminal is off.
8.39 MMC function
The MMC (Multiple Motor Control) function is used to control multiple motors of a pump
system. The main motor connected with the inverter output is controlled by the PID controller.
The auxiliary motors are connected with the supply power and turned on and off by the relay
within the inverter.
The relay for controlling auxiliary motors uses Relay 1 and 2 in the standard I/O module
embedded in the inverter and multi-function output terminal Q1. If the I/O expansion option
module is connected to the inverter option slot, up to 3 relay outputs can be used.
Learning Advanced Features
286
Group Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
APP 01 Application mode App Mode 3 MMC - -
APO
20 nAux motor rotation
umber Aux Motor Run - 0 0–4 -
21 Starting aux motor
selection Starting Aux - 1 1–4 -
22 Auto operation time Auto Op Time - 0:00 xx:xx Min
23 1st aux motor
starting frequency Start Freq 1 - 49.99 0–60 Hz
24 2nd aux motor
starting frequency Start Freq 2 - 49.99 0–60 Hz
25 3rd aux motor
starting frequency Start Freq 3 - 49.99 0–60 Hz
26 4th aux motor
starting frequency Start Freq 4 - 49.99 0–60 Hz
27 1st aux motor stop
frequency Stop Freq 1 - 15.00 0–60 Hz
28 2nd aux motor stop
frequency Stop Freq 2 - 15.00 0–60 Hz
29 3rd aux motor stop
frequency Stop Freq 3 - 15.00 0–60 Hz
30 3th aux motor stop
frequency Stop Freq 4 - 15.00 0–60 Hz
31 Aux motor starting
delay time Aux Start DT - 60.0 0–3600.0 Sec
32 dAux motor stop
elay time Aux Stop DT - 60.0 0–3600.0 Sec
APO
33 Aux motor number
selection Num of Aux - 4 0–4 -
34 Bypass selection Regul Bypass 0 No 0–1 -
35 Auto change mode
selection Auto Ch Mode 0 Aux
None/Aux/Mai
n -
36 Auto change time Auto Ch Time - 72:00 0–99:00 Min
38 Interlock selection Interlock 0 No 0–1 -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
287
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
39 Interlock movement
delay time Interlock DT - 5.0 0.1–360.0 Sec
40 Aux motor rotation
pressure difference Actual Pr Diff - 2 0–100% %
41
Main motor
acceleration time
when the number of
pumps decreases
Aux Acc Time - 2.0 0.0–600.0 Sec
42
Main motor
deceleration time
when the number of
pumps increases
Aux Dec Time - 2.0 0.0–600.0 Sec
OUT
31–
33
Multi-function relay,
Multi-function
output 1
Relay x or Q1 24 MMC - -
34–
36
Qx terminal
configuration Qx Define 24 MMC - -
Learning Advanced Features
288
8.39.1 Basic MMC Operation
C ode Description
APP-01 APP Mode
If “3 (MMC)” is selected for the applied function, the items related to
the MMC function are displayed in the option module function
group (APO) and the functions related to the PID controller are
displayed in APP.
APO-20, 21, 33
If the number of auxiliary motors is set at APO-33 and there is more
than one auxiliary motor, the auxiliary motor number for the first
operation should be APO-21. For example, if there are three
auxiliary motors and each of them is controlled by Relay 1 and 2
and the Q1 terminal, the auxiliary motors operate in the sequence
of Relay 2, Q1, and then Relay 1 when”2” is input at APO-21. The
auxiliary motors stop in the sequence of Relay 1, Q1, and Relay 2. At
APO-20, the number of currently operating auxiliary motors can be
monitored.
APO-23–26 Start Freq 1–
4
Sets the starting frequency for auxiliary motors. Since the main
motor is operated by the PID controller, its operating frequency is
increased by the load change and the operation for an auxiliary
motor becomes necessary. The conditions of the inverter output
terminal I (Relay or multi-function output [Qx]) that turns on for
auxiliary motor operation is as follows. The auxiliary motor can
operate when
• The speed of the main motor exceeds the starting frequency (APO-
23–26) of the auxiliary motor.
• The starting delay time (APO-13) of the auxiliary motor passes.
• The difference between the reference and the feedback of the
main motor PID controller becomes smaller than the pressure
difference (APO-40) of the auxiliary motor motion.
APO-27–30 Stop Freq 1–4
Sets the stop frequency for auxiliary motors. If the operating
frequency for the main motor decreases below a certain frequency
while the auxiliary motor is running, the auxiliary motor should be
stopped. The condition of the auxiliary motor to be stopped is as
follows. The auxiliary motor can be stopped when
• The speed of the main motor decreases below the stop frequency
(APO-27–30) for the auxiliary motor.
• The stop delay time (APO-32) for the auxiliary motor passes.
• The difference between the reference and the feedback of the
main motor PID controller becomes larger than the pressure
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
289
Code Description
difference (APO-40) of the auxiliary motor operation.
APO-41 Aux Acc Time,
APO-42 Aux Dec Time
The main motor stops PID control and operates the normal
acceleration and deceleration when the auxiliary motor runs or
stops. When the auxiliary motor runs, the main motor decelerates
to the decelerating frequency of the auxiliary motor for the
decelerating time set at APO-42. Inversely, when the auxiliary
motor stops, the main motor accelerates to the starting frequency
for the accelerating time set at APO-41.
Learning Advanced Features
290
8.39.2 Auto Change Operation
The auto change function enables the inverter to automatically switch operations between
main and auxiliary motors. Prolonged continuous operation of a motor reduces motor
performance. The auto change function switches the motors automatically when certain
conditions are met to avoid biased use of certain motors and protect them from deterioration.
Code Description
APO-35 Auto
Ch Mode
Selects the motors to apply the auto change function.
0: None
The operation sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor
selected at APO-21(starting auxiliary motor selection) and the automatic
change function is not active.
1: Aux
The operation sequence of the auxiliary motor starts with the auxiliary motor
selected in APO-21(starting auxiliary motor selection). When the cumulative
operating time for a main and auxiliary motor exceeds the auto change time
(APO-36), the auto change condition is met. If the main motor is stopped by a
stop command or the sleep operation mode after the auto change condition,
the start sequence of the auxiliary motor selected at APO-21 is changed.
For example, if there are four auxiliary motors operating and motor 4 is
selected in APO-21, the start sequence of the auxiliary motor automatically
changes to motor 1. Therefore, the previous start sequence of the auxiliary
motor of 4, 1, 2, and 3 changes to 1, 2, 3, and 4, and if the auto change
condition is met, the sequence is changed to 2, 3, 4, and 1.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
291
Code Description
2: Main
Auto change is available without distinction between the main and auxiliary
motors. The auto change condition is met if the cumulative operating time for
the motor connected to the inverter output exceeds the auto change time
(APO-36).
If the inverter is stopped by a stop command or sleep operation mode, the
operating sequence of the motor automatically changes. For example, if the
starting auxiliary motor selection (APO-21) is set at “2”, the inverter output is
connected to motor 2. If there are four motors and the auxiliary motor
operating condition is met, motors 3, 4, and 1 start operating one after
another in sequence. If the inverter stops in the auto change condition, motor
3 is connected to the inverter output in the next restart and the auxiliary
motors operate in the sequence of 4, 1, and 2.
Learning Advanced Features
292
Code Description
8.39.3 Interlock Operation
When there is motor trouble, the interlock feature is used to stop the affected motor and
replace it with another that is not currently operating (i.e. in the off state). To activate the
interlock feature, connect the cables to send abnormal motor signals to the inverter input
terminal and configure the terminals as interlock 1–4 inputs. Then, the inverter decides the
motor’s availability based on the signal inputs. The order in which the alternative motor is
selected is decided based on the auto change mode selection options set at APO-35.
Code Description
IN-65–75 Px Define
The terminal to use as the interlock among IN 65–72 (up to 75 if
there is an I/O expansion module) is selected and Interlock 1–4 are
set depending on the motor sequence.
If the auto change mode selection (APO-35) is set to “0 (None)” or “1
(Aux)” and if auxiliary motors 1, 2, and 3 are connected to inverter
output terminals Relay 1, 2, and Q1 when a total of four motors
including the main motor is operating, the interlock numbers 1, 2,
and 3 correspond to the motor connected to Relay 1, 2, and Q1.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
293
Code Description
However, if the auto change mode selection (APO-35) is set to “2
(Main)” and the main and auxiliary motors are connected to
inverter output terminals Relay1, 2, Q1, and Q2 (I/O expansion
module used) respectively, Interlock 1, 2, 3 and 4 correspond to the
motors connected to Relay 1, 2, Q1 and Q2.
APO-38 Interlock
Select “1 (Yes)” to enable an interlock operation.
1) If there are five motors and the auto change mode selection
(APO-35) is set to” 0 (None)” or “1 (Aux)”, the operation is as follows:
If signals are sent to the terminal block set at Interlock 3 with a fault
at motor 3 when it is static, the auxiliary motors operate in the
sequence of 1, 2, and 4 (when the starting auxiliary motor selection
APO-21 is “1”). If the terminal block signals are released, the
operation sequence is 1, 2, 3, and 4.
If signals are sent to the terminal for Interlock 3, auxiliary motor 3
stops and auxiliary motor 4 operates. If the interlock signal is
released, auxiliary motor 4 stops and auxiliary motor 3 operates
again.
2) If there are four motors and the auto change mode selection
(APO-35) is set to “2 (Main)”, the operation is as follows:
If the starting auxiliary motor selection APO-21 is set to “1”, motor 1
is operated by the inverter and the remaining motors (2, 3, and 4)
are operated by the auxiliary motors and interlock signals are sent
to the auxiliary motors, the operation sequence is the same as the
procedure described in condition 1) above.
However, if there is a problem with motor 1, which is connected to
the inverter, the output is immediately blocked and motor 2
becomes connected to the inverter output and the operation
sequence of the auxiliary motor is 3 and 4. If the interlock signal of
motor 1 is released, the operation sequence of the auxiliary motor
is 3, 4, and 1.
Learning Advanced Features
294
8.39.4 Bypass Operation (Regular Bypass)
This function controls the motor speed based on the feedback amount instead of using the PID
controller. Auxiliary motors may be controlled with this feature based on the feedback amount.
Code Description
APP-34 Regular
Bypass
Select “1 (Yes)” to enable regular bypass.
If there are four main motors and auxiliary motors (APP-33) in total, the
operation is as follows. If the feedback input value is between 0–10 V and
the operating frequency of the maximum input value (10 V) is 60 Hz,
auxiliary motor 1 starts operation when the feedback amount is 2.5 V (15
Hz of main motor operating frequency).
If the feedback amount reaches 5 V again, auxiliary motor 2 operates. At
the maximum input of 10 V, all three auxiliary motors operate.
( 33)
Maximumfeedback amount
Operation level of auxiliary motor n
n The number of auxiliary motor APO
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
295
8.40 Press Regeneration Prevention (To evade control
operation in the status of regeneration during
press)
Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, the motor
operation speed automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration zone.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV
73 Regeneration
evasion mode
RegenAvd
Mode 000-111 001 Bit
74
Regeneration
evasion function
for press
selection
RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0–1 -
75
Press
regeneration
prevention
operation
voltage level
RegenAvd Level
350 200 V class: 300–
400
V
700 400 V class: 600–
800
76
Press
regeneration
prevention
compensation
frequency limit
Set the motor operation mode to decide when the regeneration
evasion function is activated.
ADV-74 RegenAvd Sel
(select regeneration
evasion function for
press)
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during a constant
speed motor operation may put excessive stress on the brake unit, which
may damage or shorten brake life. To prevent this, select ADV-74
(RegenAvd Sel) to control DC link voltage and disable the brake unit
operation.
ADV-75 RegenAvd
Level (set regeneration
evasion level for press)
Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage
goes up due to regeneration.
ADV-76 CompFreq
Limit (limit
regeneration evasion
compensation
frequency for press)
Set an alternative frequency width that can replace the actual operation
frequency during regeneration prevention.
ADV-77 RegenAvd P
gain
Set a P gain for regeneration evasion compensation function.
To avoid the regeneration zone, set P-Gain in the DC link voltage
suppress PI controller.
ADV-78 RegenAvd I
gain
Set an I gain for regeneration evasion compensation function.
To avoid the regeneration zone, set I gain in the DC link voltage suppress
PI controller.
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during acceleration or deceleration; it only
operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is activated, the
output frequency may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).
8.41 Anti-Hunting Regulator
Group Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CON 90
Function selection for
preventing current
hunting
New AHR Sel. 1 Yes - -
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
297
Group Cod
e Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
91 Gain from current
hunting prevention AHR P-Gain 1000 0–32767 -
This function is used to prevent the hunting of a V/F controlled fan or motor caused by current
distortion or oscillation due to mechanical resonance or other reasons. You can set the hunting
prevention function (CON-90) to prevent current hunting.
CON-91 AHR P-Gain: Increasing AHR proportional gain improves the responsiveness of the
anti-hunting regulation. However, current oscillation may result if AHR proportional gain is set
too high.
8.42 Fire Mode
This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency situations,
such as fire, and provides continuous operation to protect other systems, such as ventilation
fans. When fire mode is activated, the inverter operates continuously based on the set
frequency and direction.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
ADV
80 Fire mode
selection Fire Mode Sel
0 None
0–2
-
1 Fire Mode
-
2 Fire Test
81 Fire mode
frequency Fire Mode Freq 60.00 Hz
82
Fire mode
operating
direction
Fire Mode Dir
0 Forward
0–1
-
-
1 Reverse
83 Fire mode
counter Fire Mode Cnt 0 - -
IN 65–
75
Px terminal
configuration Px Define 51 - -
OUT 31–
33
Relay1,2 and
Q1 Relay1,2 / Q1 37 - -
Learning Advanced Features
298
Fi re Mode Details
Code Description
ADV-80 Fire Mode Sel
When you select function 1-Fire Mode, ADV-81–83 is displayed. In the
above settings, if “51 (Fire Mode)" in IN-65–75 is on, fire mode operates.
During the fire mode operation status, a “fire mode” warning occurs.
During fire mode operation, the inverter’s frequency and operation
direction is performed in the value set for fire mode with the previously
set control mode.
ADV-81 Fire Mode Freq Set the operation frequency for fire mode.
ADV-82 Fire Mode Dir Set the run direction for fire mode operation.
ADV-80 Fire Mode Sel
If the mode is set to “2-Fire Test”, related items for the fire function (ADV-
81–83) are displayed. In the above settings, if “51 (Fire Mode)” in IN-65–75
is on, fire mode operates. The basic operation is the same as fire mode.
However, ADV-83 is not counted in fire test mode. Also, all fault trips
occur without ignoring them.
If a fault occurs during fire mode operation, the fault trip is ignored and the inverter
continuously operates. However, if a critical fault occurs, the inverter performs the trip
operation or auto restart operation. The auto restart is performed after PRT-10 Retry Delay is
set.
If the inverter performs the fire mode operation when the inverter is in normal status after the
auto restart, the inverter will operate via the speed search.
Fire mode cannot be set while in torque mode. Therefore, fire mode can only be set when the
inverter is in speed or operation mode.
In fire mode, the operation for fault trips is listed in the following table.
Operation in the event of fault trips Fault trips
Fault trips that are ignored
Low Voltage , Over Load, Under Load, Inverter OLT, E-
Thermal, Out Phase Open, In Phase Open, Over Speed,
Speed Dev Trip, NTC Open, Over Heat, Fuse Open, Thermal
Trip, Fan Trip, BX, Lost Command, Lost Keypad, Low
Voltage2, etc.
Learning Advanced Features
Advanced
Features
299
Operation in the event of fault trips Fault trips
Auto restart after fault trips Ground Trip, Over Current1, Over Voltage
Trip operation H/W-Diag, Over Current2, Safety Opt Err
Fire mode operation voids the product warranty. To test fire mode not to increase the fire mode
operation count at ADV-83, set ADV-80 to “2-Fire Test” and operate the inverter.
If the multi-function terminal input set to “51 (Fire Mode)” is on when ADV-83 is set to “1 (Fire
Mode)”, the count value set at ADV-83 is increased by 1.
8.43 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Operation
Reference Voltage
Depending on the capacity, the iS7 series is divided into models with a braking resistor circuit
integrated inside the inverter, and models that require an external braking unit to be installed.
The inverters rated between 0.75–22 kW have the built-in braking model (except for the brake
resistor), and the inverters rated above 30 kW require an external braking unit. Therefore, the
reference voltage setting function for the braking resistor is necessary for inverters rated
below 22 kW.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display
Parameter
Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 79
DB unit
operating
voltage
DB Turn On Lev
390 V 200 V Type: 350–400 V
V
780 V 400 V Type: 600–800 V
ADV-79 DB Turn On Lev: This is the operation reference voltage for the braking resistor. The
braking resistor operates when the DC link voltage exceeds the reference value.
The initial value for 200 V-type inverters is 390 V, and the initial value for 400 V-type inverters is
780 V.
For 200 V-type inverters, the reference voltage that stops the braking resistor is 10 V lower than
the operating voltage set at ADV-79. For 400 V-type inverters, the braking resistor stops if the
300
voltage is 20 V lower than the operating voltage set at ADV-79.
If the set value for ADV-79 is lower than the DC link voltage when the inverter is in normal
operation, the DB resistor may overheat due to continuous DB resistor operation.
Conversely, if the set value at ADV-79 is much higher than the DC link voltage range, an overvoltage
trip may occur because the DB resistor does not operate when it is needed.
Example) If the input voltage is 440 V and the value at ADV-79 is set to 600 V, the DB resistor
operates when the inverter is on because the DC link voltage is 622 V. Since the voltage level that
stops the DB resistor is 590 V, the DB resistor may overheat due to continuous DB resistor
operation.
8.44 kW/HP Unit Selection
Select the units between kW and HP for the capacity of the inverter and motor.
Grou
p Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 30 kW/HP unit
selection KW/HP Select
0 kW
0-1 -
1 HP
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
301
9 Using Monitor Functions
9.1 Monitoring the Operating Status via the Keypad
You can monitor the operating status using the keypad of the inverter. You can select the
desired items to monitor in Config mode (CNF), view three items at a time in Monitor mode,
and select an item on the status display.
9.1.1 Selecting Monitor Mode Display
Mode Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
CNF
- 21 Monitor Line-1 0 Frequency Hz
- 22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current A
- 23 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage V
24 Mon Mode Init 0 No -
Select the items to monitor in Monitor mode. Monitor mode is displayed when
the inverter is powered on. Also, all three items in Monitor Line-1–3 can be
displayed simultaneously. Select an item for the line to display. If “Yes” is set at
CNF-24 (Mon Mode Init), CNF-21–23 will be initialized.
Setting Function
0 Frequency Displays the set frequency while stopped. During
operation, it displays the actual output frequency
(Hz).
1 Speed Displays the set speed (rpm) while stopped. During
operation, it displays the actual operating speed
(rpm).
2 Output Current Displays the output current.
3 Output Voltage Displays the output voltage.
4 Output Power Displays the output power.
Using Monitor Functions
302
Code Description
5 WHour Counter Displays the inverter’s power consumption.
6 DCLink Voltage Displays the inverter’s DC link voltage.
7 DI Status Displays the input terminal status of the terminal
block. Starting from the right, it displays P1–P8.
8 DO Status Displays the output terminal status of the terminal
block. Starting from the right, it displays Relay1,
Relay2, and Q1.
9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal V1 (V).
10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays the input voltage terminal V1 value as a
percentage. If -10V, 0V, and+10V is measured, -100%,
0%, and 100% will be displayed.
11 I1 Monitor[mA] Displays the magnitude of the current being input to
the I1 terminal of the inverter terminal block.
12 I1 Monitor[%] Displays the above current as a percent. If the input
current is 0–20[mA], it is shown as 0–100%.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays the voltage input of the I/O expansion
module’s V2 terminal when using the I/O expansion
module.
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays the V2 input voltage as a percent.
15 I2 Monitor[mA] Displays the current input for the I/O expansion
module’s I2 terminal when using the I/O expansion
module.
16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays the I2 input current terminal value as a
percentage.
17 PID Output Displays the PID controller’s output.
18 PID Ref Value Displays the PID controller’s reference value.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays the PID controller’s feedback volume.
20 Torque Displays the torque reference value if torque
reference command mode (DRV-08) is set to a value
other than “Keypad” (0 or 1).
21 Torque Limit Displays the torque limit value if the torque limit
setting method (CON-53) is set to a value other than
“Keypad” (0 or 1).
22 Trq Bias Ref Displays the torque bias if the torque bias setting
method (CON-58) is set to a value other than
“Keypad” (0 or 1).
23 Spd Limit Displays the speed limit setting If the speed limiting
(CON-62) in Torque Control mode is set to a value
other than “Keypad” (0 or 1).
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
303
Code Description
24 Load Speed Displays the load speed in the desired scale and unit.
Displays the load speed as values which are applied
in the units of rpm or mpm set in ADV-63 (Load Spd
Unit), ADV-61 (Load Spd Gain), and ADV-62 (Load Spd
Scale).
25 Temperature Displays the inverter’s internal temperature.
9.1.2 Displaying Output Power
Mode Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PAR BAS 18 Trim Power % - 100.0 %
When CNF-21–23 (Monitor Line-x Select) is set to “4 (Output Power)”, increase the set value at
BAS-18 (Trim Power) appropriately if the output power displayed on the keypad is lower than
expected.
If the output power displayed on the keypad is higher than expected, decrease this set value
accordingly. The output power display is calculated using voltage and current. However, an
output power error may occur when the power factor is low.
Note
WHour Counter (Inverter power consumption)
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and the
results are accumulated.
Power consumption is displayed as follows:
• Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in a 999.9 kW format.
• 1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in a 99.99 MWh format.
• 100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in a 999.9 MWh format.
• More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed up
to 65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535 MW will reset the value to 0 and units will return to
kW. It will be displayed in a 999.9 kW format).
• If the WH CNF-62 (Count Reset) is set to “YES,” you can clear the electricity consumption.
Using Monitor Functions
304
9.1.3 Selecting Load Speed Display
Mode Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PAR ADV
61 Load Spd Gain - 100.0 %
62 Load Spd Scale 0 X 1 -
63 Load Spd Unit 0 rpm -
Load Speed Display Details
Set CNF-21–23 (Monitor Line-x Select) to “24 (Load Speed)”, and adjust the following codes to
display load speed.
Code Description
ADV-61 Load Spd
Gain
Sets the gear ratio in a percentage for speed conversion. When the ratio is set,
the actual number of rotations of the other axis or gear system that is
connected to the motor is displayed accordingly.
For example, set ADV-61 (Load Spd Gain) to 30.0%, if the flux value is 300
[mpm] at 1000 [rpm].
ADV-62 Load Spd
Scale
Selects to what decimal place to display at “24 (Load Speed)” among the
monitor items (x1-x0.0001). If you want to display the value to one decimal
place, set ADV-63 (Load Spd Scale) to X 0.1.
ADV-63 Load Spd
Unit
Selects the unit of “24 (Load Speed)” from the monitor items. Also, select either
RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) or MPM (Meters Per Minute).
9.1.4 Selecting Hz/Rpm Display
You can convert all the parameters with a Hz unit into RPM or vice versa. The pole number
(BAS-11) must be entered for the conversion.
Mode Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PAR
DRV 21 Hz/Rpm Sel 0 Hz -
BAS 11 Pole Number - 4 -
If you change the default set value at DRV-21 (Hz/RPM Sel) from “Hz” to “RPM”, all parameters except
the ones set for the monitor mode will be changed to RPM. To change the speed unit from
frequency to speed in Monitor mode, change the parameter value at CNF-21.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
305
9.1.5 Selecting Status Display
Mode Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
CNF 20 AnyTime Para 0 Frequency -
Status Display Selection Details
Code Description
CNF-20 AnyTime
Para
Select the variables to be displayed at the top of Keypad display (LCD display).
Setting Function Setting Function
0 Frequency 13 V2 Monitor[V]
1 Speed 14 V2 Monitor[%]
2 Output Current 15 I2 Monitor[mA]
3 Output Voltage 16 I2 Monitor[%]
4 Output Power 17 PID Output
5 WHour Counter 18 PID Ref Value
6 DCLink Voltage 19 PID Fdb Value
7 - 20 Torque
8 - 21 Torque Limit
9 V1 Monitor[V] 22 Trq Bias Ref
10 V1 Monitor[%] 23 Speed Limit
11 I1 Monitor[mA] 24 Load Speed
12 I1 Monitor[%]
9.1.6 Monitoring Output Frequency
Select DRV-25 to monitor output frequency. Output frequency is displayed in 0.01[Hz]
increments. The output frequency is displayed as 0.00[Hz] when the inverter is not operating.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV 25 Output Freq - 0.00 Hz
Using Monitor Functions
306
9.2 Monitoring Fault Status Using Keypad
Trip mode displays the fault status when a fault trip occurs during inverter operation. You can
monitor the fault types, operating frequency, and output current at the time of fault trip. Up to
the last 5 fault trips can be saved.
9.2.1 Monitoring Current Fault Status
When a fault trip occurs, the fault type is displayed on the keypad’s display.
For more details on types and descriptions of fault trips, refer to 12.2 Warning Messages on
page 390. The following operating status can be monitored and recorded.
Displayed Information Description
1 Output Freq Displays the operating frequency at the time of the fault trip.
2 Output Current Displays the output current at the time of the fault trip.
3 Inverter State Displays acceleration, deceleration, constant speed operation, and stop
state.
4 DCLink Voltage Displays the inverter’s DC power voltage.
5 Temperature Displays the inverter’s temperature.
6 Input State Displays the input terminal’s status.
7 Output State Displays the output terminal’s status.
8 Trip On Time Displays the time from the power ON to the fault trip.
9 Trip Run Time Displays the time from Run to the fault trip.
If you press the [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad or input the reset terminal of the terminal
block to release the fault trip, the information for the currently displayed fault trip is saved as
part of the fault trip history. In this case, what was saved in the Fault Trip History 1 (Last-1) is
moved to the Failure History 2 (Last-2).
The number next to the fault trip name represents the number of simultaneously occurring
faults. If more than one fault occurred, you can press the [PROG/ENT] key to view the other
faults.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
307
9.2.2 Monitoring Fault Trip History
The types of up to five previous fault trips can be saved and monitored. The lower the number
of Last X is, the more recent the fault it represents. If more than 5 faults occur, those occurring
before the last 5 are automatically deleted.
The items displayed in the fault trip history are listed in the following table.
Displayed Information Description
0 Trip Names(1) Displays the fault types.
1 Output Freq The operating frequency at the time of the fault occurrence.
2 Output Current The output current at the time of the fault occurrence.
3 Inverter State Displays acceleration, deceleration, constant speed operation, and
stop state.
4 DCLink Voltage Displays the inverter’s DC power voltage.
5 Temperature Displays the inverter’s temperature.
6 Input State Displays the input terminal’s status.
7 Output State Displays the output terminal’s status.
8 Trip On Time Displays the time from the power ON to the fault occurrence.
9 Trip Run Time Displays the time from Run to the fault occurrence.
10 Trip Delete ? Displays whether the currently saved fault trip history is to be deleted.
There are two ways to delete the fault trip history.
At each fault trip, To delete the individual fault trip, select “Yes” at TRP-10 (Trip Delete?). Also, to
delete the entire fault trip history, select “Yes” at CNF-24 (Erase All Trip).
Using Monitor Functions
308
9.3 Analog output
9.3.1 Voltage Output (0–10 V)
Select the items to be output from AO1 (Analog Output 1) terminal of the inverter terminal
block and adjust the output sizes.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Select the output types.
Setting Description
0 Frequency
Outputs an operation frequency as the standard. A 10 V
output is supplied based on the frequency set at DRV-20
(Max Freq).
1 Output
Current
A 10 V output is supplied from 200% of the inverter-rated
current (based on CT: Constant Torque).
2 Output
Voltage
Sets the outputs based on the inverter output voltage. A 10
V output is supplied from the voltage set at BAS-15 (Rated V).
If 0 V is set at BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models output 10 V based
on the actual input voltage (220 V and 440 V respectively).
3 DC Link
Volt
Outputs the inverter DC link voltage as the standard.
Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 VDC for 200 V
models, and 820 VDC for 400 V models.
4 Torque Outputs the generated torque as the standard. Outputs 10 V
at 250% of the motor-rated torque.
5 Output
Power
Monitors the output wattage. 200% of the rated output is
the maximum display voltage (10 V).
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
309
Code Description
6 Idse Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of the no load
current.
7 Iqse
Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of the rated torque
current.
Rated torque current rated current2 - Non - load current2
8 Target Freq Outputs the set frequency as the standard. Outputs 10 V at
the maximum frequency (DRV-20).
9 Ramp Freq
Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function as a
standard. This may vary depending on the actual output
frequency. Outputs 10 V.
10 Speed Fdb
Displays the speed information of the input into the encoder
extension module. It produces 10 V at the maximum
frequency (DRV-20).
11 Speed Dev
Outputs the difference between the speed reference
(command) and the motor’s rotation speed that inputs into
the encoder extension module. It outputs 10 V at twice the
rated slip frequency. It is valid only in Vector Control mode.
12 VPID Ref
alue
Outputs command value of a PID controller as the standard.
Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
13 PID Fdb
Value
Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as the
standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
14 PID Output Outputs the output value of a PID controller as the standard.
Outputs approximately 10 V at 100%.
15 Constant Outputs the OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a standard.
OUT-02 AO1 Gain,
OUT-03 AO1 Bias
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it
will operate as shown below.
AO Gain AO Bias
MaxFreq
Frequency
AO1 1 1
The graph below illustrates how the analog voltage output (AO1) changes
depending on OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) and OUT-3 (AO1 Bias) values. The Y-axis is
analog output voltage (0–10 V), and the X-axis is a % value of the output item.
Example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz and the
present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is
50%.
OUT-02 AO1 Gain
OUT- 0.0% 100.0% (Factory Default) 80.0%
Using Monitor Functions
310
Code Description
03
AO1
Bias
(Factory
Default)
20.0%
OUT-04 AO1 Filter Sets the filter time constant of the analog output.
OUT-04 AO1
Const %
Sets the analog output items to Constant (AO1 Mode: 15), and then the analog
voltage is output at the value of the parameters set.
OUT-06 AO1
Monitor
Monitors the analog output value, which is represented as a percentage based
on the 10 V maximum output voltage.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
311
9.3.2 Current Output (4–20 mA)
Select the items to be output from AO2 (Analog Output 2) terminal of the inverter terminal
block and adjust the output sizes.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Select the output types.
Setting Description
0 Frequency
Outputs an operation frequency as the standard. A 10 V
output is supplied based on the frequency set at DRV-20
(Max Freq).
1 Output
Current
A 10 V output is supplied from 200% of the inverter-rated
current (based on CT: Constant Torque).
2 Output
Voltage
Sets the outputs based on the inverter output voltage. A 10
V output is supplied from the voltage set at BAS-15 (Rated
V).
If 0 V is set at BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models output 10 V
based on the actual input voltage (220 V and 440 V
respectively).
3 DC Link
Volt
Outputs the inverter DC link voltage as the standard.
Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 VDC for 200 V
models, and 820 VDC for 400 V models.
4 Torque Outputs the generated torque as the standard. Outputs 10
V at 250% of the motor-rated torque.
5 Output
Power
Monitors the output wattage. 200% of the rated output is
the maximum display voltage (10 V).
6 Idse Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of the no load
current.
Using Monitor Functions
312
Code Description
7 Iqse
Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of the rated torque
current.
Rated torque current rated current2 - Non - load current2
8 Target
Freq
Outputs the set frequency as the standard. Outputs 10 V at
the maximum frequency (DRV-20).
9 Ramp
Freq
Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function as a
standard. This may vary depending on the actual output
frequency. Outputs 10 V.
10 Speed
Fdb
Displays the speed information of the input into the
encoder extension module. It produces 10 V at the
maximum frequency (DRV-20).
11 Speed
Dev
Outputs the difference between the speed reference
(command) and the motor’s rotation speed that inputs into
the encoder extension module. It outputs 10 V at twice the
rated slip frequency. It is valid only in Vector Control mode.
12 VPID Ref
alue
Outputs command value of a PID controller as the
standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
13 PID Fdb
Value
Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as the
standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
14 PID
Output
Outputs the output value of a PID controller as the
standard. Outputs approximately 10 V at 100%.
15 Constant Outputs the OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a standard.
OUT-08 AO2
Gain, OUT-09
AO2 Bias
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it
will operate as shown below.
AO Gain AO Bias
MaxFreq
Frequency
AO2 2 2
The graph below illustrates how the analog current output (AO2) changes
depending on OUT-02 (AO2 Gain) and OUT-3 (AO2 Bias) values. The Y-axis is
the analog output current (0–20 mA), and the X-axis is a percentage of the
output.
Example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz and the
present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is
50%.
OUT-08 AO2 Gain
OUT-
09
100.0% 80.0% (Factory
Default)
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
313
Code Description
AO2
Bias
0.0%
20.0%
(factory
Default)
OUT-10 AO2 Filter Sets the filter time constant of the analog output.
OUT-11 AO2
Const %
Sets the analog output items to Constant (AO2 Mode: 15), and then the analog
current is output at the value of the parameters set.
OUT-12 AO2
Monitor
Monitors the analog output value, which is represented as a percentage based
on the 20 mA maximum output voltage.
Note
When 4–20 mA is used as the output, tune OUT-08 AO2 Gain and OUT-09 AO2 Bias as follows.
1 Set OUT-07 AO2 Mode to Constant and OUT11 AO2 Const % to 0.0%.
2 After setting OUT-09 AO2 Bias to 20.0%, ensure that that the current is 4 mA. If the current is
lower than 4 mA, gradually increase OUT-09 AO2 Bias until it measures 4 mA. If the current is
higher than 4 mA, gradually decrease OUT-09 AO2 Bias until it measures 4 mA.
3 Set OUT11 AO2 Const % to 100.0%. After setting OUT-08 AO2 Gain to 80.0%, ensure that the
current is 20 mA. If the current is lower than 20 mA, gradually increase OUT-08 AO2 Gain until it
measures 20 mA. If the current is higher than 20 mA, gradually decrease OUT-08 AO2 Gain until
it measures 20 mA.
4 When 0-20 mA is used as the output, set OUT-08 A02 Gain to 100% and OUT-09 A02 Bias to
0.0%.
5 The functions for each code are the same as the item of 0–10 V output. And, the output range is
0–20 mA.
Using Monitor Functions
314
9.3.3 Voltage Output (-10–+10V) Using an I/O Expansion Module
If the optional I/O expansion module is installed, the operating status can be monitored using
the bipolar voltage output of the I/O expansion module.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Voltage Output (-10–+10 V) Details
Code Description
OUT-14
AO3 Mode
The output mode can be set identically to when the AO1 voltage output is used.
However, because bipolar voltage output is possible for AO3, unipolar (0–+10V) or
bipolar (-10–+10V) voltage can be produced according to the type of the output
variable.
Examples of bipolar output voltages are as follows.
Output Direction Related Functions
Forward(+)
/Reverse(-)
0: Frequency 9: Ramp Freq 10: Speed Fdb
12: PID Ref Value 13: PID Fdb Value 14: PID Output
Reverse(-)
/Regenerative(-)
4: Torque 7: Iqss -
OUT-15
AO3 Gain,
OUT-16
AO3 Bias
The graph below illustrates how the analog voltage output (AO3) changes
depending on the OUT-15 (AO3 Gain) and OUT-16 (AO3 Bias) values.
The Y-axis is analog output voltage (-10–+10V), and the X-axis is a percentage of the
output. For example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz
and the present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is
50%.
OUT-08 AO3 Gain
OUT-16 100.0% (Factory Default) 80.0%
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
315
Code Description
AO3 Bias
0.0%
(factory
Default)
20.0%
9.3.4 Current Output (4–20 mA/0–20 mA) Using an I/O Expansion
Module
If the optional I/O expansion module is installed, the current output (0–20 mA or 4–20 mA) can
be produced via terminal AO4. The setting details are identical to those of AO1 analog output
terminal.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
9.4 Relay Output and Multi-function Output Terminal
Settings
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
OUT
30 Trip Out Mode - 010 bit
31 Relay 1 28 Trip -
32 Relay 2 14 Run -
33 Q1 Define 1 FDT-1
34–36 Relay 3–5 - - -
41 DO Status - - bit
Relay Output and Multi-function Output Terminal Setting Details
Code Description
OUT-30 Trip
Out Mode
Set OUT-30 (Trip Out Mode) to enable or disable the fault relay.
Bit on Bit off
Setting option Function
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 The top-right corner of the display is ‘Bit 1’.
Operates when a low voltage fault trip occurs.
Operates when a fault trip other than low voltage occurs.
Operates when auto restart fails (PRT-08–09).
Set output options for the relays and multi-function output terminal Q1.
Setting Function
0 None No output signal
1 FDT-1
Inspects whether the output frequency for the inverter
reaches the frequency set by the user. The inverter begins
to operate when the condition is met:
Absolute value (set frequency - output frequency) <
detected frequency width/2.
When the detected frequency width is 10 Hz, the FDT-1
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
317
Code Description
output is as shown in the graph below.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
OUT 58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz
2 FDT-2
Outputs a signal when the set frequency and detected
frequency (FDT frequency) are equal, and fulfills the FDT-1
condition at the same time:
[Absolute value (set frequency – detected frequency) <
detected frequency width /2 ] & [ FDT-1 ] condition is
met
The detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the detected
frequency is set to 30 Hz, the FDT-2 output is as shown in
the graph below.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
OUT 57 FDT
Frequency
- 30.00 Hz
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz
3 FDT-3
Outputs a signal when the operating frequency meets the
following condition:
Absolute value (detected frequency – output frequency)
< detected frequency width /2
Using Monitor Functions
318
Code Description
Group Code LCD Display Initial Setting Unit
OUT 57 FDT Frequency - 30.00 Hz
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz
4 FDT-4
The output signal can be separately set for acceleration
and deceleration conditions.
• In acceleration: Operation frequency ≧ Detected
frequency
• In deceleration: Operation frequency > (Detected
frequency - Detected frequency width/2)
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the detected
frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-4 output is as shown in the
graph below.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
OUT 57 FDT Frequency - 30.00 Hz
58 FDT Band (Hz) - 10.00 Hz
5 Over Load Outputs a signal at motor overload.
6 IOL
Outputs a signal when the inverter input current exceeds
the rated current and a protective function is activated to
prevent damage to the inverter, based on inverse
proportional characteristics.
7 Under Load Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
8 Fan Warning Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
319
Code Description
9 Stall Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded and stalled.
10 Over
Voltage
Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage rises
above the protective operation voltage.
11 Low Voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage drops
below the low voltage protective level.
12 Over Heat Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
13 Lost
Command
Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog input
terminal and RS-485 communication command at the
terminal block.
Outputs a signal when communication power is present
and an I/O expansion module is installed. It also outputs a
signal when losing analog input and communication
power commands.
14 RUN
Outputs a signal when an operation command is entered
and the inverter outputs voltage.
No signal output during DC braking.
15 Stop Outputs a signal at operation command off, and when
there is no inverter output voltage.
16 Steady Outputs a signal in steady operation.
17 Inverter Line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the inverter
line.
18 Comm Line
Outputs a signal when multi-function input terminal
(switching) is entered.
Group Code LCD Display Initial Setting Unit
IN 65-72 Px Define 16 Exchange -
OUT 32 Relay 2 15 Inverter Line -
33 Q1 Define 16 Comm Line -
For details, refer to 8.23 Supply Power Transition on page
264.
19 Speed
Search
Outputs a signal during inverter speed search operation.
For details, refer to 8.19 Speed Search Operation on page
254.
20 Step Pulse Outputs a signal when a step is completed in an auto
Using Monitor Functions
320
Code Description
sequence operation.
21 Seq Pulse Outputs a signal when a sequence is completed in an auto
sequence operation.
22 Ready Outputs a signal when the inverter is in standby mode
and ready to receive external operation commands.
23 Trv ACC
Outputs a signal when the inverter reaches the
accelerating frequency during a traverse operation.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
APP 01 App Mode 1 Traverse -
24 Trv DEC
Outputs a signal when the inverter reaches the
decelerating frequency during a traverse operation.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
APP 01 App Mode 1 Traverse -
25 MMC
Used as a multi-motor control function. By configuring the
relay output and the multi-function output to MMC and
configuring the APP-01 (APP Mode) to “3 (MMC), it can
conduct the necessary operations for multi-motor control
function.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
APP 01 App Mode 3 MMC -
26 Zspd Dect
Detects if the motor’s rotation speed is 0 rpm during
operation and if the control mode is set as a vector.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter
setting
Unit
DRV 09 Control Mode 4 Vector -
CON 82 ZSD Frequency - 2.00 Hz
83 ZSD Band (Hz) - 1.00 Hz
As the relay operation is dependent on the motor number
(encoder signal), a fault may occur when turning the
inverter on or off due to the encoder signal noise or filter
time constant.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
321
Code Description
27 Torque Dect
Outputs a signal if the torque, with the control mode set
as sensorless or vector, is below the following levels.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter setting Unit
DRV 09 Control
Mode
3–
4
Sensorless-1,
Sensorless-2,
Vector
-
OUT 59 TD Level - 100.0 %
60 TD Band - 5.0 %
28 Timer Out
A timer function to operate terminal output after a certain
time by using multi-function terminal block input.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter setting Unit
IN 65–
72
Px Define 38 Timer In -
OUT 55 Timer On
Delay
- 0.00 Sec
56 Timer Off
Delay
- 0.00 Sec
32 ENC Tune
Outputs a warning signal by releasing the contact point
output if autotuning is performed, if there is no encoder
board, or if APO-01 Enc Opt mode is not set to “Feedback”.
33 ENC Dir
Outputs a warning signal when the motor rotation
direction by the encoder is not set properly. The warning
signal is generated when then encoder wiring is not made
properly even if the encoder module has been installed
and APO-01 Enc Opt Mode is set to “Feedback”.
36 KEB
Operating
Outputs a signal when the energy buffering operation is
performed (when an input power outage occurs and the
DC power supply voltage of the inverter is low).
37 Fire Mode Outputs a signal when Fire mode is in operation only if
ADV-80 is set to Fire mode.
38 Run2
It operates when the operation command is input or the
inverter is outputting voltage. Unlike “14: Run”, it operates
even during DC braking
OUT-41 DO
State Used to check On/Off state of the DO (digital output) by each bit.
Using Monitor Functions
322
9.5 Fault trip output using multi-function output
terminals and relays
The inverter can output a fault trip state using the multi-function output terminal (Q1) and relay
(Relay1).
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
OUT
30 Trip Out Mode - 010
31 Relay 1 29 Trip -
32 Relay 2 14 Run -
33 Q1 Define 1 FDT-1 -
53 Trip Out On Dly - 0.00 Sec
54 Trip Out Off Dly - 0.00 Sec
* The inverter can output a fault trip status using expansion digital output terminals (OUT 34–36) if
the optional I/O expansion module is installed.
Code Description
OUT-30 Trip
Out Mode
Set OUT-30 (Trip Out Mode) to enable or disable the fault relay.
Bit on Bit off
Depending on the fault trip type, the terminal and relay operation can be
configured as shown in the table below.
Setting option Function
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 The top-right corner of the display is ‘Bit 1’.
Operates when a low voltage fault trip occurs.
Operates when a fault trip other than low voltage
occurs.
Operates when auto restart fails (PRT-08–09).
OUT-31–33
Select the terminal and relay to use for failure output and set OUT-31–33 to “28 (Trip
mode)”. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant terminal and relay will
operate.
OUT-53 Trip
Out On Dly,
If a fault trip occurs, trip relay or multi-function output operates after the time delay
set in OUT-53. The terminal turns off with the input initialized after the time delay
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
323
Code Description
OUT-54 Trip
Out Off Dly,
set in OUT-54.
9.6 Output Terminal Delay Time and Terminal Types
You can adjust the operating time of the output terminals and relays. The ON and OFF delay
time can be set separately. You can choose between “form A” terminal (Normally Open) and
“form B” terminal (Normally Closed).
9.6.1 Output Terminal Delay Time
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
OUT
50 DO On Delay - 0.00 Sec
51 DO Off Delay - 0.00 Sec
Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details
Code Description
OUT-50 DO On Delay Set the delay time before the output signal is turned on.
OUT-51 DO Off Delay Set the delay time before the output signal is turned off.
The delay time set at codes OUT-50 and OUT-51 apply to the multi-function output terminal (Q1)
and relays (Relay 1 and 2), except when the multi-function output function is in fault trip mode.
9.6.2 Setting the Output Terminal Type
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
OUT 52 DO NC/NO Sel - 000 bit
Using Monitor Functions
324
Output Terminal Type Setting Details
Code Description
OUT-52 DO NC/NO Sel
Select the type for the relay and multi-function output terminal. An
additional three terminal type selection bits at the terminal block will be
added when an optional I/O expansion module is installed.
Set the relevant bit to “0” to operate it as a “form A” terminal (Normally
Open), “1” to operated it as a “form B” terminal (Normally Closed). Relay 1
and Q1 settings start from the right bit (The top-right corner of the
display is ‘Bit 1’.).
9.7 Operation Time Monitor
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
CNF
70 On-time - 0/00/00 00:00 min
71 Run-time - 0/00/00 00:00 min
72 Time Reset 0 No -
74 Fan Time - 0/00/00 00:00 min
75 Fan Time Reset 0 No -
Output Terminal Type Setting Details
Code Description
CNF-70 On-time Displays the accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in
[YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
CNF-71 Run-time
Displays the accumulated time of voltage output by operation command
input. Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)]
format.
CNF-72 Time Reset
Setting “1 (Yes)” will delete the accumulated power supply time (On-time)
and operation accumulated time (Run-time), and is displayed in 0/00/00
00:00 format.
CNF-74 Fan time
Displays the accumulated inverter cooling fan operation time.
Information will be displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)]
format.
Using Monitor Functions
Monitor
Functions
325
Code Description
CNF-75 Fan Time
Reset
Setting “1 (Yes)” will delete the accumulated cooling fan operation time
(on-time) and accumulated operation time (run-time), and will display it in
0/00/00 00:00 format.
9.8 Setting the Keypad Language
Select the language to be displayed on the LCD keypad. Keypads using S/W Ver 1.04 and later
provide a language selection. The Korean language setting supports Korean and English.
Group Code LCD Display Initial Setting Unit
CNF 01 Language Sel
0 English
-
1 Russian
2 Spanish
3 Italian
4 Turkish
Using Protection Features
326
10 Using Protection Features
Protection features provided by the SV-iS7 series inverter are categorized into two types:
Protection from damage due to an overheating motor and Protection against inverter
malfunction.
10.1 Motor Protection
10.1.1 Electrothermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)
ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of an inverter without a separate
temperature sensor to predict increases in motor temperature and protect the motor, based
on its heat characteristics.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
40 ETH Trip Sel 0 None None/Free-Run/Dec -
41 Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
42 ETH 1min - 150 120-200 %
43 ETH Cont - 120 50–180 %
Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel
ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD screen
displays ”E-Thermal.”
Setting Function
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to a
halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
PRT-41 Motor
Cooling
Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
Setting Function
0 Self-cool As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis, the
cooling effect varies based on motor speed. Most
Using Protection Features
327
Code Description
universal induction motors have this design.
1 Forced-cool
Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling
fan. This provides expansion operation at low speeds.
Motors designed for inverters typically have this
design.
PRT-42 ETH 1 min The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the motor
for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (BAS-13).
PRT-43 ETH Cont
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range
below details the set values that can be used during continuous operation
without the protection function.
Using Protection Features
328
10.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip
A warning or fault trip (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state, based on the
motor-rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can be set separately.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
04 Load Duty 1 Heavy Duty - -
17 OL Warn Select 1 Yes 0–1 -
18 OL Warn Level - 150 30–180 %
19 OL Warn Time - 10.0 0–30 sec
20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
21 OL Trip Level - 180 30–200 %
22 OL Trip Time - 60.0 0–60.0 sec
OUT
31 Relay 1
5 Over Load
-
32 Relay 2 - -
33 Q1 Define -
Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-04 Load Duty
Select the load level.
Setting Function
0 Normal
Duty
Use this setting for light loads, such as, fans and
pumps (overload tolerance: 110% of rated underload
current for 1 minute).
1 Heavy Duty Use this setting for heavy loads, such as, cranes and
parking elevators (overload tolerance: 150% of rated
heavy load current for 1 minute).
PRT-17
OL Warn Select
If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function
output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If “1 (Yes)” is
selected, it will operate. If “0 (No)” is selected, it will not operate.
PRT-18
OL Warn Level,
PRT-19
OL Warn Time
When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning
level (OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload
warning time (OL Warn Time), the multi-function output (Relay 1, Q1) sends
a warning signal. When Over Load is selected at OUT-31 and OUT-33, the
multi-function output terminal or relay outputs a signal. The signal output
does not block the inverter output.
Using Protection Features
329
Code Description
PRT-20
OL Trip Select
Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault trip.
Setting Function
0 None No protective action is taken.
1 Free-Run In the event of an overload fault, inverter output is
blocked and the motor will free-run due to inertia.
3 Dec If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and stops.
PRT-21 OL Trip
Level,
PRT-22 OL Trip Time
When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset value of
the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be supplied during
the overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked
according to the preset mode from PRT-17 or slows to a stop after
deceleration.
Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload warning
signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warning level (OL Warn Level)
and the overload warning time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip level (OL Trip
Level) and the overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
10.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking
The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motors from stalling due to
overloads. If a motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation frequency is
adjusted automatically. When a stall is caused by overload, high currents induced in the motor
may cause motor overheating or damage the motor and interrupt operation of the motor-
driven devices.
In this case, the motor decelerates with optimum deceleration without a braking resistor by
using flux braking. If the deceleration time is too short, an over voltage fault trip may occur
because of regenerative energy from the motor. The flux braking makes the motor use
regenerate energy, therefore optimum deceleration is available without over voltage fault trip.
Using Protection Features
330
To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted
automatically, based on the size of load.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-50 Stall
Prevent
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while operating
a motor at constant speed. When the LCD segment is on, the corresponding bit is
off.
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
Keypad display
Setting Function
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Stall protection during acceleration
Stall protection while operating at a
constant speed
Stall protection during deceleration
Flux braking during deceleration
Setting Function
Using Protection Features
331
Code Description
0001 Stall protection
during
acceleration
If the inverter output current exceeds the preset stall
level (PRT-52, 54, 56, 58) during acceleration, the
motor stops accelerating and starts decelerating. If
current level stays above the stall level, the motor
decelerates to the start frequency (DRV-19). If the
current level causes deceleration below the preset
level while operating the stall protection function,
the motor resumes acceleration.
0010 Stall protection
while operating at
constant speed
Similar to stall protection function during
acceleration, the output frequency automatically
decelerates when the current level exceeds the
preset stall level while operating at constant speed.
When the load current decelerates below the preset
level, it resumes acceleration.
0100 Stall protection
during
deceleration
The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link
voltage below a certain level to prevent an over
voltage fault trip during deceleration. As a result,
deceleration times can be longer than the set time
depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking
during
deceleration
When using flux braking, deceleration time may be
reduced because regenerative energy is expended
at the motor.
1100 Stall protection
and flux braking
during
deceleration
Stall protection and flux braking operate together
during deceleration to achieve the shortest and most
stable deceleration performance.
Using Protection Features
332
Code Description
PRT-51 Stall
Freq 1–
PRT-58 Stall
Level 4
Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies, based
on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be set above the
base frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using numbers that correspond
in ascending order. For example, the range for Stall Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2)
becomes the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the upper limit for
Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).
Using Protection Features
333
Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and
fourth bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an over voltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required, as
the motor can overheat and be easily damaged.
• Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection since the deceleration time can take
longer than the time set, depending on the load. Acceleration stops when stall protection
operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer than the
preset acceleration time.
• When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
10.1.4 Motor Overheat Sensor Input
To use the motor overheat protection, connect the overheat protection temperature sensor (PT
100, PTC) installed in the motor to the inverter’s analog input terminal.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
34 Thermal-T Sel 1 Free-Run - -
35 Thermal In Src 1 V1 - -
36 Thermal-T Lev - 50.0 0–100 %
37 Thermal-T Area 0 Low Low/High -
OUT 07 AO2 Mode 14 Constant - -
08 AO2 Const 11 100% 0–100 %
IN 65–75 Px Define 39 Thermal In - -
87 DI NC/NO Sel - - - -
Motor Overheat Sensor Input Details
Code Description
PRT-34 Thermal-T
Sel
The inverter operating status is set when the motor overheats. If Free-Run
(1) is set, the inverter output will be blocked. If decelerating stop (2) is set
and the overheat sensor detects overheating, the inverter will decelerate
and stop.
Using Protection Features
334
Code Description
PRT-35 Thermal In
Src
The terminal type is selected when the motor overheat sensor is connected
to the voltage (V1) or current (I1) input terminals of the inverter terminal
block in the inverter. The voltage (V2) or current (I2) terminals in the I/O
expansion module are also available.
If you use the current input terminal I1 by supplying constant current to the
temperature sensor with the analog current output (AO2) terminal, the
switch in the I/O expansion module should be where the PTC is. Before use,
check if the switch is at the PTC.
[With voltage (V1) input] [With current (I1) input terminal]
Temperature is measured by letting a certain amount of current flow
through the A02 terminal and converting it into voltage depending on the
resistance value change.
IN-65–72 Px Define,
IN-82 DI NC/NO Sel
You can set the overheat trip function input using the multi-function
terminal block input when using a bimetal-type sensor relay. Connect PTC
between the terminal block to use and CM and select “39 (Thermal)” In
among the function items. Select the type of contact point of the terminal
used in IN-87 as “1 (NC)”.
[Configuration using multi-function input terminals]
PRT-36 Thermal-T
Lev
Sets the operation level for the motor overheat sensor. For the voltage
input terminal (V1), the maximum input voltage is 10 V and for the current
(I1), the maximum input voltage is 5 V. For example, if you use the current
input terminal and set the failure level to 50%, the protection function is
Using Protection Features
335
Code Description
performed when the voltage supplied to the I1 terminal is below 2.5 V. To
perform the protection function when the voltage supplied to the I1
terminal is above 2.5 V, refer to the PRT-37 Thermal-T Area.
PRT-37 Thermal-T
Area
If Low (0) is set and the motor overheat sensor input is smaller than PRT-36,
the protection function is performed. If High (1) is set and the motor
overheat sensor input is bigger than PRT-36, the protection function is
performed.
10.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection
10.2.1 Open-phase Protection
Open-phase protection is used to prevent overcurrent levels induced at the inverter inputs due
to an open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output protection is also
available. An open phase at the connection between the motor and the inverter may cause the
motor to stall, due to a lack of torque.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
05 Phase Loss Chk - 10 - Bit
06 IPO V Band - 40 1–100 V
Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-05 Phase Loss
Chk
When open-phase protection is operating, input and output configurations
are displayed differently. When the LCD segment is On, the corresponding
bit is set to ‘Off’.
Item Bit status (On) Bit status (Off)
Keypad
display
Setting Keypad
display
Function
Bit 2 Bit 1
Using Protection Features
336
Code Description
Output open-phase protection. If one or more
than one phase from U, V, and W is open, the
inverter output will be blocked and “Out Phase
Open” will be displayed on the keypad.
Input open-phase protection. If one or more
phases from R, S, and T are open, the inverter
output will be blocked and “In Phase Open” will
be displayed on the keypad. Protection against
input phase open starts only when a certain
amount of current (70–80% of the inverter-rated
output current) flows through the motor.
Input and output open-phase protection
PRT-06 IPO V Band
Sets the band of the allowed ripple voltage. If one or more phases from the
inverter output are open, the ripple of the DC link voltage increases. If ripple
voltage exceeds the set ripple voltage band, an input phase open trip occurs.
The IPO V Band may be adjusted depending on the operating environment.
Sets the IPO V Band 1–10 volts higher if the output load is too large for the
input capacity, and an open phase fault trip occurs during a normal
operation.
Sets the IPO V Band 1–10 volts lower if the output load is too smaller for the
input capacity.
Note
Ensure that the motor-rated current (BAS-13 Rated Curr) is correctly set. Phase open protection may
not be operated properly if the motor’s rated current is not correctly set at BAS-13.
10.2.2 External Trip Signal
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to “4 (External Trip)” to allow the inverter to stop
operation when abnormal operating conditions arise.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
IN
65–72 Px Define 4 External Trip -
87 DI NC/NO Sel -
(000 0000000)
-
Using Protection Features
337
External Trip Signal Setting Details
Code Description
IN-87 DI NC/NO
Sel
Select the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom (0), it
operates as a form A terminal (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top (1), it
operates as a form B terminal (Normally Closed).
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Terminal - - - P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
10.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT)
If more current than the inverter-rated current flows, the protective function starts to protect
the inverter depending on the inverse time characteristic.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
OUT 31–33 Relay 1,2, Q1 6 IOL -
Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal before
the inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time reaches 60%
of the allowed overcurrent (150%, 1 min), a warning signal output is provided (signal output at 150%
for 36 sec).
Using Protection Features
338
10.2.4 Keypad Command Loss
When setting operation speed using the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to
select the inverter operation for situations when the speed command from the keypad is lost
due to the disconnection of signal cable.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT 11 Lost KPD Mode 2 Free-Run -
OUT 31–33 Relay1,2, Q1 30 Lost Keypad -
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 Keypad -
CNF 22 Multi Key Sel 0 JOG Key -
Speed Command Loss Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-11 Lost KPD
Mode
Set the DRV-06 (command source) to “0 (keypad)”, and select the inverter’s
operation for when there is a keypad connection problem.
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Warning
Set one of the output terminals to “29 (Lost keypad)” to
output a relevant warning signal when abnormal
operating conditions arise.
2 Free-Run The inverter blocks output when the keypad connection
is lost. The motor performs in free-run condition.
3 Dec
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set at
PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time) when the keypad connection is
lost.
The protection function is also available for the keypad command loss
during jog key operation when CNF-22 is set to “JOG Key.”
Using Protection Features
339
10.2.5 Speed Command Loss
When setting the operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication
options, or the keypad, the speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter
operation for situations when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal
cables.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run - -
13 Lost Cmd Time - 1.0 0.1–120 Sec
14 Lost Preset F - 0.00 Starting Freq–Max. Freq Hz
15 AI Lost Level 1 Half of X1 - -
OUT 31–33 Relay1,2, Q1 13 Lost Command - -
Speed Command Loss Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-12 Lost Cmd
Mode
In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be
configured to operate in a specific mode:
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set
at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value for 10
seconds before the loss of the speed command and
uses it as the speed reference.
4 Hold
Output
The inverter calculates the average output value for
10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
and uses it as the speed reference.
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-14
(Lost Preset F).
PRT-15 AI Lost Level,
PRT-13 Lost Cmd
Time
Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when
using analog input.
Setting Function
0 Half of x1 Based on the values set at IN-08 and IN-12, a
Using Protection Features
340
Code Description
protective operation starts when the input signal is
reduced to half of the initial value of the analog input
set using the speed command (DRV-01) and it
continues for the time (speed loss decision time) set at
PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time). For example, set the speed
command to “2 (V1)” at DRV-07, and set IN-06 (V1
Polarity) to “0 (Unipolar)”. When the voltage input
drops to less than half of the value set at IN-08 (V1 Volt
x 1), the protective function is activated.
1 Below of
x1
The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the analog
input set by the speed command and it continues for
the speed loss decision time set at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd
Time). Codes IN-08 and IN-12 are used to set the
standard values.
PRT-14 Lost Preset F
In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode
(PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) to “5 (Lost Preset)”. This operates the protection
function and sets the frequency so that the operation can continue.
Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to “Unipolar” and IN-08 to “5 (V)”. Set PRT-15 (AI Lost Level) to “1 (Below
x1)” and PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to “2 (Dec)” and then set PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time) to 5 seconds.
Then the inverter operates as follows:
Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at PRT-
13 (Lost Cmd Time) is elapsed.
Using Protection Features
341
10.2.6 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration
The iS7 series is divided into a model which features a built-in braking circuit and the other in
which a separate external braking unit should be installed. 0.75–22 kW model types belong to
the former (braking resistor unit is excluded) and for those model types above 30 kW, you
should install a braking unit on the exterior of the inverter. Therefore the function of limiting
the braking resistance use rate (%ED) is necessary for only models below 22 kW.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED - 10 0–30% -
OUT 31–33 Relay1,2, Q1 31 DB Warn%ED - -
Sets braking resistor configuration (%ED: Duty cycle). Braking resistor
configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for one
operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15 sec and the
braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the 15 sec period
has expired. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
%?? = ?_???
?_??? + ?_?????? + ?_??? + ?_???? × 100%
[Example 1]
%?? = ?_???
?_??? + ?_??????1 + ?_??? + ?_??????2 × 100%
Using Protection Features
342
Code Description
[Example 2]
• T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency
• T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency
• T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency
• T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded, it can overheat
and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be used as an
external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.
10.2.7 Underload Warning and Failure
The following table lists the under load fault trip and warning features of the iS7 series inverter.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
04 Load Duty 0 Normal Duty - -
25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0–1
26 UL Warn Time - 10.0 0–600.0 sec
27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run - -
28 UL Trip Time - 30.0 0–600.0 sec
29 UL LF Level - 30 10–30 %
30 UL BF Level - 30 10–100 %
Using Protection Features
343
Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-27 UL Trip Sel
Sets the inverter operation mode for situations when an under load trip
occurs. If “1 (Free-Run)“ is set, the output is blocked in an under load fault
trip situation. If “2 (Dec)” is set, the motor decelerates and stops when an
under load trip occurs.
PRT-25 UL Warn Sel
Select the under load warning options. Set the multi-function output
terminals (at OUT-30–32) to “6 (Underload).” The warning signals are
output when an under load condition arises.
PRT-29 UL LF Level,
PRT-30 UL BF Level
Sets the range necessary for underload detection based on the
underload type.
Set the underload rate at an operating frequency for the motor-rated slip
speed (2x operation), (BAS-12 Rated Slip) at PRT-29.
At PRT-30, the under load rate is decided based on the base frequency
set at DRV-18 (Base Freq). When variable torque is required (for example,
for fans or pumps), set PRT-04 (Load Duty) to “0 (Normal Duty).” For loads
operated at constant torques, like elevators and conveyors, set PRT-04 to
“1 (Heavy Duty).”
PRT-26 UL Warn Time,
PRT-28 UL Trip Time
The protection function operates when the under load level condition
explained above is maintained for the set warning time or fault trip time.
This function does not operate if the energy-saving operation is activated
at ADV-50 (E-SaveMode)
Using Protection Features
344
10.2.8 Overspeed Fault
This function is performed when the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode) is set to “Vector”. If
the motor rotates faster than the overspeed level (Over SPD Level) during the overspeed
detection time (Over SPD Time), the inverter blocks output.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT
70 Over SPD Level - 120.0 Hz
72 Over SPD Time - 0.01 Sec
10.2.9 Speed Deviation Fault
This function is performed when the control mode (DRV-09 Control Mode) is set to “Vector”. If
the motor rotates faster than the speed deviation limit (Speed Dev Band) for the set detection
time (Speed Dev Time), the inverter will block output.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT
73 Speed Dev Trip 1 Yes -
74 Speed Dev Band - 20.00 Hz
75 Speed Dev Time - 1.0 Sec
10.2.10 Speed Sensor (Encoder) Fault Detection
This function can detect whether the encoder expansion module is installed to the inverter.
When the encoder is installed, if the encoder signal cable (line drive type) connection is lost,
encoder-related faults are detected. If a fault occurs, a message reading “Encoder Trip” is
displayed.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT
10.2.11 Fan Fault Detection
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT 79 FAN Trip Mode 0 Trip -
OUT
31–32 Relay 1,2 8 FAN Warning -
33 Q1 Define
Fan Fault Detection Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-79 Fan Trip Mode
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
Setting Function
0 Trip The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is
displayed when a cooling fan error is detected.
1 Warning When OUT-36 (Q1 Define) or OUT-31–35 (Relay1, 2)
is set to “8 (FAN Warning)”, the fan error signal is
output and the operation continues.
OUT-33 Q1 Define,
OUT-31–32 Relay1, 2
When the code value is set to “8 (FAN Warning)”, the fan error signal is
output and operation continues. However, when the inverter’s internal
temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to activation
of overheat protection.
10.2.12 Low Voltage Fault Trip
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT 81 LVT Delay - 0.0 sec
OUT
31–32 Relay 1,2 11 Low Voltage -
33 Q1 Define
Low Voltage Fault Trip Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-81 LVT Delay bWhen inverter input power is lost and the internal DC link voltage drops
elow a certain voltage level, the inverter will block the output and a low
Using Protection Features
346
Code Description
voltage trip will occur. If the PRT-81 LVT Delay time is set, the inverter blocks
output first when a low voltage trip condition arises, then a fault trip will
occur after the low voltage trip decision time has passed. The warning signal
for a low voltage fault trip can be provided using the multi-function output
or a relay. However, the low voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay time) does not
apply to warning signals.
OUT-33 Q1 Define,
OUT-31–32 Relay1,
2
Set to “11 (Low Voltage)”. The inverter stops the output first when a low
voltage trip condition occurs, then a fault trip occurs after the low voltage
trip decision time elapses.
10.2.13 Output Block via the Multi-Function Terminal
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
IN 65–72 Px Define 5 BX - -
PRT 45 BX Mode - 0.0 0.0–600.0
Output Block by Multi-function Terminal Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–71 Px
Define
When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to “5 (BX)” and is
turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and “BX” is
displayed on the keypad display. While “BX” is displayed on the keypad, the
inverter’s operation information including the operation frequency and
current at the time of the BX signal can be monitored. The inverter resumes
operation when the BX terminal turns off and operation command is input.
PRT-45
The default setting value of BX mode (PRT-45) is 0.0 [sec], and it allows the
inverter to operate in free-run mode. If the BX terminal receives input, the
inverter will block output immediately.
If BX mode (PRT-45) is set to 0.1 [sec], the motor will decelerate by value set at
PRT-45.
If PRT-45 set value is too small, the inverter cannot decelerate at that value and
OVT may occur. Set the PRT45 time according to the inverter capacity and load.
Using Protection Features
347
10.2.14 Trip Status Reset
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
IN 65-72 Px Define 3 RST -
Trip Status Reset Setting Details
Code Description
IN-65–72 Px Define
Press the [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input
terminal to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to “3
(RST)” and turn on the terminal to reset the trip status.
10.2.15 Operation Mode On Optional Expansion Module Fault Trip
Optional extension module trips may occur when an optional extension module is used with
the inverter. Set the operation mode for the inverter when a communication error occurs
between the optional extension module and the inverter body, or when the optional extension
module is detached during operation.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Setting Function
0 None No operation
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked and fault trip information is
shown on the keypad.
2 Dec The motor decelerates to the value set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec
Time).
Using Protection Features
348
10.2.16 No Motor Trip
Group Code No. LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PRT
31 No Motor Trip 0 None - -
32 No Motor Level 5 1–100 %
33 No Motor Time 3.0 0.1–10.0 sec
No Motor Trip Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-32 No Motor Level,
PRT-33 No Motor Time
If the output current value [based on the rated current (BAS-13)] is lower
than the value set at PRT-32 (No Motor Level), and if this continues for
the time set at PRT-33 (No Motor Time), a “no motor trip” occurs.
If BAS-07 (V/F Pattern) is set to “1 (Square)”, set PRT-32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than the
factory default. Otherwise, “No Motor Trip” due to a lack of output current will result when the ‘No
Motor Trip’ operation is set.
10.2.17 Low Voltage Fault Trip 2 During Operation
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT 82 Low Voltage2 1 Yes -
If input power is disconnected during inverter operation and internal DC voltage decreases
lower than a certain voltage, the inverter disconnects the output and displays low voltage “2 ”
on the keypad.
Even if the voltage increases and goes back to the normal state, unlike a low voltage fault, it
remains in a fault state until the user unlocks the fault state.
Using Protection Features
349
10.3 List of Faults and Warnings
The following list shows the types of faults and warnings that can occur while using the iS7
inverter.
Category LCD Display Details
Major fault
Latch type
Over Current1 Over current trip
Over Voltage Over voltage trip
External Trip Trip due to an external signal
NTC Open Temperature sensor fault trip
Over Current2 ARM short current fault trip
Fuse Open Fuse open trip
Option Trip-x Option fault trip
Over Heat Over heat fault trip
Out Phase Open Output open-phase fault trip
In Phase Open Input open-phase fault trip
Inverter OLT Inverter overload fault trip
Over Speed Over speed fault trip
Ground Trip Ground fault trip
Encoder Trip Speed sensor fault trip
Fan Trip Fan fault trip
ParaWrite Trip Write parameter fault trip
E-Thermal Motor overheat fault trip
Thermal Trip Temperature fault trip
Pre-PID Fail Pre-PID operation fault trip
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault trip
Speed Dev Trip Trip from speed deviation
Ext-Brake External brake fault trip
No Motor Trip No motor fault trip
Level type
Low Voltage Low voltage fault trip
BX Emergency stop fault trip
Using Protection Features
350
Category LCD Display Details
Lost Command Command loss trip
Lost Keypad Lost-keypad fault trip
Hardware
damage
EEP Err External memory error
ADC Off Set Analog input error
Watch Dog-1
CPU Watch Dog fault trip
Watch Dog-2
Gate Pwr Loss DRV operation power error
Minor fault
Over Load Motor overload trip
Under Load Motor under load trip
Lost Command Lost command fault trip
Lost Keypad Lost keypad fault trip
Warning
Lost Command Command loss fault trip warning
Over Load Overload warning
Under Load Under load warning
Inverter OLT Inverter overload warning
Fan Warning Fan operation warning
DB Warn %ED Braking resistor braking rate warning
Enc Conn Check Enc connection error warning
Enc Dir Check Rotating direction error warning
Lost Keypad Lost keypad warning
Retry Tr Tune Rotor time constant tuning error
Fire Mode Fire mode warning
Communication Function
351
11 Communication Function
11.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the standards, installation process, and programs for the SV-iS7 inverter
serial communication method when using personal computers or factory automation (FA)
computers. The communication function for the SV-iS7 inverter series is designed to remotely
operate or monitor the SV-iS7 inverter series using personal computers or FA computers.
Advantages of Operating the Inverter with Network Communication
As the inverter can be operated or monitored by the user programs, it is easy to apply the
inverter to factory automation.
Features Examples of application
Monitor or modify
parameters via
computers
• T_acc
• T_dec
• Frequency
• Lost command
Interface
configuration for
RS-485 standard
• Performs communication between the inverter and computers produced
by numerous companies.
• Controls up to 16 inverters at a time with one computer using the multi-
drop link system.
• Provides an interface for noise immunity environments.
Inverters can communicate with computers embedded with the RS-232 module via RS-232/485
converters. The standards and performance of converters may vary depending on the
manufacturer, but the basic functions are the same. For more details about standards and
guidelines, users are advised to consult the manual provided by the specific manufacturer.
Read this manual carefully before installation and operation. All instructions in this manual must be
followed to avoid injury or prevent damage to other components.
Communication Function
352
11.2 Specifications
Category Specifications
Communication method RS-485
Transfer form Bus type, Multi-drop link system
Inverter type name SV-iS7 series
Converter Embedded with RS-232
Number of connected
inverters Maximum of 16
Transfer distance Maximum 1,200 m (recommended distance: within 700 m)
Recommended cable
size 0.75 mm2 , (18AWG), Shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire
Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
Communication Power Supplied by the inverter - insulated power source from the inverter’s
internal circuit communication power (supplied from the inverter)
Communication Speed 1,200/2,400/9,600/19,200/38,400 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Letter system Modbus-RTU: BINARY/LS Bus: ASCII
Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Sum check 2 byte
Parity check None/Even/Odd
Communication Function
353
11.3 Communication System Configuration
In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and the inverter
is the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the RS-232 converter must be
integrated with the computer, so that it can communicate with the inverter through the RS-
232/RS-485 converter. Specifications and performance of converters may vary depending on
the manufacturer, but the basic functions are identical. Please refer to the converter
manufacturer’s user manual for details about features and specifications.
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring to
the following illustration of the communication system configuration.
• RS-485 terminal connection: Connect the RS-485 communication line to the S+/S-/SG
terminals.
• Number of connectable inverters: Up to 16 inverters
• Number of extendable addresses (St ID): 1–250 addresses
• Length of effective communication lines: 1,200 m max. Keep it below 700 m for stable
communication.
When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG terminals on the PLC and inverter are
connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise interference.
Use a communication repeater to enhance the communication speed if you have to use a
communication cable above 1,200 m, or to connect an additional inverter. A repeater is
effective when smooth communication is not available due to noise interference.
Communication Function
354
11.4 Basic Settings
Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the
communication lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the communication
parameters.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Communication Parameters Setting Details
Code Description
COM-01 Int485
St ID Sets the inverter station ID between 1 and 250.
COM-02 Int485
Proto
Select one of the two built-in protocols: Modbus-RTU and LS INV 485
Setting Function
0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
1 Reserved Not used
2 LS INV 485 Dedicated protocol for the LS inverter
COM-03 Int485
BaudR Sets a communication setting speed of up to 38,400 bps.
COM-04 Int485
Mode
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check method,
and the number of stop bits.
Setting Function
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
COM-05 Resp
Delay
The built-in 485 communication (Modbus-RTU or LS INV 485) device performs
as a slave. The slave iS7 responds to the master after the period of time set in
this function code.
Communication Function
355
Code Description
11.5 Setting Operation Command and Frequency
After setting the DRV-06 (Cmd Source) to “3 (Int 485)” and DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src) to “7 (Int 485),”
you can set common area parameters for the operation command and frequency via
communication.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
DRV
06 Cmd Source 3 Int 485 -
07 Freq Ref Src 7 Int 485 -
11.6 Command Loss Protection
Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
PRT
12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run -
13 Lost Cmd Time - 1.0 Sec
14 Lost Preset F - 0.00 Hz
OUT 31–33 Relay1,2, Q1 12 Lost Command -
Communication Function
356
Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details
Code Description
PRT-12 Lost Cmd
Mode,
PRT-13 Lost Cmd
Time
Select the operation to run when a communication error has occurred and
lasted exceeding the time set at PRT-13.
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
3 Hold Input Operates continuously with the speed of the inputted
speed command until the loss of the speed
command.
The inverter calculates the average input value for 10
seconds before the loss of the speed command and
uses it as the speed reference.
4 Hold Output Operates continuously with the operate frequency
before the speed loss. The inverter calculates the
average output value for 10 seconds before the loss
of the speed command and uses it as the speed
reference.
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-14
(Lost Preset F).
PRT-14 Lost Preset
F
Set the Lost Preset frequency that will be applied if PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) is
set to “5 (Lost Preset).”
Communication Function
357
11.7 Setting Virtual Multi-Function inputs
Multi-function input can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set codes
COM-70–85 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the function to 1 at
0h0385 to operate it.
Group Code LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
COM
70-85 Virtual DI x 0 None -
86 Virt DI Status - - -
For example, if you want to send an Fx command by controlling a virtual multi-function input
command addresses with Int485, the Fx function is performed if 0h0001 is input in 0h0385
after COM-70 (Virtual DI 1) is set to “FX”. Before you configure the virtual multi-function inputs,
set the DRV-06 (CMD source) depending on the command source.
Virtual multi-function operates independently from the analog multi-function inputs and
cannot be set redundantly. Virtual multi-function input can be monitored using COM-86 (Virt Dl
Status).
11.8 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication
If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad parameters
via communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the values changed via
communication revert to the previous setting values when you turn on the inverter.
Set CNF-48 to “1 (Yes)” to allow all the changes over communication to be saved, so that the
inverter retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.
Setting address 0h03E0 to “0” and then setting it again to “1” via communication allows the
existing parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to “1” and then
setting it to “0” does not carry out the same function.
Group Code LCD Display Setting Display Unit
CNF 48 Parameter Save
0 -No- -
1 -Yes- -
Communication Function
358
11.9 Communication Frame Monitoring
You can easily monitor the status (normal, CRC/Checksum error, other errors, etc.) of the
communication frame being received from the master by using the keypad.
Group Code LCD Display Setting Display Unit
COM
90 Comm Mon Sel 0 Int 485 -
91 Rcv Frame Num - - -
92 Err Frame Num - - -
93 NAK Frame Num - - -
94 Comm Update
0 -No-
-
1 -Yes-
Communication Frame Monitoring Details
Code Description
COM-90 Comm Mon Sel Selects the communication channel to monitor.
COM-91 Rcv Frame Num Counts the number of communication frames received normally
from the master device.
COM-92 Err Frame Num Counts the number of CRC errors when the Modbus-RTU is set and
counts Checksum errors when the LS Inv 485 is set.
COM-93 NAK Frame Num
Counts the number of errors (communication address errors, data
range errors, writing prohibition errors) that occur in the
communication frames received from the master device.
COM-94 Comm Update Reconnects the communication after the initial status parameter is
changed to communication speed (baud rate), etc.
11.10 Special communication Area Settings
The following table lists the memory map of the entire memory addresses used for network
communication in the iS7 series inverters.
Communication Area Memory Map Description
Common iS5 compatible 0h0000 - 0h00FF Area compatible with iS5
Communication Function
359
Communication Area Memory Map Description
communication area
Parameter registration type area
0h0100 - 0h01FF Area registered in COM31–38,
COM51–58
0h0200 - 0h023F Area registered in User Group
0h0240 - 0h027F Area registered in Macro Group
0h0280 - 0h02FF Reserved
Common iS7
communication area
0h0300 - 0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0380 - 0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0 - 0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400 - 0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 DRV Grp
0h1200 BAS Grp
0h1300 ADV Grp
0h1400 CON Grp
0h1500 IN Grp
0h1600 OUT Grp
0h1700 COM Grp
0h1800 APP Grp
0h1900 AUT Grp
0h1A00 APO Grp
0h1B00 PRT Grp
0h1C00 M2 Grp
11.11 Parameter Group for Periodical Data
Transmission
By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses registered
in the communication function group (CM) can be used in communication. Parameter groups
for data transmission may be defined to simultaneously transmit multiple parameters into the
communication frame.
Communication Function
360
Group Code No. Function Display Setting Display Unit
COM
31–38 Para Status-h - - Hex
51–58 Para Control-h - - Hex
Parameter Group for Periodical Data Transmission Details
Addresses Description
0h0100–0h0107
Reads the parameter registered in COM-31-38 Status Para-h (read only).
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0100 Status Parameter #1 Parameter value registered at COM-31
0h0101 Status Parameter #2 Parameter value registered at COM-32
0h0102 Status Parameter #3 Parameter value registered at COM-33
0h0103 Status Parameter #4 Parameter value registered at COM-34
0h0104 Status Parameter #5 Parameter value registered at COM-35
0h0105 Status Parameter #6 Parameter value registered at COM-36
0h0106 Status Parameter #7 Parameter value registered at COM-37
0h0107 Status Parameter #8 Parameter value registered at COM-38
0h0110–0h0117
Reads and writes the parameter registered in COM-51-58 Control Para-h (both
read and write.
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0110 Control Parameter #1 Parameter value registered at COM-51
0h0111 Control Parameter #2 Parameter value registered at COM-52
0h0112 Control Parameter #3 Parameter value registered at COM-53
0h0113 Control Parameter #4 Parameter value registered at COM-54
0h0114 Control Parameter #5 Parameter value registered at COM-55
0h0115 Control Parameter #6 Parameter value registered at COM-56
0h0116 Control Parameter #7 Parameter value registered at COM-57
0h0117 Control Parameter #8 Parameter value registered at COM-58
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381) and
operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control frame. For
example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para Control - x),
register the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to Para Control-5.
Communication Function
361
11.12 Parameter Group for Transmission of Macro
Group and User Group at U&M Mode
By defining the user and macro parameter groups, communication can be carried out using
the user defined user group (USR) and macro group (MAC) addresses that are registered in
U&M mode.
Addresses Description
U&M>USR-1–64
User Grp. Para h
Writes and reads the USR parameters set by the keypad via the addresses
0h0200–0h023F.
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0200 User Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->1
0h0201 User Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->2
...
.
.
...
.
.
...
.
.
0h023E User Grp. Code 63 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->63
0h023F User Grp. Code 64 Parameter value registered at U&M>USR->64
U&M>MAC-1–64
Macro Grp. Para
h
Writes and reads the Macro parameters set by the keypad via the addresses
0h2400–0h2A3.
Address Parameter Allotment for Bits
0h0240 Macro Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M>MAC-1
0h0241 Macro Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M>MAC-2
...
.
.
...
.
.
...
.
.
0h02A2 Macro Grp. Code 63 Parameter value registered at U&M>MAC-63
0h02A3 Macro Grp. Code 64 Parameter value registered at U&M>MAC-64
11.13 Communication Protocol
11.13.1 LS INV 485 Protocol
The slave device (inverter) responds to read and write requests from the master device (PLC or
PC).
Request
ENQ Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Communication Function
362
Normal Response
ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Error Response
NAK Station ID CMD Error code SUM EOT
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
• A request starts with ENQ and ends with EOT.
• A normal response starts with ACK and ends with EOT.
• An error response starts with NAK and ends with EOT.
• A station ID indicates the inverter number and is displayed as a two-byte ASCII-HEX string
that uses characters 0-9 and A-F.
• CMD: Uses uppercase characters (returns an IF error if lowercase characters are
encountered).
Character ASCII-HEX Command
‘R’ 52h Read
‘W’ 57h Write
‘X’ 58h Request monitor registration
‘Y’ 59h Perform monitor registration
• Data: ASCII-HEX (for example, when the data value is 3000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h → 30h 42h
42h 38h)
• Error code: ASCII-HEX (20h–7Fh)
• Transmission/reception buffer size: Transmission=39 bytes, Reception=44 bytes
• Monitor registration buffer: 8 Words
• SUM: Checks communication errors via sum.
• SUM=a total of the lower 8 bits values for station ID, command and data (Station
ID+CMD+Data) in ASCII-HEX.
• For example, a command to read 1 address from address 3000:
SUM=‘0’+‘1’+’R’+‘3’+‘0’+‘0’+‘0’+’1’ = 30h+31h+52h+33h+30h+30h+30h+31h = 1A7h (the control
value is not included: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc.
Note
Broadcasting
Broadcasting sends commands to all inverters connected to the network simultaneously. When
commands are sent from station ID 255, each inverter acts on the command regardless of the
station ID. However no response is issued for commands transmitted by broadcasting.
Error operation
For two or more data communications, when an error occurs as a result of the previous data
communication, the current data communication can be made normally regardless of the error
occurred as a result of the previous data communication.
11.13.1.1 Detailed Read Protocol
Read Request
Reads successive n words from address XXXX.
ENQ Station ID CMD Address Number of
Addresses SUM EOT
05h ‘01’–’1F’ ‘R’ ‘XXXX‘ ‘1’–‘8’ = n ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=12. Characters are displayed inside single quotation marks(‘).
Read Normal Response
ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT
06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘R’ ‘XXXX’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes= (7 x n x 4): a maximum of 39
Communication Function
364
Read Error Response
NAK Station ID CMD Error code SUM EOT
15h ‘01’-‘1F’ ‘R’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=9
11.13.1.2 Detailed Write Protocol
Write Request
ENQ Station ID CMD Address Number of Addresses Data SUM EOT
05h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘XXXX’ ‘1’–‘8’ = n ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes= (12 + n x 4): a maximum of 44
Write Normal Response
ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT
06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes= (7 + n x 4): a maximum of 39
Write Error Response
NAK Station ID CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘W’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=9
Communication Function
365
11.13.1.3 Monitor Registration Detailed Protocol
Monitor registration request is made to designate the type of data that requires continuous
monitoring and periodic updating.
Monitor Registration Request
Registration requests for n addresses (where n refers to the number of addresses. The
addresses do not have to be contiguous.)
ENQ Station ID CMD Number of Addresses Address SUM EOT
05h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘X’ ‘1’–‘8’=n ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte n x 4
bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes= (8 + n x 4): a maximum of 40
Monitor Registration Normal Response
ACK Station ID CMD SUM EOT
06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘X’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=7
Monitor Registration Error Response
NAK Station ID CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘X’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=9
11.13.1.4 Monitor Execution Detailed Protocol
Monitor Registration Execution Request
A data read request for a registered address, received from a monitor registration request
Communication Function
366
ENQ Station ID CMD SUM EOT
05h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘Y’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=7
Monitor Registration Execution Normal Response
ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT
06h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘Y’ ‘XXXX…’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n x 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes= (7 + n x 4): a maximum of 39
Monitor Registration Execution Error Response
NAK Station ID CMD Error Code SUM EOT
15h ‘01’–‘1F’ ‘Y’ ‘**’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=9
The requested function cannot be performed by a
slave because the corresponding function does not
exist.
02: ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS IA The received parameter address is invalid at the
slave.
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE ID The received parameter data is invalid at the slave.
21: WRITE MODE ERROR WM
Tried writing (W) to a parameter that does not allow
writing (read-only parameters, or when writing is
prohibited during operation)
22: FRAME ERROR FE The frame size does not match.
Communication Function
367
11.13.2 Modbus-RTU protocol
11.13.2.1 Function Code and Protocol (unit: byte)
Function Code #03 (Read Holding Register)
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi (Register 40108)
# of Points Hi Data Lo (Register 40108)
# of Points Lo Data Hi (Register 40109)
CRC Lo Data Lo (Register 40109)
CRC Hi Data Hi (Register 40110)
Data Lo (Register 40110)
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Function Code #04 (Read Input Register)
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi (Register 30009)
# of Points Hi Data Lo (Register 30009)
# of Points Lo CRC Lo
CRC Lo CRC Hi
CRC Hi
Communication Function
368
Function Code #06 (Preset Single Register)
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Register Address Hi Register Address Hi
Register Address Lo Register Address Lo
Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi
Preset Data Lo Preset Data Lo
CRC Lo CRC Lo
CRC Hi CRC Hi
Function Code #16 (hex 0x10) (Preset Multiple Register)
Field Name Field Name
Slave Address Slave Address
Function Function
Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo
# of Register Hi # of Register Hi
# of Register Lo # of Register Lo
Byte Count CRC Lo
Data Hi CRC Hi
Data Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Code
01:ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02:ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
Communication Function
369
Field Name
Slave Address
Function*
Exception Code
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
* Function value is the set value of the highest bit of the query function value.
11.13.3 iS7/iS5/iG5/iG5A Compatible Common Area Parameter
Address Parameter Scale nit R/W Assigned content by bit
0h0000 Inverter model - - R B: iS7
time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
0h000A Output
frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC Link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
0h000E Operation status - - -
B15 0: Remote, 1: Keypad Local
B14 1: Frequency command by comm. (Built-in
type, Option)
B13 1: Run command by comm. (Built-in type,
Option)
B12 Reverse direction run command
B11 Forward direction run command
B10 Brake open signal
B9 Jog mode
B8 Stop
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
B3
Operates depending on the set value of Fault
(Trip)
*OUT-30 Trip Out Mode
B2 Reverse operation
Communication Function
371
Address Parameter Scale nit R/W Assigned content by bit
B1 Forward operation
B0 Stop
Inverter input voltage /
power supply type
(single phase, 3 phase)
/ cooling method
- -
200 V single phase open air cooling: 0220h
200 V 3 phase open air cooling: 0230h
200 V single phase forced cooling: 0221h
200 V 3 phase forced cooling: 0231h
400 V single open air cooling: 0420h
400 V 3 phase open air cooling: 0430h
400 V single phase forced cooling: 0421h
400 V 3 phase forced cooling: 0431h
0h0303 Inverter S/W version - -
Ex.) 0x0100: Version 1.00
0x0101: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
0h0305 Inverter operating status - -
B15
0: Normal status
4: Warning status
8: Fault status (operates according to
set value of OUT-30 Trip Out Mode)
0: Keypad 1: Communication option
2: App/PLC 3: Built-in 485
4: Terminal Block 5: Reserved
6: Auto 1 7: Auto 2
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
Frequency command source
0: Keypad speed 1: Keypad torque
2-4:Up/Down run speed 5: V1
6: I1 7: V2 8: I2
9: Pulse 10: Built-in 485
11: Communication option
12: App (PLC) 13: Jog 14: PID
15-22: Auto Step
25-39: Multi-step speed frequency
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
0h0307 Keypad S/W version - - Ex.) 0x0100: Version 1.00
0h0308 Keypad Title version - - 0x0101: Version 1.01
0h0309 -
0h30F Reserved - - -
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
Communication Function
375
Address Parameter Scale unit Assigned content by bit
0h0312 Output RPM 0 RPM -
0h0313 Motor feedback speed 0 RPM -32768rpm - 32767rpm (Having a polarity.)
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
0h0315 DC Link voltage 1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0317 Output torque 0.1 % Exception: It is not calculated during V/F
control.
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % -
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
0h031A Number of No.1 motor
display - - Number of No.1 motor display
0h031B Number of No.2 motor
display - - Number of No.2 motor display
0h031C Number of selected
motor display - - Number of selected motor display
0h031D Selection among Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz unit
1: rpm unit
0h031E
-0h031F Reserved - - -
B15 Virtual DI 16 (COM85)
B14 Virtual DI 15 (COM84)
B13 Virtual DI 14 (COM83)
B12 Virtual DI 13 (COM82)
B11 Virtual DI 12 (COM81)
BI0 Virtual DI 11 (COM80)
B9 Virtual DI 10 (COM79)
B8 Virtual DI 9 (COM78)
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM75)
B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM74)
Communication Function
377
Address Parameter Scale unit Assigned content by bit
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM70)
0h0323 Selected motor display - - 0: No.1 motor / 1: No.2 motor
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input1 (Basic I/O)
0h0325 AI2 0.01 % Analog input2 (Basic I/O)
0h0326 AI3 0.01 % Analog input3 (I/O expansion)
0h0327 AI4 0.01 % Analog input4 (I/O expansion)
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output1 (Basic I/O)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output2 (Basic I/O)
0h032A AO3 0.01 % Analog output3 (I/O expansion)
0h032B AO4 0.01 % Analog output4 (I/O expansion)
0h032C Reserved - - -
0h032D Temperature 1 ℃ -
0h032E Power consumption of
inverter(kW/hour) 0.1 kWh -
0h032F Power consumption of
Address Parameter Scale unit Assigned content by bit
B10 Fire function operation
B9 Auto Tuning fail
B8 Keypad Lost
B7 Encoder mis-wiring
B6 Encoder mis-installation
B5 DB
B4 FAN operation
B3 Lost command
B2 Inverter Overload
B1 Underload
B0 Overload
0h0335–
0h033F Reserved - - -
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day Date of inverter power On
0h0341 On Time minute 0 Min Total minute, except for total date, of inverter
On Time
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day Total number of days of inverter run
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min Total minute, except for total day, of Run Time
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day Total days of cooling fan run
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min Total minute except for total day of Fan time
0h0346 Reserved - - -
0h0347 Reserved - - -
0h0348 Reserved - - -
0h0349 Reserved - - -
0h034A Option 1 - -
BI5 Virtual DI 16 (COM85)
BI4 Virtual DI 15 (COM84)
BI3 Virtual DI 14 (COM83)
BI2 Virtual DI 13 (COM82)
BI1 Virtual DI 12 (COM81)
BI0 Virtual DI 11 (COM80)
B9 Virtual DI 10 (COM79)
B8 Virtual DI 9 (COM78)
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM75)
B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM74)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM72)
Communication Function
382
Address Parameter Scale unit Bit allotment
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM70)
Limit 0.1 % Reverse motor ring torque limit
0h0394 Rev Neg Torque 0.1 % Reverse regenerative torque limit
Communication Function
383
Address Parameter Scale unit Bit allotment
Limit
0h0395 Torque Bias 0.1 % Torque Bias
0h0395
–0h399 Reserved - - -
0h039A Anytime Para - - CNF-20 value setting
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - - CNF-21 value setting
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - - CNF-22 value setting
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - - CNF-23 value setting
- Note1) A frequency set via communication using the iS7 common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed
frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
- Set DRV-07 to Keypad-1 and select a random target frequency.
- Cmd Frequency (DRV-01, 0h1101): Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area
frequency address (0h1101).
- Parameter Save (0h03E0): Set to “1” before turning off the power.
- The frequency set via communication will be displayed after turning the power off and on again.
Communication Function
384
11.13.4.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Reading and Writing
Available)
When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to the
inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are reflected in
the inverter operation, but are not saved.
All set values are cleared following an inverter power cycle and revert back to their previous
values. When setting parameters via communication, ensure that a parameter is saved prior to
turning off the inverter.
Address Parameter Scale unit
Changeable
During
Operation
Function Page
0h03E0
note1)
Parameter
saving - - X 0: No 1: Yes 267
0h03E1
note1)
Monitor mode
initialization - - O 0: No 1: Yes 268
0h03E2
note1)
Parameter
initialization - - X
0: No 1: All Grp
2: Drv Grp 3: BAS Grp
4: ADV Grp 5: CON Grp
6: IN Grp 7: OUT Grp
8: COM Grp 9: APP Grp
10: AUT Grp 11: APO Grp
12: PRT Grp 13: M2 Grp
*No setting during trip
268
0h03E3 Display changed
parameter - - O 0: No 1: Yes 271
0h03E4 Macro function
item - - X
0: None
1: Draw App
2: Traverse
273
0h03E5
note1)
Deleted all fault
history - - O 0: No 1: Yes 271
0h03E6
note1)
User
registration
code deleted
- - O 0: No 1: Yes 271
0h03E7
note 2)
Hide parameter
mode 0 Hex O
writing: 0 - 9999
269
reading: 0: Unlock 1: Lock
0h03E8
note 2)
Lock parameter
mode 0 Hex O
writing: 0 - 9999
270
reading: 0: Unlock 1: Lock
0h03E9 Easy start on
(easy parameter - - O 0: No 1: Yes 274
Communication Function
385
Address Parameter Scale unit
Changeable
During
Operation
Function Page
setup mode)
0h03EAnote1)
Initializing
power
consumption
- - O 0: No 1: Yes 301
0h03EBnote1)
Initialize inverter
operation
accumulative
time
- - O 0: No 1: Yes 301
0h03ECnote1)
Initialize cooling
fan
accumulated
operation time
- - O 0: No 1: Yes 275
Note 1
- Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to “0 “ via communication, set it to another
value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than 0 and a non-zero value is entered again, an
error message is returned. The previously set value can be identified by reading the parameter
when operating the inverter via communication.
Note that the execution time may take longer because the data is saved in the inverter, possibly
interrupting communication.
Note 2
- The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from “Lock” to “Unlock”, and vice versa.
When the same parameter value is entered repeatedly, the parameter setting is executed just once.
To enter the same value, change it to another value first and then re-enter the previous value. For
example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the following order: 244 -> 0 -> 244.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
386
12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions, fault
trips, warning signals, or faults occur. If the inverter does not work normally after following the
suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the LSIS Customer Support.
12.1 Protection Functions
12.1.1 Protection from Output Current and Input Voltage
Type Category Details Remarks
Over Load Latch
Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated and the
actual load level exceeds the set level. Operates when PRT-
20 is set to any value other than “0”.
-
Under Load Latch
Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated and
the actual load level is less than the set level. Operates when
PRT-27 is set to any value other than “0”.
-
Over
Current1 Latch
Displayed when the inverter output current exceeds 200%
of the rated current. -
Over Voltage Latch Displayed when the internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the
specified value. -
Low Voltage Level Displayed when the internal DC circuit voltage is less than
the specified value. -
Ground Trip Latch
Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output
side of the inverter and causes the current to exceed the
specified value. The specified value varies depending on the
inverter capacity.
-
E-Thermal Latch
Displayed based on inverse time limit thermal
characteristics to prevent motor overheating. Operates
when PRT-40 is set to any value other than “0”.
-
Out Phase
Open Latch
Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or more
phases in an open circuit condition. Operates when bit 1 of
PRT-05 is set to “1”.
-
In Phase Latch Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or more -
387
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
Type Category Details Remarks
Open phases in an open circuit condition. Operates only when bit
2 of PRT-05 is set to “1”.
Inverter OLT Latch
Displayed when the inverter has been protected from
overload and resultant overheating, based on inverse time
limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload rates for
the inverter are 150% for 1 min and 200% for 4 sec.
Protection is based on the inverter rated capacity, and may
vary depending on the device’s capacity.
-
Low
Voltage2 Latch
Displayed when the internal DC circuit voltage is less than
the specified value during inverter operation. -
Safety Opt
Err Latch
Displayed when a safety feature is activated to block the
inverter output during an emergency. -
12.1.2 Abnormal Circuit Conditions and External Signals
Type Category Details Remarks
Fuse Open Latch oDisplayed when the inverter DC fuse is exposed to an
vercurrent above 30 kW. -
Over Heat Latch Displayed when the temperature of the inverter heat sink
exceeds the specified value. -
Over
Current2 Latch
Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter detects a
specified level of excessive, short circuit current. -
External Trip Latch
Displayed when an external fault signal is provided by the
multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-function input
terminals at IN-65–72 to “3 (External Trip)” to enable external
trip.
-
BX Level
Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a signal
provided from the multi-function terminal. Set one of the
multi-function input terminals at IN-65–71 to “4 (BX)” to
enable the input block function.
-
H/W-Diag Fatal
Displayed when an error is detected in the memory
(EEPRom), analog-digital converter output (ADC Off Set), or
CPU watchdog (Watch Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).
EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters due to a
keypad or memory (EEPRom) fault.
-
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
388
Type Category Details Remarks
ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit (U/V/W
terminal, current sensor, etc.).
Gate Pwr Loss: An interruption in the supply of power to the
IGBT Gate of a product rated 30 kW or higher (when a fault
occurs in a 22 kW-rated product, the capacity settings should
be checked).
NTC Open Latch Displayed when an error is detected in the temperature
sensor of the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT). -
Fan Trip Latch
Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling fan. Set
PRT-79 to “0” to activate fan trip (for models with a capacity
below 22 kW).
-
IP54 FAN
Trip Latch
Displayed when the IP54 product detects an internal
circulation at the cooling fan.
Only
applied
to IP54
product
Thermal Trip Latch
Displayed when the resistance value exceeds the prescribed
value after the external temperature sensor is connected to
the terminal block. Operates when PRT-34 is set to any value
other than “0”.
-
ParaWrite
Trip Latch
Displayed when communication fails during parameter
writing. Occurs when using an LCD keypad due to a control
cable fault or a bad connection.
-
Over Speed
Trip Latch
Displayed when the motor speed exceeds the overspeed
detection level. Set the detection level at PRT-70. -
Dev Speed
Trip Latch
Displayed when the speed that received feedback from the
encoder exceeds the set variation value. Operates when PRT-
73 is set to “1”.
-
Encoder Trip Latch Displayed when PRT-77 Enc Wire Check is set to “1” and an
abnormality is detected for the set period of time. -
Pre-PID Fail Latch
Displayed when pre-PID is operating with functions set at
APP-34–36. A fault trip occurs when a controlled variable (PID
feedback) is measured below the set value and the low
feedback continues, as it is treated as a load fault.
-
Ext-Brake Latch
When Control Mode (DRV-09) is V/F or Sensorless1 or
Sensorless2: The trip occurs when OUT-31–32 is set to BR
control and the output current is lower than ADV-41 value (%
for BAS-13) for about 10 seconds.
-
389
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
Type Category Details Remarks
When Control Mode (DRV-09) is Vector: The trip occurs when
OUT-31-32 is set to BR Control and the current is lower than
half of the BAS-14 value.
12.1.3 Keypad and Optional Expansion Modules
Type Category Details Remarks
Lost Keypad Level
Displayed when operating commands come from the
keypad or there is any problem with the communication
between the keypad and inverter’s main body in Keypad JOG
mode. Operates when PRT-11 is set to any value other than
“0” (occurs 2 seconds after the communication is
interrupted).
-
Lost
Command Level
Displayed when a frequency or operation command error is
detected during inverter operation by controllers other than
the keypad (e.g. using a terminal block and a communication
mode). Set PRT-12 to any value other than “0”.
-
Option Trip-1 Latch
Displayed when the extension module is removed from
option slot No. 1 after it was installed while the inverter was
turned on, or when communication is not available with the
inverter.
-
Option Trip-2 Latch
Displayed when the extension module is removed from
option slot No. 2 after it was installed during power supply,
or when communication is not available with the inverter.
-
Option Trip-3 Latch
Displayed when the extension module is removed from
option slot No. 3 after it was installed during power supply,
or when communication is not available with the inverter.
-
I/O Board
Trip Latch
Displayed when the basic and insulated I/O boards are
disconnected or have a connection fault. -
Note
Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is not saved
in the fault history.
Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or warning signal
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
390
disappears.
Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after the user
turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns the inverter on again.
If the inverter is still in a fault condition after it is powered on again, please contact the supplier or
the LSIS Customer Support.
The function for saving the fault history and the fault signal output may not be performed if the
functions are not set or the inverter is seriously damaged.
12.2 Warning Messages
Type Description
Over Load
Displayed when the motor is overloaded. Operates when PRT-17 is set to “1”. To
operate, select “4 (Over Load)”. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OUT31-
33) to “4 (Over Load)” to receive overload warning output signals.
Under Load
Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Operates when PRT-25 is set to “1”.
Set the digital output terminal or relay (OUT31-33) to “6 (Under Load)” to receive
underload warning output signals.
Inv Over Load
Displayed when the accumulated overload time is equivalent to 60% of the
inverter overheat protection (inverter IOLT) level. Set the digital output terminal
or relay (OUT31-33) to “5 (IOL)” to receive inverter overload warning output
signals.
Lost Command
The Lost Command warning alarm occurs even when PRT-12 is set to “0”. The
warning alarm occurs based on the condition set at PRT-13-15. Set the digital
output terminal or relay (OUT31-33) to “12 (Lost Command)” to receive lost
command warning output signals.
Fan Warning
Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while PRT-79 is set to
“1”. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OUT31-33) to “8 (Fan Warning)” to
receive fan warning output signals.
DB Warn %ED Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value. Set the
detection level at PRT-66.
Enc Conn Check
Displayed when “3 (Enc Test)” is set at BAS-20 (Auto Tuning) and no signal is
input during the encoder test. Set the ENC Tune at OUT31–33 to release a
signal.
Enc Dir Check
Displayed when “3 (Enc Test)” is set at BAS-20 (Auto Tuning) and the settings for
A and B encoder phases are changed or are the opposite during the encoder
test. Set the ENC Dir at OUT31-33 to release a signal.
391
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
Type Description
Lost Keypad
Displayed when operating commands come from the keypad or there is any
problem with the communication between the keypad and inverter’s main
body in Keypad JOG mode after setting PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) to “0”. Set the
Lost Keypad (29) at OUT31-33.
Check Line PLZ Displayed when there is any problem with communication between the keypad
and the iS7 Control CPU (control connection cables).
Fire Mode Displayed when the fire function is activated. If a contact signal output is
required, set the Fire Mode (37) at OUT31-33.
12.3 Troubleshooting Fault Trips
Type Problem Solution
Over Load
The load is greater than the motor’s
rated capacity.
Ensure that the motor and inverter have
appropriate capacity ratings.
The set value for the overload trip
level (PRT-21) is too low.
Increase the set value for the overload trip
level.
Under Load
There is a motor-load connection
problem.
Replace the motor and inverter with lower
capacity models.
The set value for the underload level
(PRT-29 and PRT-30) is less than the
system’s minimum load.
Increase the set value for the underload
level.
Over
Current1
Acc/dec time is too short compared to
load inertia (GD2). Increase acc/dec time.
The inverter load is greater than the
rated capacity.
Replace the inverter with a model that has
increased capacity.
The inverter supplied an output while
the motor was idling.
Operate the inverter after the motor has
stopped or use the speed search function
(CON-60).
The mechanical brake of the motor is
operating too fast. Check the mechanical brake.
Over
Voltage
The deceleration time is too short for
the load inertia (GD2). Increase the deceleration time.
A generative load occurs at the Use the braking unit.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
392
Type Problem Solution
inverter output.
The input voltage is too high. Check if the input voltage is above the
specified value.
The set value for electronic thermal
protection is too low.
Set an appropriate electronic thermal
level.
The inverter has been operated at a
low speed for an extended period.
Replace the motor with a model that
supplies extra power to the cooling fan.
Low Voltage
/Low
Voltage2
The input voltage is too low. Check if the input voltage is below the
specified value.
A load greater than the power
capacity is connected to the system
(e.g. a welder, direct motor
connection, etc.)
Increase the power capacity.
The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty
connection.
Replace the magnetic contactor.
Ground Trip
A ground fault has occurred in the
inverter output wiring. Check the output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
E-Thermal
The motor has overheated. Reduce the load or operation frequency.
The inverter load is greater than the
rated capacity.
Replace the inverter with a model that has
increased capacity.
Out Phase
Open
The magnetic contactor on the output
side has a connection fault.
Check the magnetic contactor on the
output side.
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
In Phase
Open
The magnetic contactor on the input
side has a connection fault.
Check the magnetic contactor on the input
side.
The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.
The DC link capacitor needs to be
replaced.
Replace the DC link capacitor. Contact the
retailer or the LSIS Customer Support.
Inverter OLT
The load is greater than the rated
motor capacity.
Replace the motor and inverter with
models that have increased capacity.
The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
393
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
Type Problem Solution
Over Heat
There is a problem with the cooling
system.
Check if a foreign object is obstructing the
air inlet, outlet, or vent.
The inverter cooling fan has been
operating for an extended period. Replace the cooling fan.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Keep the ambient temperature below
50℃.
Over
Current2
The output wiring has short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
There is a fault with the electronic
semiconductor (IGBT).
Do not operate the inverter. Contact the
retailer or the LSIS Customer Support.
NTC Open
The ambient temperature is too low.
Keep the ambient temperature above
10℃.
There is a fault with the internal
temperature sensor.
Contact the retailer or the LSIS Customer
Support.
FAN Trip
There is a foreign object in the
inverter vent where the fan is located.
Remove the foreign object from the air
inlet or outlet.
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
IP54 FAN
Trip
The fan connector is not connected. Connect the fan connector.
The power connector for the internal
fan PCB board is not connected.
Connect the power connector for the
internal fan PCB board.
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
No Motor
Trip
The motor is not connected to the
inverter output. Check the wiring connections.
The current level for trip detection is
not set properly.
Check the values of both BAS-13 (Rated
current) and PRT-32 (No Motor Level).
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
394
12.4 Replacing the Cooling Fan
12.4.1 Products Rated below 7.5 kW
To replace the cooling fan, push the bracket on the bottom in the direction of the arrows in the
diagram below and then pull it forward. Then, disconnect the fan connector.
12.4.2 Products Rated at 11-15 kW 200 V/400 V and 18.5-22 kW 400 V
To replace the cooling fan, loosen the screws at the bottom of the input and output terminals
and disconnect the fan connector.
395
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
12.4.3 Products Rated at more than 30 kW (200 V) / 90 kW (400 V),
and 18.5–22 kW (200 V) / 30–75 kW (200/400 V)
To replace the cooling fan, loosen the screws at the top of the product and disconnect the fan
connector.
Model types > 30 kW (200 V) ,
Model types > 90 kW (400 V)
18.5–22 kW (200 V),
30–75 kW (400V)
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
396
12.5 Daily and Regular Inspection Lists
Inspection
area
Inspection
item
Inspection
details
Inspection Cycle
Inspection
method Judgment standard
Inspection
Daily equipment
Regular
(Year)
1 2
Total
Ambient
environment
Is the ambient
temperature
and humidity
within the
designated
range, and is
there any dust
or foreign
objects present?
iVisual
nspection
No ice
(ambient
temperature: -10℃
–+40℃) and no
condensation
(ambient humidity
below 50%)
Thermometer,
hygrometer,
recorder
Inverter
Are there any
abnormal
vibrations or
noise?
iVisual
nspection No abnormality
Power
voltage
Are the input
and output
voltages
normal?
Measure
voltages
between R/S/T
phases in the
inverter terminal
block.
Digital
multimeter,
tester
Input/Out
put circuit
Total
1) Megger test
(between
input/output
terminals and
and earth
terminal)
2) Is there
anything loose
in the device?
3) Is there any
evidence of
overheating in
each part?
4) Cleaning
1) Disconnect the
inverter and
short
R/S/T/U/V/W
terminals, and
then measure
from each
terminal to the
ground terminal
using Megger
test equipment.
2) Tighten up all
screws.
3) Visual
inspection
1) Over 5MΩ
2), 3) No matter
DC 500 V
Megger
Cable
connections
1) Are there any
corroded cables?
Visual inspection No abnormality
397
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Function
Table
Inspection
area
Inspection
item
Inspection
details
Inspection Cycle
Inspection
method Judgment standard
Inspection
Daily equipment
Regular
(Year)
1 2
2) Is there any
damage to cable
insulation?
Terminal
block
Is there any
damage? Visual inspection No abnormality
Smoothing
condenser
1) Is liquid
leaking inside?
2) Is the safety
apparatus in
position? Is there
any
protuberance?
3) Check the
power failure
capacity.
1), 2) Visual
inspection
3) Measure with
a capacity meter.
1),2) No
abnormality
3) Rated capacity
over 85%
Capacity meter
Relay
1) Is there any
chattering noise
during
operation?
2) Is there any
damage to the
contacts?
i1), 2) Visual
nspection
1),2) No
abnormality
Braking
resistor
1) Is there any
damage from
resistance?
2) Check for
disconnection.
1) Visual
inspection
2) Disconnect
one side and
measure with a
tester.
1) No abnormality
2) Must be within
±10% of the rated
value of the
resistor.
Digital
multimeter /
analog tester
Do not perform a megger test (insulation resistance test) on the control circuit of the inverter.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
398
Inspection
area
Inspection
item
Inspection
details
Inspection Cycle
Inspection
method
Judgment
standard
Inspection
Daily equipment
Regular
(Year)
1 2
Control
circuit
Protection
circuit
Operation
check
1) Check for
output voltage
imbalance while
the inverter is in
operation.
2) Is there an
error in the
display circuit
after the
sequence
protection test?
1) Measure
voltage between
the inverter output
terminals U/V/W.
2) Test the inverter
output protection
in both short and
open circuit
conditions.
1) Balance the
voltage between
phases: within 4 V
for 200 V series
and within 8 V for
400 V series.
2) The circuit must
work according to
the sequence.
Digital
multimeter or
DC voltmeter
Cooling
system Cooling fan
1) Is there any
abnormal
vibration or
sound?
2) Are any of the
fan parts loose?
1) Turn it manually
while the inverter
is turned off.
2) Check all
connected parts
and tighten all
screws.
1) It should turn
smoothly.
2) No abnormality
Display Meter vIs the display
alue normal?
Check the
command value
on the display
device.
Specified and
managed values
must match.
Voltmeter,
ammeter, etc.
Motor
Total
1) Are there any
abnormal
vibrations or
sound?
2) Is there any
abnormal smell?
1) Visual
inspection
2) Check the
abnormality, such
as overheating,
damage, etc.
No abnormality
Isolation
resistance
Megger test
(between the
input, output
and earth
terminals).
Disconnect the
cables for
terminals U/V/W
and test the
wiring.
Must be above 5
MΩ.
DC 500 V
Megger
If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging capability and
are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the inverter once a year and allow it to operate for 30-
60 minutes. Run the inverter under no-load conditions.
399
Table of Functions
Function
Table
13 Table of Functions
13.1 Parameter Mode – DRV Group (DRV)
DRV Group (PAR DRV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Note1)
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 1-99 9 O O O O O O
01 0h1101 FCmd
requency Target frequency
Starting frequency
-maximum
frequency (Hz)
0.0 O 137 O O O X X
02 0h1102 Cmd Torque Torque command -180–180 (%) 0.0 O 245 X X X O O
03 0h1103 Acc Timed Acceleration time 0–600 (sec) ABelow 75 kW 20.0 O 167 O O O O O
bove 90 kW 60.0
04 0h1104 Dec Time Deceleration time 0–600 (sec) ABelow 75 kW 30.0 O 167 O O O O O
1 V/F PG 232
2 Slip Compen 215
3 Sensorless-1 233
4 Sensorless-2 236
5 Vector 248
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 1) Effectiveness of each code according to the Control Mode setting.
V/F: V/Fmode (PG included), SL: Sensorless-1, 2 mode, VC: Vector mode, SLT: Sensorless-1, 2 Torque
mode,
VCT: Vector Torque mode,
Refer to the Options manual for options.
Table of Functions
400
DRV Group (PAR DRV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
10 0h110A CTorque
ontrol Torque control 10 YNeos 0: No X 233 X X X O O
11 0h110B FJog
requency Jog frequency 0
.5–maximum
frequency (Hz) 10.00 O 203 O O O O O
12 0h110C Jog Acc Time aJog run
cceleration time 0–600 (sec) 20.0 O 203 O O O O O
13 0h110D Jog Dec Time dJog run
0 Manual
1 Auto 0:Manual X 182 O X X X X
2 Advanced Auto
16
Note2) 0h1110 Fwd Boost
Forward torque
boost 0–15 (%) ABbeloovwe 7950kkWW 12..00 X 183 O X X X X
17 0h1111 Rev Boost bReverse torque
oost 0–15(%) ABbeloovwe 7950kkWW 12..00 X 183 O X X X X
18 0h1112 Base Freq Base frequency 30–400 (Hz) 60.00 X 177 O O O O O
19 0h1113 Start Freq fStarting
requency 0.01–10 (Hz) 0.50 X 177 O X X X X
20 0h1114 Max Freq fMaximum
requency 40–400 60.00 X 190 O O O O O
21 0h1115 Hz/Rpm Sel sSpeed unit
election 10 RHpz mDi sDpislapylay 0:Hz O 304 O O O O O
25 0h1119 Output Freq mOutput speed
onitoring 0-Max Frequency 0.00 O 305 O O O O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 2) DRV-16–17 displayed only when DRV-15 (Torque Boost) is set as “Manual” or “Advanced Auto”.
401
Table of Functions
Function
Table
DRV Group (PAR DRV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
26
Note2) 0h111A Adv ATB Filter Adv ATB Filter 1~1000[msec] 100 O 183 X X X O O
27 0h111B GAdv ATB M
ain Adv ATB M Gain 0~300.0[%] 50.0 O 183 O O O O O
28 0h111C GAdv ATB G
ain Adv ATB G Gain 0~300.0[%] 50.0 O 183 O O O O O
30 0h111E kW/HP Select kW/HP Select 10 kW 0: kW O 300 O O O X X
HP
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 3) ) DRV-26~28 code is displayed only when DRV-15 (Torque Boost) code value is “Advanced Auto
Table of Functions
402
13.2 Parameter Mode – Basic Function Group (BAS)
BAS Group(PAR BAS)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0-99 20 O O O O O O
01 0h1201 Aux Ref Src rAuxiliary
0 Keypad-1 0:Keypad-1 O 194 O O O X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 3) BAS-02 code is displayed only when BAS-01 (Aux Ref Src) code has a value other than “None”.
0 Max Freq
1 Delta Freq 0:Max Freq X 168 O O O X X
09 0h1209 Time Scale sTime scale
ettings
0 0.01 sec
1 0.1 sec 1:0.1 sec X 168 O O O X X
2 1 sec
10 0h120A 60/50 Hz Sel fInput power
requency 10 5600 HHzz 0:60 Hz X 81 O O O O O
11 0h120B Pole Number mNumber of
otor poles 248
Dependent on
inverter capacity
X
216
O O O O O
12 0h120C Rated Slip Rated slip speed 0–3000 (rpm) X O O O O O
13 0h120D Rated Curr cMotor rated
urrent 1–1000 (A) X O O O O O
14 0h120E Noload Curr nMotor
o-load current 0.5–1000 (A) X O O O O O
15 0h120F Rated Volt vMotor rated
oltage 180–480 (V) 0 X O O O O O
16 0h1210 Efficiency Motor efficiency 70–100 (%) Dependent on
inverter capacity
X O O O O O
17 0h1211 Inertia Rate Load inertia rate 0–8 X O O O O O
18 0h1212 Trim Power % aPower display
djustment 70–130 (%) O 303 O O O O O
19 0h1213 IAC
nput Volt
Input power
voltage
170–230 (V)
380-480 (V) 42420x0VV 328200 O 274 O O O O O
20 - TAuto
uning Auto tuning
0 None
0:None X 227 X O O O O
1 All
2 ALL(Stdstl)
3 Rs+Lsigma
4 Enc Test
5 Tr
6 Tr(Stdstl)
Table of Functions
404
BAS Group (PAR BAS)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD
Display Name Setting Range I
nitial
Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 - Rs Stator resistance sDependent on motor
etting - X 227 X O O O O
22 - Lsigma Leakage inductance sDependent on motor
etting - X 227 X O O O O
23 - Ls Stator inductance sDependent on motor
etting - X 227 X O O O O
24
Note4) - Tr Rotor time constant 25–5000 (ms) - X 227 X O O O O
41
Note5) 0h1229 User Freq 1 User frequency 1
0–maximum frequency
(Hz) 15.00 X 179 O X X X X
42 0h122A User Volt 1 User voltage 1 0–100 (%) 25 X 179 O X X X X
43 0h122B User Freq 2 User frequency 2 (0–maximum frequency
Hz) 30.00 X 179 O X X X X
44 0h122C User Volt 2 User voltage 2 0–100 (%) 50 X 179 O X X X X
45 0h122D User Freq 3 User frequency 3 0–maximum frequency
(Hz) 45.00 X 179 O X X X X
46 0h122E User Volt 3 User voltage 3 0–100 (%) 75 X 179 O X X X X
47 0h122F User Freq 4 User frequency 4 (0–maximum frequency
Hz) 60.00 X 179 O X X X X
48 0h1230 User Volt 4 User voltage 4 0–100 (%) 100 X 179 O X X X X
50
Note6) 0h1232 Step Freq-1 Multi-step speed frequency 1
Starting frequency
–maximum
frequency(Hz)
10.00 O 154 O O O X X
51 0h1233 Step Freq-2 Multi-step speed frequency 2 20.00 O 154 O O O X X
52 0h1234 Step Freq-3 Multi-step speed frequency 3 30.00 O 154 O O O X X
53 0h1235 Step Freq-4 Multi-step speed frequency 4 40.00 O 154 O O O X X
54 0h1236 Step Freq-5 Multi-step speed frequency 5 50.00 O 154 O O O X X
55 0h1237 Step Freq-6 Multi-step speed frequency 6 60.00 O 154 O O O X X
56 0h1238 Step Freq-7 Multi-step speed frequency 7 60.00 O 154 O O O X X
57 0h1239 Step Freq-8 Multi-step speed frequency 8 55.00 O 154 O O O X X
58 0h123A Step Freq-9 Multi-step speed frequency 9 50.00 O 154 O O O X X
59 0h123B 1Step Freq-
0
Multi-step speed frequency
10 45.00 O 154 O O O X X
60 0h123C 1Step Freq-
1
Multi-step speed frequency
11 40.00 O 154 O O O X X
61 0h123D 1Step Freq-
2
Multi-step speed frequency
12 35.00 O 154 O O O X X
62 0h123E 1Step Freq-
3
Multi-step speed frequency
13 25.00 O 154 O O O X X
63 0h123F Step Freq- Multi-step speed frequency 15.00 O 154 O O O X X
405
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD
Display Name Setting Range
Initial
Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
14 14
64 0h1240 1Step Freq-
5
Multi-step speed frequency
15 5.00 O 154 O O O X X
70 0h1246 Acc Time-1 Multi-step acceleration time 1 0–600 (sec) 20.0 O 170 O O O X X
71 0h1247 Dec Time-1 Multi-step deceleration time 1 0–600 (sec) 20.0 O 170 O O O X X
72
Note7) 0h1248 Acc Time-2 Multi-step acceleration time 2 0–600 (sec) 30.0 O 170 O O O X X
73 0h1249 Dec Time-2 Multi-step deceleration time 2 0–600 (sec) 30.0 O 170 O O O X X
74 0h124A Acc Time-3 Multi-step acceleration time 3 0–600 (sec) 40.0 O 170 O O O X X
75 0h124B Dec Time-3 Multi-step deceleration time 3 0–600 (sec) 40.0 O 170 O O O X X
76 0h124C Acc Time-4 Multi-step deceleration time 4 0–600 (sec) 50.0 O 170 O O O X X
77 0h124D Dec Time-4 Multi-step deceleration time 4 0–600 (sec) 50.0 O 170 O O O X X
78 0h124E Acc Time-5 Multi-step deceleration time 5 0–600 (sec) 60.0 O 170 O O O X X
79 0h124F Dec Time-5 Multi-step deceleration time 5 0–600 (sec) 60.0 O 170 O O O X X
80 0h1250 Acc Time-6 Multi-step deceleration time 6 0–600 (sec) 70.0 O 170 O O O X X
81 0h1251 Dec Time-6 Multi-step deceleration time 6 0–600 (sec) 70.0 O 170 O O O X X
82 0h1252 Acc Time-7 Multi-step deceleration time 7 0–600 (sec) 80.0 O 170 O O O X X
83 0h1253 Dec Time-7 Multi-step deceleration time 7 0–600 (sec) 80.0 O 170 O O O X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 4) BAS-24 is shown only when DRV-09 Control Mode is set to “Sensorless-2” or “Vector”.
Note 5) BAS-41–48 is displayed only when it is set as “User V/F” even if there is only one BAS-07 or M2-
V/F Patt (M2-25).
Note 6) IN-50–64 is displayed only when it is set as “multi-step speed” (Speed –L.M.H,X) even if there is
only one among multi-function input IN-65–72.
Note 7) displayed only when it is set as “multi-step Acc/Dec” (Xcel-L,M,H) even if there is only one among
multi-function input IN-72–75.
Table of Functions
406
13.3 Parameter Mode – Expansion Function Group
(PARADV)
Expansion Function Group (PAR ADV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0–99 24 O - O O O O O
01 0h1301 Acc Pattern Acceleration pattern 0 Linear 0:Linear X 173 O O O X X
02 0h1302 Dec Pattern Deceleration pattern 1 S-curve X 173 O O O X X
03 0h1303 Acc S Start pS-curve acceleration start
oint gradient 1–100 (%) 40 X 173 O O O X X
04 0h1304 Acc S End pS-curve acceleration end
oint gradient 1–100 (%) 40 X 173 O O O X X
05 0h1305 Dec S Start pS-curve deceleration start
oint gradient 1–10 0 (%) 40 X 173 O O O X X
06 0h1306 Dec S End pS-curve deceleration end
oint gradient 1–100 (%) 40 X 173 O O O X X
07 0h1307 Start Mode Start mode 10 Acc 0:Acc X 186 O O O X X
Dc-Start
08 0h1308 Stop Mode Stop mode
0 Dec
0:Dec X 187 O O O X X
1 Dc-Brake
2 Free-Run
3 Flux Braking
4 Power Braking
09 0h1309 Run Prevent rSelection of prohibited
otation direction
0 None
1 Forward Prev 0:None X 163 O O O X X
2 Reverse Prev
10 0h130A Power-on Run Start with power on 10 No 0:No O 165 O O O X X
Yes
12
Note8) 0h130C Dc-Start Time Starting DC braking time 0–60 (sec) 0.00 X 283 O O O X X
13 0h130D Dc Inj Level DC supply 0–200 (%) 50 X 283 O O O X X
14
Note9) 0h130E Dc-Block Time
Output blocking time
before DC braking 0–60 (sec) 0.10 X 187 O O O X X
15 0h130F Dc-Brake Time DC braking time 0–60 (sec) 1.00 X 187 O O O X X
16 0h1310 Dc-Brake Level DC braking rate 0–200 (%) 50 X 187 O O O X X
17 0h1311 Dc-Brake Freq DC braking frequency Starting frequency–60 (Hz) 5.00 X 187 O O O X X
20 0h1314 Acc Dwell Freq fAcceleration dwell
requency
Starting frequency
–maximum frequency (Hz) 5.00 X 283 O O O X X
21 0h1315 Acc Dwell Time oAcceleration dwell
peration time 0–60.0 (sec) 0.00 X 283 O O O X X
22 0h1316 Dec Dwell Freq fDeceleration dwell
requency
Starting frequency
–maximum frequency (Hz) 5.00 X 283 O O O X X
23 0h1317 Dec Dwell Time oDeceleration dwell
peration time 0–60.0 (sec) 0.00 X 283 O O O X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 8) ADV-12 is displayed only when ADV-07 “Stop Mode” is set as “DC-Start”.
Note 9) ADV-14–17 is displayed only when ADV-08 “Stop Mode” is set as “DC-Brake”.
407
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Expansion Function Group (PAR ADV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD
Display Name Setting Range VInailtuiael
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
24 0h1318 Freq Limit Frequency limit 10 No 0:No X 190 O O O X X
Yes
25
Note10) 0h1319
Freq Limit
Lo Frequency lower limit 0–upper limit (Hz) 0.50 O 190 O O O X X
26 0h131A HFreq Limit
i Frequency upper limit 0
.5–maximum frequency
(Hz) 60.00 X 190 O O O X X
27 0h131B Jump Freq Frequency jump 10 No 0:No X 193 O O O X X
Yes
28
Note 11) 0h131C Jump Lo 1
Jump frequency lower
limit 1
0–jump frequency upper
limit 1 (Hz) 10.00 O 193 O O O X X
29 0h131D Jump Hi 1 lJump frequency upper
imit 1
Jump frequency lower limit
1–maximum frequency (Hz) 15.00 O 193 O O O X X
30 0h131E Jump Lo 2 lJump frequency lower
imit 2
0–jump frequency
upper limit 2 (Hz) 20.00 O 193 O O O X X
31 0h131F Jump Hi 2 lJump frequency upper
imit 2
Jump frequency lower limit
2–maximum frequency (Hz) 25.00 O 193 O O O X X
32 0h1320 Jump Lo 3 lJump frequency lower
imit 3
0-jump frequency
upper limit 3 (Hz) 30.00 O 193 O O O X X
33 0h1321 Jump Hi 3 lJump frequency upper
imit 3
Jump frequency lower limit
3–maximum frequency (Hz) 35.00 O 193 O O O X X
34
Note10) 0h1322
Jog Freq
Limit Jog frequency limit 10 YNeos 1:Yes O 191 O O O X X
41
Note12) 0h1329 BR Rls Curr Brake release current 0–180.0 (%) 50.0 O 283 O O O X X
42 0h132A BR Rls Dly tBrake release delay
ime 0–10.00 (sec) 1.00 X 283 O O O X X
44 0h132C FBR Rls Fwd
r
Brake release
forward frequency 0–400 (Hz) 1.00 X 283 O O O X X
45 0h132D FBR Rls Rev
r
Brake release
reverse frequency 0–400 (Hz) 1.00 X 283 O O O X X
46 0h132E BR Eng Dly tBrake engage delay
ime 0–10 (sec) 1.00 X 283 O O O X X
47 0h132F BR Eng Fr fBrake engage
requency 0–400 (Hz) 2.00 X 283 O O O X X
50 0h1332 ME-Save
ode
Energy saving
operation
0 None
1 Manual 0:None X 252 O O X X X
2 Auto
51
Note13) 0h1333
Energy
Save Energy saving amount 0–30 (%) 0 O 252 O O O X X
60 0h133C CXcel
hange Fr
Acc/dec time
transition frequency 0–maximum frequency (Hz) 0.00 X 172 O O O X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 10) ADV-25–26, 34 is displayed only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set as “Freq Limit”.
Note 11) ADV-28–33 is displayed only when ADV-27 (Jump Freq) is set as “Yes”.
Note 12) ADV-41–47 is displayed only when a code of OUT-31–33 is set as “BR Control”.
Note 13) ADV-51 is displayed only when ADV-50 (E-Save Mode) is set as a value other than “None”.
Table of Functions
408
Expansion Function Group (PAR ADV)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
61 - GLoad Spd
ain
Revolution display
gain 0.1-6000.0 (%) 100.0 O 304 O O O X X
62 - SLoad Spd
cale
Revolution display
scale
0 x 1
0:x 1 O 304 O O O X X
1 x 0.1
2 x 0.01
3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
63 0h133F ULoad Spd
nit
Revolution display
unit 10 MRppmm 0:rpm O 304 O O O O O
64 0h1340 FAN Control Cooling fan control
0 During Run 0:During
1 Always ON Run O 265 O O O X X
2 Temp Control
65 0h1341 MU/D Save
ode
Up/down
operation frequency
save
0 No
1 Yes 0:No O 206 O O O X X
66 0h1342 SOn/Off Ctrl
rc
Output contact
On/Off control
options
0 None
0:None X 285 O O O O O
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
4 I2
67 0h1343 On-C Level OOutput contact point
n level 10–100 (%) 90.00 X 285 O O O O O
68 0h1344 Off-C Level OOutput contact point
ff level
-100.00–output contact
point On level (%) 10.00 X 285 O O O O O
70 0h1346 MRun En
ode
Safe operation
selection
0 Always Enable 0:Always
1 DI Dependent Enable X 212 O O O O O
71
Note14) 0h1347 Run Dis Stop
Safe operation stop
method
0 Free-Run
0:Free-
Run X 212 O O O O O
1 Q-Stop
2 RQ-Stop
esume
72 0h1348 Q-Stop Time dSafe operation
eceleration time 0–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 212 O O O O O
73 0h1349 MRegenAvd
ode
Regeneration evasion
mode
Bit 001-111
0 Steady 001 X 295 O O O O O
1 Accelerating
2 Decelerating
74 0h134A SRegenAvd
el
Selection of
regeneration evasion
function for press
0 No
1 Yes No X 295 O O O O O
75 0h134B LRegenAvd
evel
Operational voltage
level of regeneration
evasion motion for
press
200 V: 300–400 350 V
400 V: 600–800 700 V X 295 O O O X X
76
Note15) 0h134C
CompFreq
Limit
Compensation
frequency limit of
regeneration for
evasion for press
0–10.00 Hz 1.00 (Hz) X 295 O O O X X
77 0h134D PRegenAvd
gain
Regeneration evasion
for press P gain 0–100.0 % 50.0 (%) O 295 O O O X X
409
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
78 0h134E IRegenAvd
gain
Regeneration evasion
for press I gain 20–30000 (ms) 500 (ms) O 295 O O O X X
79 0h134F LDB Turn On
ev
DB unit operating
voltage 420000 VV :: 630500––840000 ((VV)) 738900 ((VV)) X 299 O O O O O
80 0h1350 SFire Mode
el Select fire mode
0 None
1 Fire Mode 0:None X 297 O O O X X
2 Fire Test
81
Note16) 0h1351
Fire Mode
Freq Fire mode frequency
0-maximum frequency
(Hz) 60.00 X 297 O O O X X
82 0h1352 DFireq Mode
ir
Fire mode operating
direction
0 Forward 0:Forwar
1 Reverse d X 297 O O O X X
83 - CFire Mode
nt Fire mode counter 0-99 0 X 297 O O O X X
85 0h1355 SU/D Mode
el U/D Mode
0 U/D Normal 0:U/D
1 U/D Step Normal X 206 O O O X X
2 U/D Step+Norm
86
Note17) 0h1356 U/D Step
Freq
U/D
step frequency
0-maximum frequency
[Hz] 0.00 O 206 O O O X X
92
Note18)
0h135C SlipGain
Mot-H
slip compensation
offsetting gain H 0~200[%] 50 O 216 O X X X X
93 0h135D SlipGain
Gen-H
slip compensation
regenerative gain H 0~200[%] 50 O 216 O X X X X
94 0h135E SlipGain
Mot-L
slip compensation
offsetting gain L 0~200[%] 50 O 216 O X X X X
95 0h135F SlipGain
Gen-L
slip compensation
regenerative gain L 0~200[%] 50 O 216 O X X X X
96 0h1360 Slip Filter slip compensation
filter 0~10000[msec] 300 O 216 O X X X X
97 0h1361 Slip Comp
Freq
slip compensation
frequency 0~60.00[Hz] 5.00 O 216 O X X X X
98 0h1362 Slip Gain
Freq
slip compensation
gain switchover
frequency
0~20.00[Hz] 9.00 O 216 O X X X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 14) ADV-71–72 is displayed only when ADV-70 (Run En Mode) is set as “DI Dependent”.
ADV-73 is displayed only when ADV-74 (RegenAvd Sel) is set as “Yes”.
Note15) ADV-76–78 is displayed only when ADV-75 (RegenAvd Sel) is set as “Yes”.
Note16) ADV-81–83 displayed only when ADV-80 (Fire Mode Sel) is set as “Fire Mode” or “Fire Test”.
Note17) ADV-86 is displayed when ADV-85 (U/D Mode Sel)is not set to “U/D Normal”.
Note18) ADV-92–98 is displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set as “Slip Compen”
Table of Functions
410
13.4 Parameter Mode – Control Function Group
(CON)
Control Function Group (PAR CON)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0-99 51 O O O O O O
ime 0–60 (sec) 1.00 X 241 X X O O O
10 0h140A Flux Force pInitial excitation
ower supply 100–500 (%) 100.0 X 241 X X O O O
11 0h140B Hold Time
Continued
operation
duration
0–60 (sec)
Dependent
on control
mode
X 241 X X O X X
12 0h140C GASR P
ain 1
Speed controller
proportional
gain 1
10–500 (%) 50.0 O 241 X X O X X
13 0h140D GASR I
ain 1
Speed controller
integral gain 1 10–9999 (msec) 300 O 241 X X O X X
15 0h140F GASR P
ain 2
Speed controller
proportional
gain 2
10–500 ( %) 50.0 O 241 X X O X X
16 0h1410 GASR I
ain 2
Speed controller
integral gain 2 10–9999 (ms) 300 O 241 X X O X X
18 0h1412 Gain SW Freq fGain exchange
requency 0–120 (Hz) 0.00 X 241 X X O X X
19 0h1413 DGain Sw
elay
Gain exchange
time 0–100 (sec) 0.10 X 241 X X O X X
20 0h1414 VSL2 G
iew Sel
Sensorless 2nd
gain display
setting
0 No
1 Yes 0:No O 236 X X X X X
21 0h1415 GASR-SL P
ain1
Sensorless
speed controller
proportional
gain1
0–5000 (%)
Dependent
on motor
capacity
O 236 X O X X X
22 0h1416 ASR-SL I
Gain1
Sensorless
speed controller
integral gain 1
10–9999 (ms)
Dependent
on motor
capacity
O 236 X O X X X
23 0h1417 ASR-SL P Senseless speed 1.0–1000.0 (%) Dependent O 236 X X X X X
411
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
Note17) Gain2 controller
proportional
gain 2
on motor
capacity
24 0h1418 GASR-SL I
ain2
Sensorless2
speed controller
integral gain 2
1.0–1000.0 (%)
Dependent
on motor
capacity
O 236 X X X X X
26 0h141A GObserver
ain1
Sensorless2
measurer gain 1 0–30000 10500 O 236 X X X X X
27 0h141B GObserver
ain2
Sensorless2
measurer gain 2 1–1000 (%) 100.0 O 236 X X X X X
28 0h141C GObserver
ain3
Sensorless2
measurer gain 3 0–30000 13000 O 236 X X X X X
29 0h141D S-Est P Gain1
Sensorless2
speed estimator
proportional
gain 1
0–30000
Dependent
on motor
capacity
O 236 X X X X X
30 0h141E S-Est I Gain1
Sensorless2
speed estimator
integral gain 1
0–30000
Dependent
on motor
capacity
O 236 X X X X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 17) CON-23–28, 31–32 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is “Sensorless2” and CON-20
(SL2 G View Sel) is set as “Yes”.
Table of Functions
412
Control Function Group (PAR CON)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
31 0h141F S-Est P Gain2
Sensorless2 speed
estimator proportional
gain 2
1.0–1000.0 (%)
Dependen
t on motor
capacity
O 236 X X X X X
32 0h1420 S-Est I Gain2 eSensorless2 speed
stimator integral gain 2 1.0–1000.0 (%)
Dependen
t on motor
capacity
O 236 X X X X X
34 0h1422 PSL2 OVM
erc
Sensorless2 overvoltage
modulation range
adjustment
100–180 (%) 120 X 239 X O X X X
35 0h1423 ESL2 L-
xcitLmt
Magnetic flux current
minimum ratio 3~100[%] 10 O 246 X X X O X
45
Note18) 0h142D PG P Gain
PG operation proportional
gain 0–9999 3000 O 232 O X X X X
46 0h142E PG I Gain PG operation integral gain 0–9999 50 O 232 O X X X X
47 0h142F PG Slip Max% sPG operation maximum
lip 0–200 100 X 232 O X X X X
48 - ACR P Gain Current controller P gain 0–10000 1200 O 237 X O O O O
49 - ACR I Gain Current controller I gain 0–10000 120 O 237 X O O O O
51 0h1433 ASR Ref LPF rSpeed controller
eference filter 0–20000 (ms) 0 X 241 X O O X X
52 0h1434 LTorque Out
PF
Torque controller
output filter 0–2000 (ms) 0 X 241 X X X O O
Forward offsetting
torque limit 0–200 (%) 180.0 O 241 X X X O O
55 0h1437 LFWD –Trq
mt
Forward offsetting
torque limit 0–200 (%) 180.0 O 241 X X X O O
56 0h1438 REV +Trq Lmt tReverse regenerative
orque limit 0–200 (%) 180.0 O 241 X X X O O
57 0h1439 REV –Trq Lmt tReverse regenerative
orque limit 0–200 (%) 180.0 O 241 X X X O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 18) CON-45–47 are displayed when the Encoder module is installedand Control mode is set as “V/F
PG”.
Note 19) CON-54–57 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set as “Sensorless-1, 2” or
“Vector”. In addition, the initial value of the torque limit is changed to 150% when the ADV-74
RegenAvd Level function is set.
413
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Control Function Group (PAR CON)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
1)Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
58 0h143A Trq Bias Src sTorque bias
etting options
0 Keypad-1
0:Keypad-1 X 241 X X O X X
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
3 I1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
8 PLC
59 0h143B Torque Bias Torque bias -120–120 (%) 0.0 O 241 X X O X X
60 0h143C BTorque
ias FF
Torque bias
compensation 0–100 (%) 0.0 O 241 X X O X X
Speed limit operation
gain 100–5000 (%) 500 O 246 X X X X O
66 0h1442 Droop Perc aDroop operation
mount 0–100 (%) 0.0 O 248 X X X X O
67
Note20) 0h1443 Droop St Trq Droop start torque 0–100 (%) 100.0 O 248 X X X X O
68 0h1444 TSPD/TRQAcc
Torque mode
speed mode
exchange acceleration
time
0–600 (sec) 20.0 O 248 X X X X O
69 0h1445 TSPD/TRQAcc
Torque mode
speed mode
exchange deceleration
time
0–600 (sec) 30.0 O 248 X X X X O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 20) CON-67 is displayed only when the Encoder option module is installed.
Table of Functions
414
Control Function Group (PAR CON)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Opera-
tion
Page
1)Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
70 0h1446 SS Mode mSpeed search
ode selection 10 FFllyyiinngg SSttaarrtt -- 21 0 X 254 O O O X X
71 0h1447 Speed Search oSpeed search
peration selection
Bit 0000-1111
0000 X 254 O O O X X
1
Speed search
selection on
acceleration
2 tRestart after
rips
3
Restart after
instantaneous
interruption
4
Start
immediately
after power
On
72
Note21) 0h1448
SS Sup-
Current
Speed search
standard current 80–200 (%)
Below 75
kW 150 O 254 O O X X X
Above 90
kW 100
73 0h1449 SS P-Gain pSpeed search
roportional gain 0–9999 100 O 254 O O X X X
74 0h144A SS I-Gain iSpeed search
ntegral gain 0–9999 200 O 254 O O X X X
75 0h144B SS Block Time
Output
block time before
speed search
0–60 (sec) 1.0 X 254 O O X X X
77 0h144D KEB Select sEnergy buffering
election
0 None
1 KEB-1 0:None X 249 O O O X X
2 KEB-2
78
Note21) 0h144E KEB Start Lev
Energy buffering
start level 110–200 (%) 125.0 X 249 O O O X X
79 0h144F KEB Stop Lev sEnergy buffering
top level 130–210 (%) 130.0 X 249 O O O X X
80 0h1450 KEB Gain gEnergy buffering
ain 1–2000 1000 O 249 O O O X X
82
Note22) 0h1452
ZSD
Frequency
Permanent
detection
frequency
0–10 (Hz) 2.00 O 320 X X O X O
83 0h1453 ZSD Band
Permanent
detection
frequency band
0–2 (Hz) 1.00 O 320 X X O X O
86
Note23) 0h1456 KEB P Gain
Energy buffering P
gain 0–20000 1000 O 249 O O O X X
87 0h1457 KEB I Gain gEnergy buffering I
ain 1–20000 500 O 249 O O O X X
88 0h1458 KEB Slip Gain sEnergy buffering
lip gain 0–2000.0 (%) 30.0 O 249 O O O X X
89 0h1459 KEB Acc Time aEnergy buffering
cceleration time 0–600 (sec) 10.0 O 249 O O O X X
415
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift
in
Opera-
tion
Page
1)Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
90 0h145A New AHR Sel
Select function for
preventing current
hunting
0 No
1 Yes 0:No O 296 O X X X X
91 0h145B AHR P-Gain hGain from current
unting prevention 0 -32767 1000 X 296 O X X X X
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 21) CON-72–75 are displayed only when CON-71,77 is set as a bit or other than “None”.
Note 22) CON-82–83 are displayed only when DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set as “Vector”.
Note 23) CON-78–79,86-89 are displayed only when CON-77 (KEB Select) is set as “KEB-1” or “KEB-2”
Note 24) CON-91 is displayed only when CON-90 (New AHR Sel) is set as “Yes”.
Table of Functions
416
13.5 Parameter Mode – Input Terminal Block Function
Group (IN)
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR IN)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0-99 65 O - O O O O O
01 0h1501 aFreq
t 100%
Frequency at maximum
analog input
Start
frequency-
maximum
frequency (Hz)
60.00 O 138 O O O X X
02 0h1502 Torque at 100% aTorque at maximum
nalog input 0–200 (%) 100.0 O 138 X X O O O
05 0h1505 V1 Monitor(V) V1 input voltage display 0–10 (V) 0.00 O 138 O O O O O
06 0h1506 V1 Polarity V1 input polarity selection 0 Unipolar 0:
1 Bipolar Unipolar O 138 O O O O O
07 0h1507 V1 Filter cV1 input filter time
onstant 0–10000 (ms) 10 O 138 O O O O O
08 0h1508 V1 Volt x1 V1 minimum input voltage 0–10 (V) 0.00 O 138 O O O O O
09 0h1509 V1 Perc y1 vV1 minimum output
oltage (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 O 138 O O O O O
10 0h150A V1 Volt x2 V1 maximum input voltage 0–10 (V) 10.00 O 138 O O O O O
11 0h150B V1 Perc y2 vV1 maximum output
oltage (%) 0–100 (%) 100.00 O 138 O O O O O
12
Note24) 0h150C V1 (–)Volt x1’
V1 (–) minimum input
voltage -10–0 (V) 0.00 O 144 O O O O O
13 0h150D V1(–)Perc y1’ vV1 (–) minimum output
oltage (%) -100–0 (%) 0.00 O 144 O O O O O
14 0h150E V1(–)Volt x2’ vV1 (–) maximum input
oltage -10–0 (V) -10.00 O 144 O O O O O
15 0h150F V1(–)Perc y2’ vV1 (–) maximum output
oltage (%) -100–0 (%) -100.00 O 144 O O O O O
16 0h1510 V1 Inverting Rotation direction change 10 No 0: No O 138 O O O O O
Yes
17 0h1511 V1 Quantizing V1 quantization change 0.04–10 (%) 0.04 O 138 O O O O O
20 0h1514 I1 Monitor(mA) I1 input display 0–20 (mA) 0.00 O 146 O O O O O
22 0h1516 I1 Filter I1 input filter time constant 0–10000 (ms) 10 O 146 O O O O O
23 0h1517 I1 Curr x1 I1 minimum input current 0–20 (mA) 4.00 O 146 O O O O O
24 0h1518 I1 Perc y1 cOutput at I1 minimum
urrent (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 O 146 O O O O O
25 0h1519 I1 Curr x2 I1 maximum input current 4-20 (mA) 20.00 O 146 O O O O O
26 0h151A I1 Perc y2 cOutput at I1 maximum
urrent 0-100 (%) 100.00 O 146 O O O O O
31 0h151F I1 Inverting Rotation direction change 10 No 0: No O 146 O O O O O
Yes
32 0h1520 I1 Quantizing I1 quantization level 0.04–10 (%) 0.04 O 146 O O O O O
Note 24) IN-12–15 codes are displayed only when IN-06 (V1 Polarity) is set as “Bipolar”.
417
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR IN)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
35
Note 25) 0h1523
V2
Monitor(V) V2 input display 0–10 (V) 0.00 O 148 O O O O O
36 0h1524 V2 Polarity V1 input polarity selection 0 Unipolar 1:
1 Bipolar Bipolar O 148 O O O O O
37 0h1525 V2 Filter V2 input filter time constant (0–10000
ms) 10 O 148 O O O O O
38 0h1526 V2 Volt x1 V2 minimum input voltage 0–10 (V) 0.00 O 148 O O O O O
39 0h1527 V2 Perc y1 vOutput at V2 minimum
oltage (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 O 148 O O O O O
40 0h1528 V2 Volt x2 V2 maximum input voltage 0–10 (V) 10.00 O 148 O O O O O
41 0h1529 V2 Perc y2 vOutput at V2 maximum
oltage (%) 0–100 (%) 100.00 O 148 O O O O O
42 0h152A V2 –Volt x1’ V2 –minimum input voltage -10–0 (V) 0.00 O 148 O O O O O
43 0h152B V2–Perc y1’ vOutput at V2–minimum
oltage (%) -100–0 (%) 0.00 O 148 O O O O O
44 0h152C V2 –Volt x2’ V2 –maximum input voltage -10–0 (V) -10.00 O 148 O O O O O
45 0h152D V2 –Perc y2’ vOutput at V2–maximum
oltage (%) -100–0 (%) -100.00 O 148 O O O O O
46 0h152E V2 Inverting Rotation direction change 10 No 0:No O 148 O O O O O
Yes
47 0h152F QV2
uantizing V2 quantization level 0.04–10 (%) 0.04 O 148 O O O O O
50 0h1532
I2
Monitor(mA
)
I2 input display 0–20 (mA) 0.00 O 149 O O O O O
52 0h1534 I2 Filter I2 input filter time constant (0–10000
ms) 15 O 149 O O O O O
53 0h1535 I2 Curr x1 I2 minimum input current 0–20 (mA) 4.00 O 149 O O O O O
54 0h1536 I2 Perc y1 cOutput at I2 minimum
urrent (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 O 149 O O O O O
55 0h1537 I2 Curr x2 I2 maximum input current 0–20 (mA) 20.00 O 149 O O O O O
56 0h1538 I2 Perc y2 cOutput at I2 maximum
urrent (%) 0–100 (%) 100.00 O 149 O O O O O
61 0h153D I2 Inverting Rotation direction change 10 No 0:No O 149 O O O O O
Yes
62 0h153F QI2
uantizing I2 quantization level 0.04–10 (%) 0.04 O 149 O O O O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 25) IN-35–62 codes are displayed only when the expansion IO module is installed.
Table of Functions
418
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR IN)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD
Display Name Setting Range VInailtuiael
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
65 0h1541 P1 Define P1 terminal function setting 10 NONE 1:FX X 158 O O O O O
FX
66 0h1542 P2 Define P2 terminal function setting 2 RX 2:RX X 158 X X O O O
67 0h1543 P3 Define P3 terminal function setting 3 RST 5:BX X 347 O O O O O
68 0h1544 P4 Define P4 terminal function setting 4 External Trip 3:RST X 336 O O O O O
69 0h1545 P5 Define P5 terminal function setting 5 BX 7:Sp-L X 346 O O O O O
70 0h1546 P6 Define P6 terminal function setting 6 JOG 8:Sp-M X 203 O O O O O
71 0h1547 P7 Define P7 terminal function setting 7 Speed-L 9:Sp-H X 154 O O O O O
72 0h1548 P8 Define P8 terminal function setting 8 Speed-M 6:JOG X 154 O O O O O
73
Note26) 0h1549 P9 Define P9 terminal function setting 9 Speed-H 0:NONE X 154 O O O O O
74 0h154A DP10
efine
P10 terminal function
setting 10 Speed-X 0:NONE X 154
O O O O O
75 0h154B DP11
efine
P11 terminal function
setting 11 XCEL-L 0:NONE X 170
12 XCEL-M 170
13 RUN Enable 212
14 3-Wire 211
15 2nd Source 194
16 Exchange 264
17 Up 206
18 Down 206
19 U/D Save 206
20 U/D Clear 206
21 Analog Hold 153
22 I-Term Clear 215
23 PID Openloop 215
24 P Gain2 215
25 XCEL Stop 176
26 2nd Motor 261
27 Trv Offset Lo 281
28 Trv Offset Hi 281
29 Interlock 1 292
30 Interlock 2 292
31 Interlock 3 292
32 Interlock 4 292
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 26) IN73–75 codes are displayed only when the expansion IO module is installed.
419
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR IN)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
33 -Reserved- -
34 Pre Excite -
35 Speed/Torque 246
36 ASR Gain 2 241
37 ASR P/PI 241
38 Timer In 276
39 Thermal In 333
40 Dis Aux Ref 198
41 SEQ-1 277
42 SEQ-2 277
43 Manual 277
44 Go Step 277
45 Hold Step 277
46 FWD JOG 204
47 REV JOG 204
48 Trq Bias 245
49 XCEL-H 170
50 KEB Select 249
51 Fire Mode 297
85 0h1555 DI On Delay tMulti-function input
erminal On filter 0–10000 (ms) 10 O 196 O O O O O
86 0h1556 DI Off Delay tMulti-function input
erminal Off filter 0–10000 (ms) 3 O 196 O O O O O
87 0h1557 DINC/NO Sel
Multi-function input
contact point
selection
P8 – P1
0 A contact point (NO) 0000 0000 X 196 O O O O O
1 B contact point (NC)
88 0h1558 RunOn Delay dOperating command
elay time 0–100 (sec) 0.00 X 196 O O O O O
89 0h1559 InCheck Time cSequential
ommand delay time 1–5000 (ms) 1 X 196 O O O O O
90 0h155A DI Status tMulti-function input
erminal status
P8 – P1
0 Open (Off) 0000 0000 O 196 O O O O O
1 Connection (On)
Table of Functions
420
13.6 Parameter Mode – Output Terminal Block
Function Group (OUT)
Output Terminal Block Function Group (PAR OUT)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - JumpCode Jump code 0-99 30 O - O O O O O
01 0h1601 AO1 Mode Analog output 1
0 Frequency
0:
Frequency O 308 O O O O O
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PIDRef Value
13 PIDFdb Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
02 0h1602 AO1 Gain Analog output1 gain -1000–1000(%) 100.0 O 308 O O O O O
03 0h1603 AO1 Bias Analog output 1 bias -100–100(%) 0.0 O 308 O O O O O
04 0h1604 AO1 Filter Analog output1 filter 0–10000 (ms) 5 O 308 O O O O O
05 0h1605 CAO1
onst %
Analog constant output
1 0–1000(%) 0.0 O 308 O O O O O
06 0h1606 MAO1
onitor
Analog output 1
monitor 0–1000(%) 0.0 - 308 O O O O O
07 0h1607 AO2 Mode Analog output 2 item
0 Frequency
0:
Frequency O 311 O O O O O
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PIDRef Value
13 PIDFbk Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
421
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Output Terminal Block Function Group (PAR OUT)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD
Display Name Setting Range VInailtuiael
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
08 0h1608 AO2 Gain Analog output 2 gain -1000–1000 (%) 80.0 O 311 O O O O O
09 0h1609 AO2 Bias Analog output 2 bias -100–100 (%) 20.0 O 311 O O O O O
10 0h160A AO2 Filter Analog output 2 filter 0–10000 (ms) 5 O 311 O O O O O
11 0h160B CAO2
onst %
Analog constant output
2 0–100 (%) 0.0 O 311 O O O O O
12 0h160C MAO2
onitor Analog output 2 monitor 0–1000 (%) 0.0 O 311 O O O O O
14
Note27) 0h160E AO3 Mode Analog output 3 item
0 Frequency
0:
Frequency O 314 O O O O O
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fbk Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
15 0h160F AO3 Gain Analog output 3 gain -1000–1000 (%) 100.0 O 314 O O O O O
16 0h1610 AO3 Bias Analog output 3 bias -100–100 (%) 0.0 O 314 O O O O O
17 0h1611 AO3 Filter Analog output 3 filter 0–10000 (ms) 5 O 314 O O O O O
18 - CAO3
onst %
Analog constant output
3 0–100 (%) 0.0 O 314 O O O O O
19 0h1613 MAO3
onitor Analog output 3 monitor -1000–1000 (%) 0.0 O 314 O O O O O
20 0h1614 AO4 Mode Analog output 4 item
0 Frequency
0:
Frequency 315 O O O O O
1 Current
2 Voltage
3 DC Link Volt
4 Torque
5 Watt
6 Idss
7 Iqss
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
11 Speed Dev
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fbk Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Table of Functions
422
Output Terminal Block Function Group (PAR OUT)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 0h1615 AO4 Gain Analog output 4 gain -1000–1000 (%) 80.0 - 315 O O O O O
22 0h1616 AO4 Bias Analog output 4 bias -100–100 (%) 20.0 O 315 O O O O O
23 0h1617 AO4 Filter Analog output 4 filter 0–10000 (ms) 5 O 315 O O O O O
24 - CAO4
onst %
Analog constant
output 4 0–100 (%) 0.0 O 315 O O O O O
25 0h1619 MAO4
onitor
Analog output 4
monitor 0–1000 (%) 0.0 O 315 O O O O O
30 0h161E OTrip
ut Mode Failure output item
Bit 000 - 111
010 O 316 O O O O O
1 Low voltage
2 lFailure other than
ow voltage
3 aFinal failure of
utomatic restart
31 0h161F Relay 1 Multi-function relay 1 0 NONE 29:Trip O 316 O O O O O
32 0h1620 Relay 2 Multi-function relay 2 1 FDT-1 14:Run O 316 O O O O O
33 0h1621 Q1 Define 1Multi-function output 2 FDT-2 1:FDT-1 O 316 O O O O O
34
Note28) 0h1622 Relay 3 Multi-function relay 3 3 FDT-3 2:FDT-2 O 316 O O O O O
35 0h1623 Relay 4 Multi-function relay 4 4 FDT-4 3:FDT-3 O 316 O O O O O
36 0h1624 Relay 5 Multi-function relay 5 5 Over Load 4:FDT-4 O 316 O O O O O
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
13 Lost Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
20 Step Pulse
21 Seq Pulse
22 Ready
23 Trv Acc
24 Trv Dec
25 MMC
26 Zspd Dect
27 Torque Dect
28 Timer Out
Note 27) OUT 14-25 codes are displayed only when the expansion IO module is installed.
Note 28) OUT 34-36 codes are displayed only when the expansion IO module is installed.
423
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Output Terminal Block Function Group (PAR OUT)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
29 Trip
30 Lost Keypad
31 DB Warn %ED
32 ENC Tune
33 ENC Dir
34 On/Off Control
35 BR Control
36 KEB Operating
37 Fire Mode
38 Run2
41 0h1629 DO Status mMulti-function output
onitoring - 000 X 316 - - - - -
50 0h1632 DO On Delay OMulti-function output
n delay 0–100 (sec) 0.00 O 323 O O O O O
51 0h1633 DO Off Delay OMulti-function output
ff delay 0–100 (sec) 0.00 O 323 O O O O O
52 0h1634 NDO
C/NO Sel
Multi-function output
contact point
selection
Q1,Relay2,Relay1
0 A 000 X 323 O O O O O
contact point
(NO)
1 (B contact point
NC)
53 0h1635 TripOut OnDly dFailure output On
elay 0–100 (sec) 0.00 O 322 O O O O O
54 0h1636 TripOut OffDly dFailure output Off
elay 0–100.00 (sec) 0.00 O 322 O O O O O
55 0h1637 TimerOn Delay Timer On delay 0–100.00 (sec) 0.00 O 276 O O O O O
56 0h1638 TimerOff Delay Timer Off delay 0–100.00 (sec) 0.00 O 276 O O O O O
57 0h1639 FDT Frequency Detected frequency f0–maximum
requency (Hz) 30.00 O 317 O O O O O
58 0h163A FDT Band wDetected frequency
idth
0–maximum
frequency (Hz) 10.00 O 317 O O O O O
59 0h163B TD Level aDetected torque
mount 0–150 (%) 100 O 246 X X O X O
60 0h163C TD Band wDetected torque
idth 0–10 (%) 5.0 O 246 X X O X O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Table of Functions
424
13.7 Parameter Mode – Communication Function
Group (COM)
Communication Function Group (PAR COM)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control
Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0–99 20 O - O O O O O
01 0h1701 Int485 St ID iBuilt-in communication
nverter ID 1–250 1 O 354 O O O O O
02 0h1702 Int485 Proto pBuilt-in communication
Communication option
S/W version - 1.00 O Option O O O O O
07 0h1707 FBus ID iCommunication option
nverter ID 0–255 1 O Option O O O O O
08 0h1708 BFBUS
audRate
FBus communication
speed - 12 Mbps Option O O O O O
09 0h1709 FieldBus LED LCommunication option
ED status - - O Option O O O O O
30 0h171E NParaStatus
um
Number of output
parameters 0–8 3 O 359 O O O O O
31 0h171F Para Stauts-1 Output address 1 0000-FFFF Hex 000A O 359 O O O O O
32 0h1720 Para Stauts-2 Output address 2 0000-FFFF Hex 000E O 359 O O O O O
33 0h1721 Para Stauts-3 Output address 3 0000-FFFF Hex 000F O 359 O O O O O
34 0h1722 Para Stauts-4 Output address 4 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O 359 O O O O O
35 0h1723 Para Stauts-5 Output address 5 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O 359 O O O O O
36 0h1724 Para Stauts-6 Output address 6 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O 359 O O O O O
37 0h1725 Para Stauts-7 Output address 7 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O 359 O O O O O
38 0h1726 Para Stauts-8 Output address 8 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O 359 O O O O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 29-1) COM 06–17 codes are displayed only when the communication module is installed.
Refer to the Options manual for options.
425
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Communication Function Group (PAR COM)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
50 0h1732 Para Ctrl Num pNumber of input
arameters 0–8 2 O 359 O O O O O
51 0h1733 Para Control-1 Input address 1 0000-FFFF Hex 0005 X 359 O O O O O
52 0h1734 Para Control-2 Input address 2 0000-FFFF Hex 0006 X 359 O O O O O
53 0h1735 Para Control-3 Input address 3 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
54 0h1736 Para Control-4 Input address 4 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
55 0h1737 Para Control-5 Input address 5 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
56 0h1738 Para Control-6 Input address 6 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
57 0h1739 Para Control-7 Input address 7 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
58 0h173A Para Control-8 Input address 8 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X 359 O O O O O
68 0h1744 FBus Swap Sel Profibus swap 10 No 0:No X Option O O O O O
Yes
70 0h1746 Virtual DI 1 fCommunication multi-
unction input 1 0 None 0:None O 357 O O O O O
71 0h1747 Virtual DI 2 fCommunication multi-
unction input 2 1 FX 0:None O 357 O O O O O
72 0h1748 Virtual DI 3 fCommunication multi-
unction input 3 2 RX 0:None O 357 O O O O O
73 0h1749 Virtual DI 4 fCommunication multi-
unction input 4 3 RST 0:None O 357 O O O O O
74 0h174A Virtual DI 5 fCommunication multi-
unction input 5 4 External Trip 0:None O 357 O O O O O
75 0h174B Virtual DI 6 fCommunication multi-
unction input 6 5 BX 0:None O 357 O O O O O
76 0h174C Virtual DI 7 fCommunication multi-
unction input 7 6 JOG 0:None O 357 O O O O O
77 0h174D Virtual DI 8 fCommunication multi-
unction input 8 7 Speed-L 0:None O 357 O O O O O
78 0h174E Virtual DI 9 fCommunication multi-
unction input 9 8 Speed-M 0:None O 357 O O O O O
79 0h174F Virtual DI 10 fCommunication multi-
unction input 10 9 Speed-H 0:None O 357 O O O O O
80 0h1750 Virtual DI 11 fCommunication multi-
unction input 11 10 Speed-X 0:None O 357 O O O O O
81 0h1751 Virtual DI 12 fCommunication multi-
unction input 12 11 XCEL-L 0:None O 357 O O O O O
82 0h1752 Virtual DI 13 fCommunication multi-
unction input 13 12 XCEL-M 0:None O 357 O O O O O
83 0h1753 Virtual DI 14 fCommunication multi-
unction input 14 13 RUN Enable 0:None O 357 O O O O O
84 0h1754 Virtual DI 15 fCommunication multi-
unction input 15 14 3-Wire 0:None O 357 O O O O O
85 0h1755 Virtual DI 16 fCommunication multi-
unction input 16 15 2nd Source 0:None O 357 O O O O O
16 Exchange
0:None O - O O O O O
17/18 Up/Down
19 Reserved
20 U/D Clear
21 Analog Hold
Table of Functions
426
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
22 I-Term Clear
23 OPID
penloop
24 P Gain2
25 XCEL Stop
26 2nd Motor
27 Trv Offset Lo
28 Trv Offset Hi
29 Interlock 1
30 Interlock 2
31 Interlock 3
32 Interlock 4
33 Reserved
34 Pre Excite
35 eSpeed/Torqu
36 ASR Gain 2
37 ASR P/PI
38 Timer In
39 Thermal In
40 Dis Aux Ref
41 SEQ-1
42 SEQ-2
43 Manual
44 Go Step
45 Hold Step
46 FWD JOG
47 REV JOG
48 Trq Bias
49 XCEL-H
50 KEB Select
51 Fire Mode
86 0h1756 Virt DI Status
Communication multi-
function input
monitoring
- - 0 X 357 O O O O O
90 0h175A SComm Mon
el Monitor type selection 0 Int 485 0
:
1 Keypad Int 485 O 358 O O O O O
91 0h175B NRcvFrame
um
Number of reception
frames - 0 - 358 O O O O O
92 0h175C NErr Frame
um
Number of error
frames - 0 - 358 O O O O O
93 0h175D NNak Frame
um
Number of writing
error frames - 0 - 358 O O O O O
94
note 29-2) Comm Update
Communication
update 10 YNeos 0 - 358 O O O O O
note29-2) COM 94 is displayed when the communication option module is installed.
427
Table of Functions
Function
Table
13.8 Parameter Mode – Applied Function Group (APP)
Applied Function Group (PAR APP)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0–99 20 O - O O O O O
01 0h1801 App Mode Applied function selection
0 None
0:
None X - O O O X X
1 Traverse
2 Proc PID
3 Reserved
4 SAuto
equence
08
Note30) 0h1808 Trv Apmlit % Traverse operating range 0–20 (%) 0.0 O 281 O O O X X
09 0h1809 Trv Scramb % mTraverse scramble
agnitude 0–50 (%) 0.0 O 281 O O O X X
10 0h180A Trv Acc Time Traverse acceleration time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 2.0 O 281 O O O X X
11 0h180B Trv Dec Time tTraverse deceleration
ime 0.1–600.0 (sec) 3.0 O 281 O O O X X
12 0h180C Trv Offset Hi Traverse offset upper limit 0–20.0 (%) 0.0 O 281 O O O X X
13 0h180D Trv Offset lo Traverse offset lower limit 0–20.0 (%) 0.0 O 281 O O O X X
16
Note31) 0h1810 PID Output PID output monitor (%) 0.00 - 218 O O O X X
17 0h1811 PID Ref Value PID reference monitor (%) 50.00 - 218 O O O X X
18 0h1812 PID Fdb Value PID feedback monitor (%) 0.00 - 218 O O O X X
19 0h1813 PID Ref Set PID reference setting -100–100 (%) 50% O 218 O O O X X
20 0h1814 RPID
ef Source PID reference selection
0 Keypad
0:Key
pad X 218 O O O X X
1 V1
2 I1
3 V2
4 I2
5 Int 485
6 Encoder
7 FieldBus
8 PLC
9 Synchro
10 Binary Type
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 30) APP 08–13 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “Traverse”.
Note 31) APP 16–45 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “Proc PID” or APP-
01(App Mode) is set as “MMC” and Requl Bypass (APO-34) is set as “No”.
Table of Functions
428
Applied Function Group (PAR APP)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 0h1815 FPID
/B Source PID feedback selection
0 V1
0:V1 X 218 O O O X X
1 I1
2 V2
3 I2
4 Int 485
5 Encoder
6 FieldBus
7 PLC
8 Synchro
9 Binary Type
22 0h1816 PID P-Gain PID proportional gain 0-1000 (%) 50.0 O 218 O O O X X
23 0h1817 PID I-Time PID integral time 0-200.0 (sec) 10.0 O 218 O O O X X
24 0h1818 PID D-Time PID differential time 0-1000 (ms) 0 O 218 O O O X X
25 0h1819 PID F-Gain PID feed forward gain 0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 O 218 O O O X X
26 0h181A P Gain Scale Proportional gain scale 0-100.0 (%) 100.0 X 218 O O O X X
27 0h181B PID Out LPF PID output filter 0-10000 (ms) 0 O 218 O O O X X
28 0h181C PID Mode PID mode select 0 Process PID 0:Process
1 Normal PID PID 218 218 O O O X X
29 0h181D PID Limit Hi fPID upper limit
requency
PID lower limit
frequency (Hz)–300
(Hz)
60.00 O
218
O O O X X
30 0h181E PID Limit Lo fPID lower limit
requency
-300–PID upper limit
frequency (Hz) -60.00 O 218 O O O X X
31 0h181F PID Out Inv PID output inverse 10 No 0:No 218 218 O O O X X
Yes
32 0h1820 SPID Out
cale PID output scale 0.1–1000 (%) 100.0 X 218 O O O X X
34 0h1822 Pre-PID Freq mPID control period
ovement frequency
0–maximum
frequency (Hz) 0.00 X 218 O O O X X
35 0h1823 Pre-PID Exit mPID control period
ovement level 0–100 (%) 0.0 X 218 O O O X X
36 0h1824 DPre-PID
elay
PID control period
movement delay time 0–9999 (sec) 600 O 218 O O O X X
37 0h1825 PID Sleep DT tPID sleep mode delay
ime 0–999.9 (sec) 60.0 O 218 O O O X X
38 0h1826 FPID Sleep
req
PID sleep mode
frequency
0–maximum
frequency (Hz) 0.00 O 218 O O O X X
39 0h1827 LPID WakeUp
ev PID wake up level 0–100 (%) 35 O 218 O O O X X
40 0h1828 MPID WakeUp
od
PID wake up mode
setting
0 Below Level 0:Below
Level O
218
1 Above Level O O O X X
2 Beyond Level
41 0h1829 PID Rev Run
En
PID reverse operation 0 No 0:No X
218
O O O X X
1 Yes
42
0 %
0:% O
218
1 Bar O O O X X
2 mBar
3 Pa
429
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
4 KPa
5 Hz
6 rpm
7 V
8 I
9 kW
10 HP
11 ℃
12 ℉
43 0h182B GPID Unit
ain PID unit gain 0–300 (%) 100.00 O 218 O O O X X
44 0h182C SPID Unit
cale PID unit scale
0 X 0.01
2:x 1 O 218 O O O X X
1 X 0.1
2 X 1
3 X 0.1
4 X 0.01
45 0h182D PID P2-Gain gPID 2nd proportional
ain 0–1000 (%) 100.0 X 218 O O O X X
Note 31) APP 16–45 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “Proc PID” or APP-
01(App Mode) is set as “MMC” and Requl Bypass (APO-34) is set as “No”.
Table of Functions
430
13.9 Parameter Mode – Auto Sequence Operation
Group (AUT)
Auto Sequence Operation Group (PAR AUT)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0-99 10 O - O O O X X
01 0h1901 Auto Mode Auto operation type 10 Auto-A 0:Auto-A X 277 O O O X X
Auto-B
02
Note32) 0h1902 Auto Check
Auto operation terminal
delay time 0.02–2.00 (sec) 0.10 X 277 O O O X X
03 0h1903 Seq Select Sequence type selection 1–2 1 O 277 O O O X X
04
Note33) 0h1904
Step
Number 1
Number of sequence 1
steps 1–8 2 O 277 O O O X X
05
Note34) 0h1905
Step
Number 2
Number of sequence 2
steps 1–8 2 O 277 O O O X X
10
Note35) 0h190A Seq 1/1 Freq 1/1 step frequency
0.01–maximum
frequency (Hz) 11.00 O 277 O O O X X
11 0h190B Seq 1/1 XcelT 1/1 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
12 0h190C SSeq 1/1
teadT
1/1 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
13 0h190D Seq 1/1 Dir 1/1 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
14 0h190E Seq 1/2 Freq 1/2 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 21.00 O 277 O O O X X
15 0h190F Seq 1/2 XcelT 1/2 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
16 0h1910 SSeq 1/2
teadT
1/2 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
17 0h1911 Seq 1/2 Dir 1/2 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
18 0h190E Seq 1/3 Freq 1/3 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 31.00 O 277 O O O X X
19 0h190F Seq 1/3 XcelT 1/3 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
20 0h1910 SSeq 1/3
teadT
1/3 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
21 0h1915 Seq 1/3 Dir 1/3 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
22 0h1906 Seq 1/4 Freq 1/4 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 41.00 O 277 O O O X X
23 0h1907 Seq 1/4 XcelT 1/4 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
24 0h1918 SSeq 1/4
teadT
1/4 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
25 0h1919 Seq 1/4 Dir 1/4 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
26 0h191A Seq 1/5 Freq 1/5 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 51.00 O 277 O O O X X
27 0h191B Seq 1/5 XcelT 1/5 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
28 0h191C SSeq 1/5
teadT
1/5 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
29 0h191D Seq 1/5 Dir 1/5 operation direction 0 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
requency (Hz) 60.00 O 277 O O O X X
31 0h191F Seq 1/6 XcelT 1/6 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
32 0h1920 SSeq 1/6
teadT
1/6 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
33 0h1921 Seq 1/6 Dir 1/6 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
34 0h1922 Seq 1/7 Freq 1/7 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 51.00 O 277 O O O X X
35 0h1923 Seq 1/7 XcelT 1/7 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
36 0h1924 SSeq 1/7
teadT
1/7 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
37 0h1925 Seq 1/7 Dir 1/7 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
38 0h1926 Seq 1/8 Freq 1/8 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 21.00 O 277 O O O X X
39 0h1927 Seq 1/8 XcelT 1/8 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
40 0h1928 SSeq 1/8
teadT
1/8 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
41 0h1929 Seq 1/8 Dir 1/8 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
43
Note36) 0h192B Seq 2/1 Freq 2/1 step frequency
0.01–maximum
frequency (Hz) 12.00 O 277 O O O X X
44 0h192C Seq 2/1 XcelT 2/1 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
45 0h192D SSeq 2/1
teadT
2/1 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
46 0h192E Seq 2/1 Dir 2/1 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
47 0h192F Seq 2/2 Freq 2/2 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 22.00 O 277 O O O X X
48 0h1930 Seq 2/2 XcelT 2/2 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
49 0h1931 SSeq 2/2
teadT
2/2 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
50 0h1932 Seq 2/2 Dir 2/2 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
51 0h1933 Seq 2/3 Freq 2/3 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 32.00 O 277 O O O X X
52 0h1934 Seq 2/3 XcelT 2/3 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
53 0h1935 SSeq 2/3
teadT
2/3 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
54 0h1936 Seq 2/3 Dir 2/3 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
52 0h1937 Seq 2/4 Freq 2/4 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 42.00 O 277 O O O X X
56 0h1938 Seq 2/4 XcelT 2/4 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
57 0h1939 SSeq 2/4
teadT
2/4 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
58 0h193A Seq 2/4 Dir 2/4 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
59 0h193B Seq 2/5 Freq 2/5 step frequency 0.01–maximum 52.00 O 277 O O O X X
Table of Functions
432
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
frequency (Hz)
60 0h193C Seq 2/5 XcelT 2/5 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
61 0h193D SSeq 2/5
teadT
2/5 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
62 0h193E Seq 2/5 Dir 2/5 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
63 0h193F Seq 2/6 Freq 2/6 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 60.00 O 277 O O O X X
64 0h1940 Seq 2/6 XcelT 2/6 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
65 0h1941 SSeq 2/6
teadT
2/6 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
66 0h1942 Seq 2/6 Dir 2/6 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
67 0h1943 Seq 2/7 Freq 2/7 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 52.00 O 277 O O O X X
68 0h1944 Seq 2/7 XcelT 2/7 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
69 0h1945 SSeq 2/7
teadT
2/7 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
70 0h1946 Seq 2/7 Dir 2/8 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
71 0h1947 Seq 2/8 Freq 2/8 step frequency f0.01–maximum
requency (Hz) 22.00 O 277 O O O X X
72 0h1948 Seq 2/8 XcelT 2/8 Acc/Dec time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
73 0h1949 SSeq 2/8
teadT
2/8 steady speed
operation time 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O 277 O O O X X
74 0h194A Seq 2/8 Dir 2/8 operation direction 10 Reverse 1:Forward O 277 O O O X X
Forward
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 32) AUT group is displayed only when APP-01(App Mode) is set as “Auto Sequence”.
Note 33) AUT-04 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 Seq Select) is set as “1”.
Note 34) AUT-05 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “2”.
Note 35) AUT-10–41 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “1”.
Note 36) AUT-43–74 codes are displayed only when AUT-03 (Seq Select) is set as “2”.
433
Table of Functions
Function
Table
13.10 Parameter Mode – Option Module Function
Group (APO)
Option Module Function Group (PAR APO)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0-99 20 O O O O O O
01
Note37) 0h1A01
Enc
Opt Mode
Encoder function
item
0 None
1 Feedback 0:None O 150 O O O O O
2 Reference
04 0h1A04 TEnc
ype Sel
Encoder type
selection
0 Line Driver
0:Line
1 T Driver X 150 O O O O O
otem or
Com
2 Open Collector
05 0h1A05 PEnc
ulse Sel
Encoder pulse
direction
0 (A+B)
(0:
1 -(A+B) A+B) X 150 O O O O O
2 A
06 0h1A06 PEnc
ulse Num
Number of encoder
pulses 10–4096 1024 X 150 O O O O O
08 0h1A08 Enc Monitor Feedback monitor - - O 150 O O O O O
09 0h1A09 Pulse Monitor Reference monitor - - O 150 O O O O O
10 0h1A0A Enc Filter Encoder input filter 0–10000 (ms) 3 O 150 O O O O O
11 0h1A0B Enc Pulse x1 iEncoder minimum
nput pulse 0–100 (kHz) 0.0 O 150 O X O X O
12 0h1A0C Enc Perc y1 mOutput at encoder
inimum pulse (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 O 150 O X O X O
13 0h1A0D Enc Pulse x2 iEncoder maximum
nput pulse 0–200 (kHz) 100 O 150 O X O X O
14 0h1A0E Enc Perc y2 pEncoder maximum
ulse output (%) 0–100 (%) 100 O 150 O X O X O
20
Note38) 0h1A14
Aux Motor
Run
Display of number of
auxiliary motor
movements
0–4 0 O 286 O O O X X
21 0h1A15 Starting Aux mStarting auxiliary
otor selection 1–4 1 X 286 O O O X X
22 0h1A16 AutoOp Time oAuto change
peration time X:XX (Min) 0:00 O 286 O O O X X
23 0h1A17 Start Freq 1 s1st auxiliary motor
tarting frequency 0–60 (Hz) 49.99 O 286 O O O X X
24 0h1A18 Start Freq 2 s2nd auxiliary motor
tarting frequency 0–60 (Hz) 49.99 O 286 O O O X X
25 0h1A19 Start Freq 3 s3rd auxiliary motor
tarting frequency 0–60 (Hz) 49.99 O 286 O O O X X
26 0h1A1A Start Freq 4 s4th auxiliary motor
tarting frequency 0–60 (Hz) 49.99 O 286 O O O X X
Table of Functions
434
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
27 0h1A1B Stop Freq 1 s1st auxiliary motor
top frequency 0–60 (Hz) 15.00 O 286 O O O X X
28 0h1A1C Stop Freq 2 s2nd auxiliary motor
top frequency 0–60 (Hz) 15.00 O 286 O O O X X
29 0h1A1D Stop Freq 3 s3rd auxiliary motor
top frequency 0–60 (Hz) 15.00 O 286 O O O X X
30 0h1A1E Stop Freq 4 s4th auxiliary motor
top frequency 0–60 (Hz) 15.00 O 286 O O O X X
31 0h1A1F Aux Start DT sAuxiliary motor
tarting delay time 0–3600.0 (sec) 60.0 O 286 O O O X X
32 0h1A20 Aux Stop DT dAuxiliary motor stop
elay time 0–3600.0 (sec) 60.0 O 286 O O O X X
33 0h1A21 Num of Aux nAuxiliary motor
umber selection 0–4 4 X 286 O O O X X
34 0h1A22 Regul Bypass Bypass selection
0 No
0:No X 286 O O O X X
1 Yes
35 0h1A23 Auto Ch Mode sAuto change mode
election
0 None
1 Aux 1: Aux X 286 O O O X X
2 Main
36 0h1A24 Auto Ch Time Auto change time 0–99:00 (min) 72:00 O 286 O O O X X
38 0h1A26 Interlock Interlock selection
0 No
0:No O 286 O O O X X
1 Yes
39 0h1A27 Interlock DT dInterlock movement
elay time
0.1–360.0
(sec) 5.0 O 286 O O O X X
40 0h1A28 Actual Pr Diff
Auxiliary motor
movement pressure
difference
0–100 (%) 2 O 286 O O O X X
41 0h1A29 Aux Acc Time
Main motor
acceleration time
when number of
pumps decreases
0–600.0 (sec) 2.0 O 286 O O O X X
42 0h1A2A Aux Dec Time
Main motor
deceleration time
when number of
pumps increases
0–600.0 (sec) 2.0 O 286 O O O X X
58
Note39) 0h1A3A
PLC LED
Status PLC option LED status - - O
Optio
n O O O O O
59 0h1A3B PLC S/W Ver SPLC option module
/W version - 1.X O On ptio O O O O O
60 0h1A3C PLC Wr Data 1 PLC write data 1 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
61 0h1A3D PLC Wr Data 2 PLC write data 2 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
62 0h1A3E PLC Wr Data 3 PLC write data 3 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
63 0h1A3F PLC Wr Data 4 PLC write data 4 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
64 0h1A40 PLC Wr Data 5 PLC write data 5 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O Optio O O O O O
435
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
n
65 0h1A41 PLC Wr Data 6 PLC write data 6 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
66 0h1A42 PLC Wr Data 7 PLC write data 7 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
67 0h1A43 PLC Wr Data 8 PLC write data 8 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
76 0h1A4C PLC Rd Data 1 PLC read data 1 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
77 0h1A4D PLC Rd Data 2 PLC read data 2 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
78 0h1A4E PLC Rd Data 3 PLC read data 3 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
79 0h1A4F PLC Rd Data 4 PLC read data 4 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
80 0h1A50 PLC Rd Data 5 PLC read data 5 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
81 0h1A51 PLC Rd Data 6 PLC read data 6 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
82 0h1A52 PLC Rd Data 7 PLC read data 7 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
83 0h1A53 PLC Rd Data 8 PLC read data 8 0–FFFF (Hex) 0000 O nOptio O O O O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 37) APO-01–14 codes are displayed only when the encoder module is installed.
Note 38) APO-20–42 codes are displayed only when APP-01 (App Mode) is set as “MMC”.
Note 39) APO-58–83 codes are displayed only when the PLC option module is installed.
Table of Functions
436
13.11 Parameter Mode – Protective Function Group
(PRT)
Protective Function Group (PAR PRT)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0–99 40 O O O O O O
04 0h1B04 Load Duty Load amount setting 0 Normal Duty 1:Heavy
1 Heavy Duty Duty X 328 O O O O O
05 0h1B05 Phase Loss Chk pInput/output open-
hase protection
Bit 00–11
00 X
오류!
책갈
피가
정의
되어
있지
않습
니다.
O O O O O
1 Output open phase
2 Input open phase
06 0h1B06 IPO V Band dInput voltage range
uring open-phase 1–100 (V) 40 X 335 O O O O O
07 0h1B07 Trip Dec Time fDeceleration time at
ault trip 0–600 (sec) 3.0 O 338 O O O O O
08 0h1B08 RST Restart tStarting selection on
rip reset 10 YNeos 0:No O 257 O O O O O
09 0h1B09 Retry Number aNumber of
utomatic restarts 0–10 0 O 257 O O O O O
10
Note40) 0h1B0A Retry Delay
Automatic restart
delay time 0–60.0 (sec) 1.0 O 257 O O O O O
11 0h1B0B Lost KPD Mode lKeypad command
oss operation mode
0 None
1 Warning 0:None O 338 O O O O O
2 Free-Run
3 Dec
12 0h1B0C MLost Cmd
ode
Speed command
loss operation mode
0 None
0:None O 339 O O O O O
1 Free-Run
2 Dec
3 Hold Input
4 Hold Output
5 Lost Preset
13
Note41) 0h1B0D Lost Cmd Time
Speed command
loss judgment time 0.1–120 (sec) 1.0 O 339 O O O O O
14 0h1B0E Lost Preset F
Operation frequency
at speed command
loss
Start frequency
–maximum frequency
(Hz)
0.00 O 339 O O O O O
15 0h1B0F AI Lost Level lAnalog input
oss judgment level
0 Half of x1 0:Half of
1 Below x1 x1 O 339 O O O O O
17 0h1B11 OL Warn Select sOverload alarm
election 10 YNeos 0:No O 328 O O O O O
18 0h1B12 OL Warn Level Overload alarm level 30–180 (%) 150 O 328 O O O O O
19 0h1B13 OL Warn Time Overload alarm time 0–30.0 (sec) 10.0 O 328 O O O O O
20 0h1B14 OL Trip Select tMotion at overload
rip
0 None 1:Free-
1 Free-Run Run O 328 O O O O O
2 Dec
437
Table of Functions
Function
Table
Protective Function Group (PAR PRT)
No.
Communi-
cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
21 0h1B15 OL Trip Level Overload trip level 30–200 (%) 180 O 328 O O O O O
22 0h1B16 OL Trip Time Overload trip time 0–60 (sec) 60.0 O 328 O O O O O
25 0h1B19 UL Warn Sel sUnder load alarm
election 10 YNeos 0:No O 342 O O O O O
26 0h1B1A UL Warn Time tUnder load alarm
ime 0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O 342 O O O O O
27 0h1B1B UL Trip Sel sUnder load trip
election
0 None
1 Free-Run 0:None O 342 O O O O O
2 Dec
28 0h1B1C UL Trip Time Under load trip time 0–600 (sec) 30.0 O 342 O O O O O
29 0h1B1D UL LF Level lUnder load lower
imit level 10–30 (%) 30 O 342 O O O O O
30 0h1B1E UL BF Level lUnder load upper
imit level 10–100 (%) 30 O 342 O O O O O
31 0h1B1F No Motor Trip mOperation on no
otor trip 10 FNroenee-Run 0: None O 348 O O O O O
32
Note42) 0h1B20
No Motor
Level
No motor
detection current
level
1–100 (%) 5 O 348 O O O O O
33 0h1B21 No Motor Time dNo motor
etection delay 0.1–10.0 (sec) 3.0 O 348 O O O O O
34 0h1B22 Thermal-T Sel oOperation at motor
0 Self-cool 0:Self-
1 Forced-cool cool O 326 O O O O O
42 0h1B2A ETH 1min oElectronic thermal
ne minute rating 120–200 (%) 150 O 326 O O O O O
43 0h1B2B ETH Cont
Electronic thermal
prevention
continuous rating
50–200 (%) 120 O 326 O O O O O
45 0h1B2D BX Mode BX mode select
0 (sec) Free-run 0.0 (Free-
0.1–600.0 run) O 346 O O O X X
(sec) Dec
Table of Functions
438
Protective Function Group (PAR PRT)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range VInitial
alue
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
50 0h1B32 Stall Prevent Stall prevention
Bit 0000–1111
0000 X 330 O O X O X
1 Accelerating
2 Steady speed
3 Decelerating
4 Flux Breaking
51 0h1B33 Stall Freq 1 Stall frequency 1 -Start frequency
stall frequency 1 (Hz) 60.00 O 330 O O X O X
52 0h1B34 Stall Level 1 Stall level 1 30–250 (%) 180 X 330 O O X O X
53 0h1B35 Stall Freq 2 Stall frequency 2 –Stall frequency 1
stall frequency 2 (Hz) 60.00 O 330 O O X O X
54 0h1B36 Stall Level 2 Stall level 2 30–250 (%) 180 X 330 O O X O X
55 0h1B37 Stall Freq 3 Stall frequency 3 –Stall frequency 2
stall frequency 4 (Hz) 60.00 O 330 O O X O X
56 0h1B38 Stall Level 3 Stall level 3 30–250 (%) 180 X 330 O O X O X
57 0h1B39 Stall Freq 4 Stall frequency 4
Stall frequency 3
–maximum frequency
(Hz)
60.00 O 330 O O X O X
58 0h1B3A Stall Level 4 Stall level 4 30–250 (%) 180 X 330 O O X O X
66 0h1B42 WDB
arn %ED DB resistance warning level 0–30 (%) 0 O 341 O O O O O
70 0h1B46 FOver SPD
req
Overspeed decision
frequency 20–130 (%) 120.0 O 344 X X O X O
72 0h1B48 TOver SPD
ime Overspeed judgment time 0.01–10.00 (sec) 0.01 O 344 X X O X O
73 0h1B49 TSpeed Dev
rip Speed error failure 10 YNeos 0:No O 344 X X O X X
74 0h1B4A BSpeed Dev
and Speed error width 2
-maximum frequency
(Hz) 20.00 O 344 X X O X X
75 0h1B4B TSpeed Dev
ime
Speed error judgment
time 0.1–1000.0 (sec) 1.0 O 344 X X O X X
77 0h1B4D CEnc Wire
heck
Encoder option connection
check 10 YNeos 0:No O 344 X X O X O
78 0h1B4E TEnc Check
ime
Encoder connection check
time 0.1–1000.0 (sec) 1.0 O 344 X X O X O
79 0h1B4F MFAN Trip
ode Cooling fan fault selection 0 Trip 1
:War
1 Warning ning O 345 O O O O O
80 0h1B50 MOpt Trip
ode
Operation selection on
optional module trip
0 None 1:Free
1 Free-Run -Run O 347 O O O O O
2 Dec
81 0h1B51 LVT Delay dLow voltage trip
ecision delay time 0–60.0 (sec) 0.0 X 345 O O O O O
82 0h1B52 LV2 Enable oSelect ‘Low Voltage2’ during
peration 10 YNeos 0:No X 348 O O O O O
* The grey cells indicate a hidden code which is only visible when setting a code.
Note 40) PRT-10 codes are displayed only when PRT-09(Retry Number) is set above “0”.
Note 41) PRT-13–15 codes are displayed only when PRT-12(Lost Cmd Mode) is not “None”.
Note 42) PRT-32–33 codes are displayed only when PRT-31(No Motor Trip is set as “Free-Run”.
439
Table of Functions
Function
Table
13.12 Parameter Mode – 2nd Motor Function Group
(M2)
2nd Motor Function Group (PAR M2)
No.
Communi
-cation
Address
LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value
Shift in
Opera-
tion
Page
Control Mode
V
/
F
S
L
V
C
S
L
T
V
C
T
00 - Jump Code Jump code 0–99 14 O - O O X O X
04 0h1C04 M2-Acc Time Acceleration time 0–600 (sec) ABelow 75 kW 20.0 O 261 O O X O X
bove 90 kW 60.0
05 0h1C05 M2-Dec Time Deceleration time 0–600 (sec) ABelow 75 kW 30.0 O 261 O O X O X
bove 90 kW 90.0
06 0h1C06 M2-Capacity Motor capacity 20 0.2 kW - X 261 O O X O X
1 185 kW
07 0h1C07 M2-Base Freq Base frequency 30–400 (Hz) 60.00 X 261 O O X O X
08 0h1C08 M2-Ctrl Mode Control mode
0 V/F
0:V/F X 261 O O X O X
1 V/F PG
2 Slip Compen
3 Sensorless-1
4 Sensorless-2
10 0h1C0A M2-Pole Num Motor pole 2–48
Dependent on
motor capacity
X 261 O O X O X
11 0h1C0B M2-Rated Slip Rated slip speed 0–3000 (rpm) X 261 O O X O X
12 0h1C0C M2-Rated Curr Motor rated current 1.0–1000.0 (A) X 261 O O X O X
13 0h1C0D M2-Noload Curr Motor no-load current 0.5–1000.0 (A) X 261 O O X O X
14 0h1C0E M2-Rated Volt Motor rated voltage 180–480 (V) X 261 O O X O X
15 0h1C0F M2-Efficiency Motor efficiency 70–100 (%) X 261
16 0h1C10 M2-Inertia Rt Load inertia ratio 0–8 X 261 O O X O X
17 - M2-Rs Stator resistance 0–9.999 () X 261
18 - M2-Lsigma Leak inductance 0–99.99 (mH) X 261
19 - M2-Ls Stator inductance 0–999.9 (mH) X 261 O O X O X
20 - M2-Tr Rotor time constant 25–5000 (ms) X 261 O O X O X
25 0h1C19 M2-V/F Patt V/F pattern
0 Linear
1 Square 0:Linear X 261 O O X O X
2 User V/F
26 0h1C1A M2-Fwd Boost Forward torque boost 0–15 (%) Below 75 kW: 2.0
Above 90 kW: 1.0
X 261 O O X O X
27 0h1C1B M2-Rev Boost Reverse torque boost 0–15 (%) X 261 O O X O X
28 0h1C1C M2-Stall Lev Stall prevention level 30–150 (%) 150 X 261 O O X O X
29 0h1C1D M2-ETH 1min mElectronic thermal one
inute rating 100–200 (%) 150 X 261 O O X O X
30 0h1C1E M2-ETH Cont cElectronic thermal
ontinuous rating 50–150 (%) 100 X 261 O O X O X
40 0h1C28 LM2-
oadSpdGain
Revolution display
gain 0.1–6000.0 (%) 100.0 O 261 O O O O O
41 0h1C29 LM2-
oadSpdScal
Revolution display
scale
0 x 1
0:x 1 O 261 O O O O O
1 x 0.1
2 x 0.01
3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
42 0h1C2A LM2-
oadSpdUnit
Revolution display
unit 10 MRppmm 0:rpm O 261 O O O O O
Table of Functions
440
13.13 Trip Mode (TRP Current (or Last-x))
Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Trip Name ( x) Trip type display - - 306
01 Output Freq Output frequency at trip - - 306
02 Output Current Output current at trip - - 306
03 Inverter State Acc/Dec status at trip - - 306
04 DCLink Voltage DC voltage - - 306
05 Temperature NTC temperature - - 306
06 DI State Status of input terminals - 0000 0000 306
07 DO State Status of output terminals - 000 306
08 Trip On Time Trip time since power on - 0/00/00 00:00 306
09 Trip Run Time Trip time since operation start - 0/00/00 00:00 306
10 Trip Delete Delete trip history
0 No
0:No 307
1 Yes
13.14 Config Mode (CNF)
Config Mode (CNF)
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Jump Code Jump code 0-99 1 -
01 Language Sel Keypad language selection
0. English
0. English 325
1. Russian
2. Español
3. Polski
4. Turkish
02 LCD Contrast LCD contrast adjustment - - 275
10 Inv S/W Ver Inverter S/W version - 1.XX 275
11 KeypadS/W Ver Keypad S/W version - 1.XX 275
12 KPD Title Ver Keypad title version - 1.XX 275
20
Note43)
Anytime Para Status display 0 Frequency 0: Frequency 305
21 Monitor Line-1 Monitor mode
2:Output
Current 301
23 Monitor Line-3 Monitor mode display 3 3 Output Voltage 3:Output 301
441
Table of Functions
Function
Table
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
4 Output Power Voltage
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI State
8 DO State
9 V1 Monitor (V)
10 V1 Monitor (%)
11 I1 Monitor (mA)
12 I1 Monitor (%)
13 V2 Monitor (V)
14 V2 Monitor (%)
15 I2 Monitor (mA)
16 I2 Monitor (%)
17 PID Output
18 PID ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
22 Trq Bias Ref
23 Speed Limit
24 Load Speed
25 Temperature
24 Mon Mode Init Monitor mode initialization 0 No 0:No 301
1 Yes
30 Option-1 Type Option slot 1 type display 0 None 0:None Option
31 Option-2 Type Option slot 2 type display 1 PLC 0:None Option
32 Option-3 Type Option slot 3 type display
2 Profi
3 Ext. I/O 0:None Option
4 Encoder
40 Parameter Init Parameter initialization
0 No
- 268
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
3 BAS Grp
4 ADV Grp
5 CON Grp
6 IN Grp
7 OUT Grp
8 COM Grp
9 APP Grp
10 AUT Grp
11 APO Grp
12 PRT Grp
13 M2 Grp
41 Changed Para Display changed parameter 0 View All 0:View All 271
1 View Changed
42 Multi Key Sel Multi-function key item 0 None 0:None 271
Table of Functions
442
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
1 JOG Key
2 Local/Remote
3 UserGrp SelKey
43 Macro Select Macro function item
0 None
1 Draw App 0:None 273
2 Traverse
44 Erase All Trip Delete trip history 0 No 0:No 275
1 Yes
45 UserGrp AllDel Delete user registration code 0 No 0:No 271
1 Yes
46 Parameter Read Read parameters 0 No 0:No 267
1 Yes
47 Parameter Write Write parameters 0 No 0:No 267
1 Yes
48 Parameter Save Save parameters 0 No 0:No 267
1 Yes
50 View Lock Set Hide parameter mode 0-9999 Unlocked 269
51 View Lock Pw Password for hiding parameter mode 0-9999 Password 269
52 Key Lock Set Lock parameter edit 0-9999 Unlocked 270
53 Key Lock Pw Password for locking parameter edit 0-9999 Password 270
60 Add Title Del Additional title update 0 No 0:No 275
1 Yes
61 Easy Start On Simple parameter setting 0 No 0:No 274
1 Yes
62 WHCount Reset Power consumption initialization 0 No 0:No 275
1 Yes
70 On-time Accumulated inverter motion time hmm/dd/yy
h:mm - 275
71 Run-time Accumulated inverter operation time hmm/dd/yy
h:mm - 275
72 Time Reset iAccumulated inverter operation time
nitialization
0 No
0:No 275
1 Yes
74 Fan Time tAccumulated cooling fan operation
ime
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm - 275
75 Fan Time Rst Accumulated cooling fan operation
time initialization
0 No
- 275
1 Yes
Note 43) Item 7 and 8 are not in the Anytime Para item.
443
Table of Functions
Function
Table
13.15 User/Macro Mode – Draw Operation Function
GroupMC1
U&M MC1
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Jump Code Jump code 0–99 1 -
01 Acc Time Acceleration time 0–600 (sec) Below 75 kW 20 173
Above 90 kW 60
02 Dec Time Deceleration time 0–600 (sec) Below 75 kW 30 173
Above 90 kW 90
03 Cmd Source Command source 0–5 1:Fx/Rx-1 160
04 Freq Ref Src Frequency reference source 0–9 2:V1 136
05 Control Mode Control mode 0–5 0:V/F 177
06 Aux Ref Src Auxiliary reference source 0–4 2:I1 198
07 Aux Calc Type Auxiliary calculation type 0–7 0 198
08 Aux Ref Gain Auxiliary reference gain -200–200 (%) 100.0 198
09 V1 Polarity V1 input polarity selection 0–1 0:Unipolar 137
10 V1 Filter V1 input filter time constant 0–10000 (ms) 10 137
11 V1 Volt x1 V1 minimum input voltage 0–10 (V) 0.00 137
12 V1 Perc y1 Output at V1 minimum voltage (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 137
13 V1 Volt x2 V1 maximum input voltage 0–10 (V) 10.00 137
14 V1 Perc y2 Output at V1 maximum voltage (%) 0–100 (%) 100.00 137
15 V1 –Volt x1’ V1 –minimum input voltage -10–0 (V) 0.00 137
16 V1 –Perc y1’ Output at V1 –minimum voltage (%) -100–0 (%) 0.00 137
17 V1 –Volt x2’ V1–maximum input voltage -10–0 (V) -10.00 137
18 V1 –Perc y2 Output at V1 –maximum voltage (%) -100–0 (%) -100.00 137
19 V1 Inverting Rotation direction change 0–1 0:No 137
20 I1 Monitor(mA) I1 input amount display 0–20 (mA) 0.00 146
21 I1 Polarity I1 polarity display 0–1 0 146
22 I1 Filter I1 input filter time constant 0–10000 (ms) 10 146
23 I1 Curr x1 I1 minimum input current 0–20 (mA) 4.00 146
24 I1 Perc y1 Output at I1 minimum current (%) 0–100 (%) 0.00 146
25 I1 Curr x2 I1 maximum input current 4–20 (mA) 20.00 146
26 I1 Perc y2 Output at I1 maximum current (%) 0–100 (%) 100.00 146
27 I1 Curr x1’ I1 –minimum input current -20–0 (mA) 0.00 146
28 I1 Perc y1’ Output at I1 - minimum current (%) -100–0 (%) 0.00 146
29 I1 Curr x2’ I1 – maximum input current -20–0 (mA) -20.00 146
30 I1 Perc y2’ Output at I1 maximum current (%) -100–0 (%) -100.00 146
31 I1 Inverting Rotation direction change 0–1 0:No 146
32 P1 Define P1 terminal function setting 0–48 0:FX 160
33 P2 Define P2 terminal function setting 0–48 1:RX 160
34 P3 Define P3 terminal function setting 0–48 5:BX 346
Table of Functions
444
13.16 User/Macro mode – Traverse Operation Function
Group (MC2)
Traverse Operation Function Group (U&M MC2)
No. LCD Display Name Setting Range Initial Value Page
00 Jump Code Jump code 0–99 1 -
01 Acc Time Acceleration time 0–600 (sec)
Below 75 kW 20
281
Above 90 kW 60
02 Dec Time Deceleration time 0–600 (sec)
Below 75 kW 30
281
Above 90 kW 90
03 Cmd Source Command source 0–5 1:Fx/Rx-1 281
04 Freq Ref Src Frequency reference source 0–9 0:Keypad-1 281
05 Control Mode Control mode 0–5 0:V/F 281
06 App Mode Applied function selection 0–4 1:Traverse 281
07 Trv Apmlit % Traverse operating range 0–20 (%) 0.0 281
08 Trv Scramb % Traverse scramble magnitude 0–50 (%) 0.0 281
09 Trv Acc Time Traverse acceleration time 0.1–600 (sec) 2.0 281
10 Trv Dec Time Traverse deceleration time 0.1–600 (sec) 2.0 281
11 Trv Offset Hi Traverse offset upper limit 0–20 (%) 0.0 281
12 Trv Offset lo Traverse offset lower limit 0–20 (%) 0.0 281
13 P1 Define P1 terminal function setting 0–48 0:FX 281
14 P2 Define P2 terminal function setting 0–48 1:RX 281
15 P3 Define P3 terminal function setting 0–48 5:BX 281
16 P4 Define P4 terminal function setting 0–48 27:Trv 281
17 P5 Define P5 terminal function setting 0–48 28:Trv 281
Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off)
Safety
Funtion
STO(Safe
445
14 Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off)
The iS7 Inverter series provides resilient safety features via optional safety expansion module.
When an emergency arises, it instantly blocks inverter output to protect the operator and
reduce the risk.
14.1 Safety Standard Product
The performance levels for the safety function are as follows.
EN ISO 13849-1: Category 3, PL Class d
EN 61508: SIL 2 (EN 60204-1, Stop Category 0)
When using the safety function, perform a risk assessment for the system and ensure that it meets
the safety requirements.
Note
When wiring the inverter or performing maintenance, the inverter must be turned off. The safety
function is not used to block the power supply to the motor or insulate the inverter electrically.
14.2 About the Safety Function
The safety function is a safety torque off (STO) function used to prevent a torque and to block
the power supply to the motor by interrupting the gate using hard wires.
STO (Safety Torque Off): IEC61800-5-2
The STO function is independently connected to each input signal for 2 channels (SE(SFT11) and
SP(SFT2)). The connected circuit cuts off the operation signal for the inverter output and turns
off the power modules.
If the safety function is activated during operation, the inverter blocks the output and the
motor enters Free Run mode. Also, the “Safety Opt Err” message is displayed on the keypad.
To release the fault trip, short-circuit terminal block to return to the normal operation status
and press the [STOP/RESET] key.
Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off)
446
14.2.1 Safety Function Wiring Diagram
Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off)
Safety
Funtion
STO(Safe
447
14.2.2 Installing the Safety Board to 0.75–160 kW Product
Because 0.75-160kW products provide safety purpose product, therefore please use this product
with safety option.
Safety options are not available for general products.
14.2.3 Installing the Safety Board to 185–375 kW Product
Please buy safety option and apply to standard products because there is no safety product for
185-375kW.
Refer to the following figure and install the safety board to the main SMPS board of the inverter
using cable connectors.
Safety Funtion STO(Safe Torque Off)
448
14.2.4 Safety Function Terminal Description
24S – SE (SFT1) 24S – SP (SFT2) SR + SR-
Short: Normal operation Short: Normal operation
B Contact relay output
Open: Safety Trip (output terminal
blockage )
Open: Safety Trip (output
blockage)
14.2.5 Cable Specification for Signal Terminal Block Wiring
Terminal Wire Thickness
Electrical Standard
Variety Name mm2 AWG
24S Safety Input power
0.33–1.25mm2
(16–22 AWG)
Shield type
twisted-pair
wire
24 VDC, Max. 10 mA
SE Safety Input 1 (SFT1) Short: Safety function stop
(24S-SE or SP)
Open: Safety function operation
(24S-SP or SP)
SP Safety Input 2 (SFT2)
SR+,SR- Safety function completion
output relay DC 24 V, 5 A below (B contact)
The length of the safety wiring at the input terminal must be less than 30 m. Longer wiring can
Using over 30M may cause malfunctions because of noise.
Marine Certification
449
Classified
Product
15 Marine Certification
Marine classification is that the structure and equipment of the ship has been estimated from
the test with the certain standards for certificate issued and given by classification society.
SV-IS7 Series is certificated with product testing, process, production equipment and test
equipment to install on the shipping.
15.1 DNV (Det Norske Veritas) Marine Certification
Details
Certification Institute DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
Certificate Number E-11815
Certified Model Types Frequency Converter for Asynchronous Motors SV series
(Range: 0.75 kW–375 kW 200–400 VAC supply)
Compliance CDet Norske Veritas’ Rules for Classification of Ships, High Speed & Light
raft Det Norske Veritas’ Offshore Standards
15.2 Bureau Veritas (Marine & Offshore Division)
Marine Certification Details
Certification Institute Bureau Veritas (Marine&Off shore Division)
Certificate Number 40183/AO BV
Certified Model Types SV-iS7 series (Range: 0.75 kW–75 kW, 200V / 0.75 kW–375 kW, 400V)
Compliance Bureau Veritas Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships
15.3 ABS Marine Certification Details
Certification institute ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Certificate Number 14-BK1291913-PDA
Certified Model Types SV-iS7 series (Range: 0.75 kW–75 kW, 200V / 0.75 kW–90 kW, 400V)
Compliance Installation of the product on an ABS class vessel, MODU or facility
Marine Certification
450
15.4 KR Marine Certification Details
Certification institute KR (Korean Resister)
Certificate Number PTD25585-AC003
Certified Model Types SV-iS7 series (Range: 0.75 kW–75 kW, 200V / 0.75 kW–375 kW, 400V)
Compliance Korean Resister’s Rules for Classification of Steel Ships
15.5 Marine Certification Models for SV-iS7 Products
Type DNV BV ABS KR
3-Phase
200V
SV0008iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0015iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0022iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0037iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0055iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0075iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0110iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0150iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0185iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0220iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0300iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0370iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0450iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0550iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
SV0750iS7-2□□□□V O O O O
3-Phase
400V
SV0008iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0015iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0022iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0037iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0055iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
Marine Certification
451
Classified
Product
Type DNV BV ABS KR
SV0075IS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0110iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0150iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0185iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0220iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0300iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0370iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0450iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0550iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0750iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV0900iS7-4□□□□V O O O O
SV1100iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV1320iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV1600iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV1850iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV2200iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV2800iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV3150iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
SV3750iS7-4□□□□V O O X O
Using a Single Phase Power Source
452
16 Using a Single Phase Power Source
16.1 Single Phase Rating
The SV-iS7 series inverter is a three-phase variable frequency drive (VFD). When applying single-
phase power to a three-phase VFD, there are several limitations that need to be considered.
The standard pulse-width-modulated (PWM) VFDs use a 6-pulse diode rectifier. The 6-pulse
rectification results in 360 Hz DC bus ripple when using a three-phase 60 Hz power supply.
However, when using a single-phase power source, the DC bus ripple becomes 120 Hz. The
input current and harmonics increase, and the VFDs DC bus circuit is subject to higher stress in
order to deliver equivalent power.
Input current distortion of 90% THD and greater can be expected under single-phase input,
compared to approximately 40% with three-phase input as indicated in Figure 2.
Therefore, use of a single-phase requires the three-phase VFD power rating to be reduced
(derated) to avoid over stressing the rectifier and the DC link components.
Using a Single Phase Power Source
453
Single
Phase
16.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current
When using a three-phase VFD with single-phase input, derating the drive’s output current and
horsepower will be necessary due to the increase in DC bus ripple voltage and current. In
addition, the input current through the remaining two phases on the diode bridge converter
will approximately double, creating another derating consideration for the VFD. Input current
harmonic distortion will increase, making the overall input power factor low.
Input current distortion over 100% is likely under single-phase conditions without a reactor.
Therefore, the reactor is always required for such applications.
Using a motor that is selected by the three-phase drive ratings with single-phase input may
result in poor performance and premature drive failure.
The selected drive of single-phase current ratings must meet or exceed the motor current
ratings as indicated in the following table.
Single-Phase Current Rating (200V/60Hz)*
[kW] [HP]
16.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance
The AC supply voltage must be within the required voltage range of 240/480 VAC +10% to –5%
to maximize motor power production.
The standard product with three-phase voltage input has an allowable range of +10% to –15%.
A stricter input voltage tolerance of +10 to –5% applies when using the drive with a single-
phase supply. The average bus voltage with single-phase input is lower than the equivalent of a
three-phase input. Therefore, the maximum output voltage (motor voltage) will be lower with a
single-phase input.
The minimum input voltage must be no less than 228 VAC for 240 volt models and 456 VAC for
480 V models, to ensure motor voltage production of 207 VAC and 415 VAC, respectively.
If full motor torque must be developed near the base speed (full power) it will be necessary to
maintain a rigid incoming line voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be produced.
Operating a motor at reduced speed (reduced power), or using a motor with a base voltage
that is lower than the incoming AC supply rating (ex. 208 VAC motor with a 240 VAC supply) will
also minimize the effect of voltage deprivation ( 240 VAC Input for 208 V motor, 480 VAC Input
for 400 V motor).
Using a Single Phase Power Source
455
Single
Phase
16.4 Wiring and Peripheral Device
It is important that input wiring and branch circuit protection be selected based on the drive’s
single-phase input current rating indicated in Table 1–2.
The single-phase input current after derating differs from the three-phase input indicated on
the VFD nameplate.
Refer to the following figure and connect the single-phase AC input wiring to the inverter’s R[L1]
and T[L3] terminals.
Note
The drive ratings in Table 1 are valid for 60 Hz input only.
16.5 Other Considerations
The following lists other precautions that need to be considered when using a three-phase VFD
using single-phase power source.
• Depending on the increased DC ripple, sensorless mode may result in poor performance
when operating a three-phase inverter using single-phase power supply.
• If a phase open trip occurs, cancel the input phase open protection bit setting (PRT-05:
Phase Loss Chk).
• Do not allow the current to exceed the single-phase rating. Motor capacity, motor overload
trip, and E-thermal functions must be set to protect motor.
• A reactor is always required. Use a model type that comes with built-in DC reactor. The iS7
200 V 30–75kW and 400 V 280–375 kW products do not have built-in DC reactors. Install an
external AC reactor separately for these model types (Do not install DC reactors externally).
Storage and Disposal
459
Storage &
Disposal
17 Storage and Disposal
17.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation (refer to
3.1 Installation Considerations on page16.
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between 0˚C and
65˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
• Do not expose the drive to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture level
below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.
• If the product is exposed to a humid or dusty environment, separate the product and then
keep it in an adequate environment that is suitable for product operation.
If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors may lose their charging
characteristics and become depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and
allow the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.
17.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable materials
are included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing materials and all
metal parts can be recycled.
Storage and Disposal
460
CE DOC 추가
Storage and Disposal
461
EMI/RFI
Filters
CE DOC 추가
Storage and Disposal
462
CE DOC 추가
Product Warranty
463
Product Warranty
Warranty Information
Fill in this warranty information form and keep this page for future reference or when warranty
service may be required.
Product Name LSIS Standard Inverter Date of Installation
Model Name LS SV-iS7 Warranty Period
Customer Info
Name
(or company)
Address
Contact Info.
Retailer Info
Name
Address
Contact info.
Warranty Period
The product warranty covers product malfunctions, under normal operating conditions, for 12
months from the date of installation. If the date of installation is unknown, the product
warranty is valid for 18 months from the date of manufacturing. Please note that the product
warranty terms may vary depending on purchase or installation contracts.
Warranty Service Information
During the product warranty period, warranty service (free of charge) is provided for product
malfunctions caused under normal operating conditions. For warranty service, contact an official
LSIS agent or service center.
Non-Warranty Service
A service fee will be incurred for malfunctions in the following cases:
• intentional abuse or negligence
• power supply problems or from other appliances being connected to the product
Product Warranty
464
• acts of nature (fire, flood, earthquake, gas accidents etc.)
• modifications or repair by unauthorized persons
• missing authentic LSIS rating plates
• expired warranty period
Visit Our Website
Visit us at http://www.lsis.biz for detailed service information.
Product Warranty
465
UL Mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that UL
has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL
standards for product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all
components inside the product had been certified for UL standards as well.
CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety and
environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine
manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the EMC
guidelines for safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive
We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment
used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers requirements
stated for drives.
EAC mark
The EurAsian Conformity mark (EAC) indicates that the product conforms to all technical
regulations of the Eurasian Customs Union assessment procedures. This means that it meets
all requirements and technical regulations applicable to the product, and that it can be serviced
in all service centers of the producer in the territory of all Customs Union member countries.
Index
466
Index
[ESC] key .......................................................................................... 106
[Mode] key ..................................................................................... 106
[PROG / Ent] key........................................................................ 106
[UP] key............................................................................................. 106
2nd motor operation .......................................................... 252
2nd operation mode ................................................................ 187
2nd command source ...................................... 188
Shared command (Main Source) .................. 188
Shared command (Main Source)) ................. 188
3-wire operation ........................................................................ 203
4-pole standard motor ................................................ 8, 9, 11
Acc/Dec pattern ......................................................................... 167
linear pattern ...................................................... 167
S-curve pattern ................................................... 167
Acc/Dec reference .................................................................... 163
Delta Freq ............................................................. 162
Max Freq .............................................................. 162
Acc/Dec reference frequency .......................................... 162
Ramp T Mode ..................................................... 162
Acc/Dec stop ................................................................................ 170
Acc/Dec time ................................................................................ 161
Acc/Dec time switch frequency ..................... 165
configuration via multi-function terminal .. 164
maximum frequency ........................................ 161
operation frequency ......................................... 163
add User group
UserGrp SelKey .................................................. 261
analog frequency hold.......................................................... 149
analog hold ......................................................... 149
analog input
V1 voltage input ................................................. 134
analog input selection switch (SW2).......................... 145
anti-hunting regulator ........................................................... 286
asymmetric ground power ................................................... 54
asymmetric ground structure
disabling the EMC filter ...................................... 55
auto restart settings ................................................................ 248
auto sequence operation ................................................... 267
auto torque boost .................................................................... 176
auto tuning ......................................................... 219
auto tuning .................................................................................... 219
All (rotating) ........................................................ 221
All (static) ..................................................... 222, 224
default parameter setting .............................. 220
auxiliary frequency ................................................................... 191
auxiliary reference ............................................ 191
auxiliary reference gain................................... 192
final command frequency calculation ........ 193
frequency configuration ................................. 191
main reference .................................................. 191
basic configuration diagram ............................................... 82
bipolar ....................................................................................... 73, 139
bit setting ........................................................................................ 189
bit (Off) .................................................................. 189
bit (On) .................................................................. 189
brake control ................................................................................ 272
BR Control ........................................................... 273
brake engage sequence ........................ 273, 274
brake release sequence ......................... 273, 274
broadcast ......................................................................................... 353
built-in surge filter ....................................................................... 75
cable
shielded twisted pair .................................... 79, 80
cable tie .................................................................... 293, 303, 326
carrier frequency ........................................................................ 250
charge indicator ............................................................................ 56
charge lamp ..................................................................................... 56
command ........................................................................................ 153
Cmd Source ........................................................ 153
configuration ...................................................... 153
command source
fwd/rev command ............................................ 154
keypad .................................................................. 153
RS-485................................................................... 156
commercial power source transition ......................... 254
Config (CNF) mode ................................................................. 265
inverter S/W version ......................................... 265
Index
467
keypad S/W version .......................................... 265
keypad title update ........................................... 265
LCD contrast ........................................................ 265
reset cumulative power consuption ............ 265
connecting cables to the power terminl block .... 60
0.75–22 kW (200 V/400 V) .................................. 60
185–220 kW (400 V) ............................................. 63
280–375 kW (200 V/400 V) ................................. 64
30–75 kW (200 V/400 V) ...................................... 61
90–160 kW (400 V) ............................................... 62
connecting the cables .............................................................. 48
considerations for installation ............................................ 16
air pressure ........................................................... 16
altitude/vibration ................................................. 16
ambient humidity ................................................ 16
ambient temperature......................................... 16
environmental factors ........................................ 16
storing temperature ........................................... 16
contactors .......................................................................................... 82
cooling fan
fan control ........................................................... 255
cursor keys
[UP] key ................................................................. 106
DB resistor dimensions ......................................................... 100
DB unit dimensions .................................................................... 92
DB unit specifications ............................................................... 88
DC braking after stop ............................................................ 181
DC braking frequency ........................................................... 181
DC reactor specifications ....................................................... 85
delta wiring ....................................................................................... 52
derating ............................................................................................ 252
digital source ................................................................................ 158
droop control ............................................................................... 239
dwell operation ........................................................................... 205
Acc/Dec dewel frequency ................................ 205
acceleration dwell .............................................. 205
deceleration dwell ............................................. 205
easy start ......................................................................................... 264
easy start mode ............................................................................ 79
EEP Rom Empty.......................................................................... 257
EMC filter ............................................................................................ 54
form B terminal (Normally Closed) ............................. 189
forward or reverse run prevention .............................. 158
frame dimensions and weight ........................................... 39
UL Enclosed Type 1, IP 21 Type ....................... 39
UL Enclosed Type 12, IP54 Type ...................... 41
free-run stop ................................................................................. 182
frequency hold by analog input ................................... 149
frequency jump .......................................................................... 186
frequency limit ............................................................................ 184
frequency upper and lower limit value ....... 184
maximum/start frequency .............................. 184
frequency reference .................................................... 134, 179
frequency reference for 0 10V input ........................ 135
frequency reference for -10 10V Input ................... 139
frequency setting ...................................................................... 133
I1 current input .................................................. 142
I2 current input .................................................. 145
keypad .................................................................. 134
pulse input ........................................................... 146
RS-485 ................................................................... 148
terminal V2/I2 ..................................................... 144
V1 terminal .......................................................... 134
frequency upper and lower limit value
Frequency lower limit value ............................ 184
Frequency upper limit value ........................... 184
ground
class 3 ground ...................................................... 57
ground connection ..................................................................... 57
I2 terminal ....................................................................................... 145
IA (illegal data address) ........................................................ 356
ID (illegal data value) ............................................................. 356
IF (illegal function) .................................................................... 356
initializing accumulated electric energy count ... 265
input and output specifications ........................................... 7
200 V Class (0.75–22 kW) ...................................... 7
200 V Class (30–75 kW) .......................................... 8
400 V Class (0.75–22 kW) ...................................... 9
400 V Class (185–375 kW) .................................. 11
400 V Class (30–160 kW) .................................... 10
input phase open
input open-phase protection ......................... 326
input power frequency ......................................................... 256
input power voltage ............................................................... 257
input terminal .............................................................................. 189
bit setting ............................................................ 189
form A (NO) or B (NC) terminal configuration
.......................................................................... 189
NO/NC configuration ....................................... 189
input terminal contact
form A contact ................................................... 327
form B contact ................................................... 327
installation .......................................................................................... 16
basic configuration diagram ............................ 82
location ................................................................... 17
installation conditions ............................................................... 16
jog operation ............................................................................... 196
Jog operation
1-FWD jog ............................................................ 196
2-forward/reverse jog ...................................... 197
Jog frequency ..................................................... 196
keypad input....................................................... 198
jump frequency .......................................................................... 186
keypad
[ESC] key .............................................................. 106
[Mode] key .......................................................... 106
[PROG / Ent] key ................................................ 106
LCD brightness/contrast ................................. 265
navigating between groups........................... 110
S/W version ......................................................... 265
keypad title update ................................................................. 265
kinetic energy buffering ....................................................... 240
lift-type load ...................................................................... 167, 175
linear pattern ................................................................................ 167
linear V/F pattern operation ............................................. 171
base frequency .................................................. 171
start frequency .................................................. 171
local operation ............................................................................ 157
[ESC] key .............................................................. 157
local/remote mode switching ....................... 156
remote peration ................................................ 157
low leakage PWM .................................................................... 251
LS INV 485 Detailed Read Protocol............................ 353
LS INV 485 Detailed Write Protocol ........................... 354
Index
469
LS INV 485 error code .......................................................... 356
FE (Frame Error) ................................................. 356
IA (illegal data address) .................................... 356
ID (illegal data value) ...................................... 356
IF (illegal function) ............................................. 356
WM (write mode error) .................................... 356
LS INV 485 protocol ............................................................... 351
LSINV 485 ....................................................................................... 344
macro selection .......................................................................... 263
draw ....................................................................... 263
traverse ................................................................. 263
magnetic contactor .................................................................... 56
manual torque boost ............................................................. 175
master ................................................................................................ 343
maximum allowed prospective short-circuit
current ......................................................................... iii, 11, 379
MMC function ............................................................................. 275
Modbus-RTU ................................................................................ 344
momentary power interruption ......................... 247, 248
monitor function........................................................................ 291
monitoring
monitor registration protocol details .......... 355
motor features
capacity ................................................................. 207
efficiency .............................................................. 208
no-load current .................................................. 208
output voltage setting ...................................... 178
thermal protection(ETH)
E-Thermal .......................................................................... 316
motor protection ....................................................................... 316
motor thermal protection(ETH) ...................................... 316
multi-function input terminal
multi-function input terminal Off filter ........ 189
multi-function input terminal On filter ........ 189
multi-function input terminal control ....................... 189
multi-function output on/off control ........................ 275
multi-step frequency .............................................................. 150
setting ................................................................... 150
Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H ............................ 151
noise ........................................................................................... 54, 137
normal PWM ................................................................................ 251
number of motor poles ....................................................... 207
operation noise .......................................................................... 250
carrier frequency ............................................... 250
frequency jump ................................................. 186
operation time monitor ....................................................... 314
overload rate ................................................................................ 252
P/I gain .............................................................................................. 248
parameter
display changed parameter ........................... 261
hide parameter mode ..................................... 259
parameter initialization ................................... 258
parameter lock .................................................. 260
password .................................................... 259, 260
parameter initialization ......................................................... 258
parmeter
read/write/save ................................................. 257
part names ........................................................................................... 4
parts illustrated ................................................................................. 4
password .............................................................................. 259, 260
PID
flow control ......................................................... 210
pressure control ................................................ 210
speed control ..................................................... 210
temperature control ........................................ 210
PID control ..................................................................................... 210
PID basic operation .......................................... 210
PID openloop ..................................................... 219
PID operation sleep mode ............................. 218
PID operation switching ................................. 219
PID pre operation ............................................. 217
post-installation checklist ....................................................... 78
Power-on Run .............................................................................. 159
preparing the installation .......................................................... 1
product identification................................................................... 1
product specification details ............................................... 12
control ..................................................................... 12
operation ................................................................ 12
protection function .............................................. 14
structure and operating environment control
............................................................................. 14
Index
470
protocol
LS INV 485 protocol ........................................... 351
PWM ................................................................................................... 250
frequency modulation ..................................... 250
quantizing ....................................................................................... 137
noise ...................................................................... 137
R/S/T terminal ................................................................................. 56
rating
rated motor current .......................................... 207
rated motor voltage .......................................... 219
rated slip frequency .......................................... 209
rated slip speed .................................................. 207
rating plate ........................................................................................... 1
reactor ................................................................................................... 82
regenerated energy ................................................................. 183
remote operation ...................................................................... 157
[ESC] key ............................................................... 157
local operation .................................................... 157
local/remote mode switching ........................ 156
resistor brakes ................................................................................. 82
resonance frequency
carrier frequency ............................................... 250
restarting after a trip
reset and restart ................................................ 160
retry number ................................................................................ 160
ripple ................................................................................................... 137
RS-232 ............................................................................................... 343
communication .................................................. 343
RS-485
communication .................................................. 343
converter .............................................................. 343
integrated communication ............................. 148
signal terminal .................................................... 148
run prevention
Fwd ........................................................................ 159
Rev ......................................................................... 159
S/W version ................................................................................... 265
inverter ................................................................. 265
keypad .................................................................. 265
safe operation mode ............................................................. 204
safety information ........................................................................... ii
S-curve pattern ........................................................................... 167
actual Acc/Dec time .......................................... 169
sensorless-1 vector control ............................................... 225
sensorless-2 vector control ............................................... 227
slave ..................................................................................................... 343
slip ......................................................................................................... 207
slip compensation operation ........................................... 207
speed search configuration............................................... 246
speed search operation ....................................................... 245
Flying Start-1 ....................................................... 245
Flying Start-2 ....................................................... 246
options ................................................................. 246
P/I gain ................................................................. 248
speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm) ................................ 150
speed/torque control switching .................................... 239
square reduction
square reduction load ..................................... 172
V/F pattern operation ...................................... 172
stall
bit On/Off ............................................................ 320
stall prevention ........................................................................... 320
start at power-on
Power-on Run .................................................... 159
start mode ...................................................................................... 179
acceleration start .............................................. 179
start after DC braking ...................................... 179
stop mode ...................................................................................... 180
deceleration stop .............................................. 180
free run stop ....................................................... 182
power braking ................................................... 183
stop after DC braking....................................... 181
surge killer ......................................................................................... 56
technical specifications ............................................................... 7
terminal
form A terminal ................................................. 189
form B terminal ................................................. 189
terminal wiring diagram ......................................................... 58
test run ................................................................................................. 79
time scale setting ...................................................................... 162
0.01sec ................................................................. 162
0.1sec .................................................................... 162
